JP7795105B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines.

Traditionally, gaming machines include slot machines (reel-type gaming machines), pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and jankyu gaming machines, and among these types of gaming machines is the slot machine shown in Patent Document 1, for example.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-144015

In conventional gaming machines, various innovations have been made to enhance gameplay and make the game more enjoyable, and to make the gameplay smoother, but there is still room for further improvement.

The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention has the following features. In the following description of the features, examples of corresponding features in the embodiments described below are shown in parentheses.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a main body member formed in a box shape having an opening, a door member attached to the main body member by a hinge mechanism so as to be able to open and close, and a predetermined substrate having a first surface portion on which a plurality of types of components are arranged and a second surface portion to which lead wires of the plurality of types of components are soldered, the plurality of types of components including a first component, a second component having the same performance as the first component, a third component having a performance different from that of the first component, and a fourth component having a performance different from that of the first component, the second component, and the third component, the first component having lead wires 1a and 1b, the second component having lead wires 2a and 2b, the third component having lead wires 3a and 3b, and the fourth component having a plurality of lead wires 4, the lead wires 1a of the first component being inserted into through holes 1c of the predetermined substrate from the first surface portion side. a lead wire 1b of the first component is inserted into a through hole 1d of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side; an imaginary line segment connecting the through hole 1c and the through hole 1d is defined as a predetermined imaginary line segment 1; the lead wire 1a protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n1 degrees with respect to the predetermined imaginary line segment 1 when the predetermined board is oriented in a predetermined direction and the second surface portion is viewed in a plan view; the lead wire 1b protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n2 degrees with respect to the predetermined imaginary line segment 1 when the predetermined board is oriented in a predetermined direction and the second surface portion is viewed in a plan view; a lead wire 2a of the second component is inserted into a through hole 2c of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side; and a lead wire 2b of the second component is inserted into a through hole 2d of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side and connects the through hole 2c and the through hole 2d. is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 2, and the lead wire 2 a protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n3 degrees with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 2 when the second surface portion is viewed in a plane with the predetermined board in a predetermined orientation, and the lead wire 2 b protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n4 degrees with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 2 when the second surface portion is viewed in a plane with the predetermined board in a predetermined orientation, the lead wire 3 a of the third component is inserted into a through hole 3 c of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side, and the lead wire 3 b of the third component is inserted into a through hole 3 d of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side, and a virtual line segment connecting the through hole 3 c and the through hole 3 d is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 3, and the lead wire 3 a protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n4 degrees with respect to the predetermined virtual line segment 2 when the second surface portion is viewed in a plane with the predetermined board in a predetermined orientation. and the angle with respect to the predetermined imaginary line segment 3 is n5 degrees, the n1 degree and the n3 degree are approximately the same angle, the n2 degree and the n4 degree are approximately the same angle, and the n1 degree and the n5 degree are different angles, predetermined component information is printed on the first surface portion, and in a state where the predetermined board is provided on the inner surface portion of the main body member or the back surface portion of the door member, the predetermined component information is printed on the first surface portion in a horizontal format with characters arranged from left to right, or in a horizontal format with characters arranged from bottom to top, the plurality of lead wires 4 of the fourth component are inserted into a plurality of through holes of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side, and a height of the plurality of lead wires 4 protruding from the second surface portion is higher than a height of the lead wires 3a and the lead wires 3b protruding from the second surface portion .

A gaming machine with the above configuration can increase the enjoyment of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine with the front door removed. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels of the slot machine. FIG. 10 shows symbol combination 1 in the slot machine. FIG. 10 shows symbol combination 2 in the slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 3 in the above slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 4 in the above slot machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram conceptually showing the functions of the slot machine. A diagram showing the relationship between each RT state in the above slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the relationship between each game mode in the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing variables used in the control of the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone, (B) is the lottery for Chance Mode 1, (C) is the lottery for Chance Mode 2-1, (D) is the lottery for Chance Mode 2-2, and (E) is the lottery for Chance Game 3. In the above slot machine, (A) is the chance game number lottery, (B) is the chance cycle lottery, (C) is the EX1 mode lottery, (D) is the EX2 mode lottery, (E) is the AT mode lottery-1, (F) is the AT mode lottery-2, and (G) is the AT mode lottery-3. In the above slot machine, (A) is the Seven 1 lottery, (B) is the Seven 2 lottery, (C) is the AT mode rewrite lottery, (D) is the Seven Loop lottery, (E) is the Gold Seven Loop lottery, (F) is the Gold Seven Loop rewrite lottery, and (G) is the figure showing the contents of the additional mode lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the bell count change lottery, (B) is the Seven Stock 1 lottery, (C) is the Seven Stock 2 lottery, and (D) is the performance lever weight lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of AT cycle lottery-1, (B) is AT cycle lottery-2, (C) is pullback 1 lottery-1, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of pullback 1 lottery-2. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the contents of the draw-back 1 lottery -3, (B) shows the contents of the draw-back 2 lottery, and (C) shows the contents of the AT cycle preferential game number lottery. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing the contents of the seven table 1 lottery and the seven table 2 lottery, respectively, in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the contents of lottery for bell number 1 -1, (B) shows lottery for bell number 1 -2, (C) shows lottery for bell number 2, and (D) shows lottery for bell number 3. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the correspondence between the bonus condition device and the performance group A number, and (B) shows the correspondence between the winning replay condition device and the performance group B number. A diagram showing the correspondence between effect group numbers and condition device group numbers in the above slot machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the winning numbers assigned to each condition device in the slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) shows the bonus condition device, and (B) shows the winning replay condition device (1). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (2) in the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (3) in the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (4) in the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (5) in the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (6) in the slot machine. 10A is a flowchart showing the flow of a setting change process, FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the flow of a game progress control process, and FIG. 10C is a flowchart showing the flow of a game start waiting process in the slot machine. 10A is a flowchart showing the flow of an internal lottery process in the slot machine, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the flow of a group number setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of section type number management lever processing in the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the section type number management lever process. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition process, and (B) is a flowchart showing the process of drawing the number of chance games. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when an AT wins in the above slot machine. 10A is a flowchart showing the flow of seven number correction processing, FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the flow of correction counter processing, and FIG. 10C is a flowchart showing the flow of arrival flag processing in the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing when entering AT in the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the loop CU rank set processing, (B) is the seven loop lottery processing, and (C) is the flow of the gold seven loop lottery correction processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the bell count counter correction process in the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lever wait process in the slot machine. 10A is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 1 lever processing, (B) is the chance mode number determination processing, and (C) is the flow of the main game state number 2, 5 lever processing in the above slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing after AT winning in the above slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 3 lever processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction processing. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the main game state number 4 lever processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the AT period preferential game number lottery processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a standby effect process in the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of section type number management game ending processing in the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a flow of an accumulation counter process in the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state number 0 all-stop processing in the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the post-AT termination process in the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the above-mentioned AT entry end processing. 10A is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 1 full stop processing in the above slot machine, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 2, 5 full stop processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state number 3 all-stop processing in the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main game state number 3 all-stop processing. 10 is a flowchart showing another continuation of the main game state number 3 full stop processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state number 4 all-stop processing in the slot machine. 10A is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state number 6 full stop processing, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state number 7 full stop processing in the slot machine. This is a flowchart showing the flow of the advantageous zone clear counter management process in the above slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a timer interrupt process in the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing LED boards arranged around the display screen of the slot machine. 1A is a diagram showing a modified example of the LED board in the slot machine, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing another modified example of the LED board. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing light-emitting components in the slot machine. 1A is a diagram showing a modified example of the light emitting component in the slot machine, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing another modified example of the light emitting component. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the installation posture of the light-emitting components in the above slot machine, (B) is a diagram showing another example of the installation posture of the light-emitting components, and (C) is a diagram showing yet another example of the installation posture of the light-emitting components. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the biased state of the red LED element of the light-emitting component in the slot machine, where (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the red LED element is biased to the right, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the red LED element is biased downward. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of a different color is installed between each red LED element of two light-emitting components arranged in the horizontal direction, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of a different color is installed between each red LED element of two light-emitting components arranged in the vertical direction. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing a state in which no LED element of a different color is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which an LED element of a different color in another light-emitting component is installed between the red LED elements of two light-emitting components arranged in the left-right direction. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine to which the above-mentioned light-emitting component can be applied. FIG. 10 is a rear view of a pachinko game machine to which the above-mentioned light-emitting component can be applied. This is an oblique view of the board case unit in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine from the rear. A diagram showing the main control board housed in the board case of the board case unit in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine. This is a view of the circuit board case unit in the above-mentioned pachinko game machine from the front. This is a view of the circuit board case unit in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine from the rear. In the above pachinko gaming machine, (A) is a diagram showing a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lights that make up the setting value display monitor are in an unlit state, (B) is a diagram showing a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lights are in an lit state, and (C) is a diagram showing a case where some LED segments of the LED indicator lights are in an lit state. In the above pachinko gaming machine, (A) is a diagram showing a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lights that make up the performance display monitor are in an unlit state, (B) is a diagram showing a case where all LED segments of the LED indicator lights are in an lit state, and (C) is a diagram showing a case where some LED segments of the LED indicator lights are in an lit state. A diagram showing the relationship between the height of the crimping member of the board case unit and the CPU in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine. These are diagrams showing the step portion formed in the base case of the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine, where (A) is a diagram showing the shape of the step portion, (B) is a diagram showing the step portion as viewed from the direction of the right edge of the base case, and (C) is a diagram showing the state in which a colored sealing material is affixed to the step portion. A diagram showing the relationship between the screws and connectors on the main control board in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing symbol combinations in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing symbol combinations in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing symbol combinations in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing symbol combinations in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of condition devices in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of condition devices in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of condition devices in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of condition devices in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of condition devices in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of condition devices in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of condition devices in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. A figure showing a table of numbers placed according to the winning probability of the role drawing in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. A figure showing a table of numbers placed according to the winning probability of the role drawing in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of game states in a gaming machine of a second embodiment. FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the content displayed on the image display device during AT play in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a game progress control process for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine of a second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a normal lever process that is executed in response to operation of the start lever during normal operation of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a normal-time all-stop process that is executed in response to the stopping of all reels during normal operation of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sub-bonus lever processing that is executed in response to the operation of the start lever during the sub-bonus of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sub-bonus all-stop processing executed in response to the stopping of all reels during a sub-bonus of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lever processing during AT play that is executed in response to the operation of the start lever during AT play of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a full stop process during AT play that is executed when all reels are stopped during AT play of a gaming machine of a second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a continuation chance lever process that is executed in response to operation of the start lever during a continuation chance of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a continuation chance all-stop process that is executed in response to the stopping of all reels during a continuation chance of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the push order navigation display image that displays the order in which stop switches should be pressed to obtain advantageous gaming results in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the content of the successful action that is executed when the stop switch is operated according to the push order of the push order navigation display image in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the content of the failure action that is executed when the stop switch is operated in an order different from the order in which it is pressed in the push order navigation display image in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display content when power is restored after operating the stop switch in accordance with the push order in the push order navigation display image in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display content when power is restored after the stop switch is operated in an order different from the order shown in the push order navigation image in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display content when power is restored after operating the stop switch in accordance with the push order in the push order navigation display image in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display content when power is restored after operating the stop switch in accordance with the push order in the push order navigation display image in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display content when power is restored after the stop switch is operated in an order different from the order shown in the push order navigation image in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display content when an error that occurred while displaying the push order navigation effect image is cleared in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display content when power is restored after an interruption in the gaming machine of the third embodiment while the push order navigation display image is announcing the winning of a rare role. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when the power is turned on while pressing one of the MAX-BET switch and the 1-BET switch in the gaming machine of the third embodiment, and then the other BET switch is operated. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when the power is turned on while pressing the settlement switch and then the MAX-BET switch is operated in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when, in the gaming machine of the third embodiment, the power is turned on while one stop switch is pressed, and then another stop switch is operated. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when one stop switch is pressed while another stop switch is operated in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switches that are disabled when the reset switch is pressed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the stage change effect executed when the stage in the stage effect is changed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the end time of the stage change effect and the change in volume when playing for the minimum playing time in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the internal structure of the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a state in which the main control device is installed inside the cabinet in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a state in which the front door is open in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a main control device of a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a main control device of a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a main control device of a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a case body of a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of the board case mounting mechanism in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a board case mounting mechanism in a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of a main control board in a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a modified example of the main control board in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. This is a diagram showing multiple types of electrical elements mounted in a specified area on the surface of another main control board in a slot machine of the fourth embodiment, as viewed from the surface side of the board. A diagram showing the lead wires of multiple types of electrical elements mounted in the specified area of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment, as viewed from the back side of the board. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which multiple types of electrical elements mounted in another predetermined area on the surface of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment are viewed from the board surface side. FIG. This is a diagram showing the lead wires of multiple types of electrical elements mounted in the other specified area on the back surface of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment, as viewed from the back surface of the board. A figure showing the relationship between the distance between the conductive layers of the above-mentioned other main control board and the thickness of the game medal in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing the state in which a game medal abuts on the edge portion of the above-mentioned other main control board in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing a state in which a pachinko ball abuts on the edge portion of the above-mentioned other main control board in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the protruding heights of lead wires of multiple types of electronic components mounted on the other main control board in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing how the other specified area of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment looks when viewed from the front. A figure showing how the other specified area of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment looks when viewed with your head tilted to the side. A figure showing an example of the form of part names printed on the surface of the above-mentioned another main control board in the fourth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of component frame lines printed on the surface of the other main control board in the fourth embodiment. A diagram showing the relationship between the height of the information display lamp and the LED element mounted on the surface of the above-mentioned another main control board in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing a table of number placements according to the winning probability of the role drawing in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the aerial battle effect executed in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of an aerial battle performance process for executing the aerial battle performance. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a battle presentation process executed in the aerial battle presentation process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition control to the ending section executed in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for controlling a transition to the ending section. An explanatory diagram to explain the correct push order notification control during the advantageous zone executed in the slot machine of the fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing an example of a process for executing control to notify correct button press order during the above-mentioned advantageous zone.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the above drawings.
In the following explanation, "role determination process" refers to a selection action (also referred to as "role determination") such as a lottery executed using electronic devices, etc., in order to randomly select one or more role determination result numbers (winning items) from a plurality of pre-set role determination result numbers (consisting of one or more game roles or losses (excluding cases where losses are not set)). Here, the role determination result number specifies one or more game roles (also referred to as "permitted roles" or "winning roles") or losses that are allowed to be formed in the game in which the role determination result number is determined (selected). Note that role determination is also referred to as "internal lottery" or "role lottery," and the "selection" in lottery or winning is also referred to as "choice" or "sen."

Furthermore, when describing "a gaming role is formed" or "a gaming role is formed," "formation" is used as a concept indicating that the symbol combination (corresponding symbols) that constitutes the gaming role (whether it is a gaming role that results in the payout of gaming medals (a minor role) or a gaming role that does not result in a payout (a replay role or a special role)) corresponding to the determined role determination result number is displayed in a predetermined stopping pattern (for example, a pattern lined up on an active line, as described below). However, the timing of formation can be any appropriate timing, such as when the reel stopping operation is performed at a time when the corresponding symbols of the gaming role can be stopped and displayed on the active line, when the corresponding symbols of the gaming role are stopped and displayed on the active line, when the slot machine identifies that the corresponding symbols of the gaming role have been stopped and displayed on the active line, or when the identification result is stored in a memory area.

In the following explanation, the player's operation of inserting (treating) game medals into the medal insertion slot 21 (described below) and the operation of pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to use the specified number of credited (stored) game medals required to play a game are collectively referred to as the betting operation. Furthermore, this betting operation, along with the player's operation of pressing the settlement switch 24 (described below), tilting the start lever (also referred to as the "start switch") 25, and pressing the stop switches (also referred to as "stop buttons") 26a, 26b, and 26c are collectively referred to as the game operations.

Generally, the term "insertion" in slot machines can mean either "putting a medal into the slot machine" or "using a medal for play." In the following explanation, the term "insertion" will generally be used in the former sense, and the term "bet" in the latter sense. Furthermore, "objects used for play" are also referred to as "game media." These game media can be medals, objects like pachinko balls, or value required for play (game value) electromagnetically recorded on recording media such as magnetic cards or contact/contactless IC cards, or on storage devices such as servers accessible via personal authentication. This game value can be represented by conceptual medals with the same value as actual medals, or by fictitious or real currency units, or by points with no particular meaning.

Furthermore, pressing any one stop switch while all reels are spinning is called the first stop operation. Furthermore, pressing any one of the two stop switches corresponding to the spinning reel while the remaining two reels are spinning is called the second stop operation. Furthermore, pressing the stop switch corresponding to the remaining reel while that reel is spinning is called the third stop operation.

Furthermore, the "number of game medals paid out" (also referred to as "number of payouts") refers to the number of game medals awarded to a player in one game. The act of paying out game medals includes the act of actually paying out game medals from the slot machine to the outside (also referred to as "actual payout"), and the act of increasing the numerical value electromagnetically stored as game medals stored within the slot machine (also referred to as "stored additional payout").

In addition, the "number of game medals acquired" (also referred to as "number of medals acquired") refers to a numerical value counted as the total number of game medals acquired by a player (paid out to a player) during a specified period (which can be set arbitrarily, for example, during an AT period or a bonus period).
Furthermore, the "difference in number of game medals" (also referred to as "difference number") refers to the value (which may be a negative value) obtained by subtracting the total number of game medals betted from the total number of game medals paid out during a specified period. The "number of game medals acquired" and the "difference in number of game medals" can be used as different concepts, but in the following they will be treated as synonymous.

A "freeze" (also referred to as a "freeze effect") refers to a fixed delay in the execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of a game. Two types of freezes can be appropriately set: one that is set when the start lever 25 is operated (also referred to as a "reel spin start freeze"), and one that is set after all reels have stopped spinning (also referred to as a "reel spin stop freeze"). During the freeze period, game operations by the player are not effectively accepted. During the freeze period, a spinning drum effect (also referred to as a "reel effect") may be performed. A spinning drum effect is an effect in which reels 3a, 3b, and 3c (described below) are rotated, regardless of game operations by the player, and an arbitrary symbol combination is displayed in a static state.

In the following explanation, "push navigation" refers to a process (action) that notifies the player of the order and position to press to assist in achieving the game role selected by role determination. Among push navigations, those that specifically assist in achieving a replay role are referred to as "RP navigation" (RP stands for replay), those that assist in achieving a winning role (minor role) are referred to as "winning navigation," and those that assist in determining the position to press to stop a specific symbol on an active line are referred to as "eye push navigation" (mainly performed by the secondary control means). From another perspective, assisting with the position to press can also be said to assist the player with the timing at which to operate the stop switch. Furthermore, when it is necessary to distinguish between the push navigation performed on the main control means side and the push navigation performed on the sub-control means side, the former is also referred to as "main side push navigation" ("main side RP navigation", "main side winning navigation", "main side eye push navigation"), and the latter is also referred to as "sub side push navigation" ("sub side RP navigation", "sub side winning navigation", "sub side eye push navigation"), or as "push navigation effect" ("RP navigation effect", "winning navigation effect", "eye push navigation effect"). The former and latter are also collectively referred to as stop switch operation mode notification effect.

In the following explanations and drawings, numerical values may be expressed not only in decimal but also in binary or hexadecimal notation. To distinguish between these, when expressed in binary notation, a "B" is added to the end of the numerical value, and when expressed in hexadecimal notation, an "H" is added to the end of the numerical value. When expressed in decimal notation, no special notation is added to the end of the numerical value.

[First embodiment]
FIG. 1 shows a slot machine (referred to as "slot machine 1") as a first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention, and the basic configuration of this slot machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8.
<Appearance of the slot machine>
The slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 5 (main body member) that is open at the front (forward), and a front door 2 that is attached so as to be able to open and close at the front opening of the cabinet 5. When viewed from the front, the front door 2 is attached so as to be able to open and close sideways relative to the front opening of the cabinet 5 using hinge mechanisms 6a to 6c that are disposed at the front of the left side plate 5a of the cabinet 5. As shown in FIG. 1A, an upper panel assembly 10, a middle panel assembly 20, a lower panel assembly 30, and a tray assembly 40 are attached to the front of the front door 2, in that order from the top.

In the center of the upper panel assembly 10, a display screen 11a (also referred to as "image display unit DP") of an image display device (also referred to as "liquid crystal display device") 11 (see Figure 2) arranged on the back side thereof is arranged facing forward, and a first performance lamp 12, second performance lamps 13a and 13b, and third performance lamps 14a and 14b are arranged around it. In addition, a pair of fourth performance lamps 16a and 16b are arranged on the left and right of the display screen 11a, and an upper speaker 15a is arranged between the third performance lamp 14a and the fourth performance lamp 16a, and an upper speaker 15b is arranged between the third performance lamp 14b and the fourth performance lamp 16b.

In the center of the middle panel assembly 20, there is a display window W overlooking the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c arranged side by side inside the main body cabinet. Below this display window W, there are a medal insertion slot 21 for inserting game medals (game media), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, a MAX-BET switch 23 for betting the maximum bet allowable number of game medals (also called the "specified number", for example, three) at once, and a clearing switch 24 for paying out bet game medals and/or credited game medals. The machine is equipped with a calculation switch 24, a start lever 25 that is operated to start the rotation of all reels 3a, 3b, and 3c (the reels are also called "drums"); three stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c that individually stop the rotation of each reel 3a, 3b, and 3c (the stop switch 26a on the left in the figure corresponds to reel 3a, the stop switch 26b in the middle corresponds to reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c on the right corresponds to reel 3c); and a reject switch 27 that returns game medals that have been inserted through the medal insertion slot 21 and become trapped.

Each stop switch has a button-shaped operation acceptance part that retracts when pressed by the player's hand and returns to its original position due to spring force or the like when the player releases their hand. When this operation acceptance part is pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electrical circuit close and the switch changes from an OFF state to an ON state; when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts open and the switch changes from an ON state to an OFF state.

Between the medal slot 21 and the max-bet switch 23, there are provided selection buttons (also referred to as "directional buttons" or "cross keys") 54 and a decision button (also referred to as "menu button" or "push button") 55, which are used by the player to input information into the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, the selection buttons 54 and decision button 55 are collectively referred to as "sub-buttons." As shown in FIG. 1(B), the selection buttons 54 consist of four buttons: an up button 54U, a down button 54D, a left button 54L, and a right button 54R, which specify up, down, left, or right directions. The up, down, left, or right direction is specified depending on which button is operated by the player. The decision button 55 is made of a light-transmitting material and has a light source such as an LED installed inside. When the decision button 55 is disabled, the light source inside the switch is turned off; when enabled, it flashes (or may be lit).

When a sub-button is pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electrical circuit close, switching the state from OFF to ON; when the pressing operation is released (hand is removed), the contacts open, switching the state from ON to OFF. When a sub-button is operated effectively, the sub-control means 200, described below, may execute a predetermined effect process in accordance with the operation. It may also execute an effect process that prompts the player to operate a sub-button. Furthermore, by operating the sub-button in a predetermined procedure, it is possible to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the brightness of the screen of the image display device 11 or the volume of the speaker.

Here, the up button 54U, down button 54D, left button 54L, and right button 54R that make up the selection button 54 may be individually turned on/off, or a cross-shaped key top (cross key) may be provided so that the button in the direction in which the cross key is tilted is turned on.
When the L and right buttons 54R can be turned on/off, two adjacent buttons (up and right, right and down, down and left, left and up) can be turned on at the same time, but opposing buttons (up and down, right and left) may not be able to be turned on at the same time.

The interior of the medal insertion slot 21 branches into an acceptance passage (leading to the hopper 50, described below) through which inserted medals pass if they are validly accepted, and a return passage (leading to the medal payout outlet 41, described below) through which inserted medals pass if they are not accepted. A blocker 48 (see Figure 2) is provided at the branching point. This blocker 48 is configured to selectively open one of the acceptance passage and the return passage and close the other, so that when inserted medals are validly accepted, they are guided to the acceptance passage, and when not, they are guided to the return passage. In the following explanation, when the blocker 48 is in the ON state, it indicates that a gaming medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to the receiving passage (a state in which gaming medals can be received), and when the blocker 48 is in the OFF state, it indicates that a gaming medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to the return passage (a state in which gaming medals cannot be received).

In addition, three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c (see Figure 2) are provided inside the medal insertion slot 21 for detecting game medals. Inserted medal sensor 28a detects that a game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 and is installed upstream of the blocker 48 on the path along which the inserted game medal flows. Inserted medal sensor 28b detects that a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 has been guided and effectively accepted into the receiving path and is installed downstream of the blocker 48 (nearer the hopper 50, described below). Inserted medal sensor 28c detects that a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 has passed through the branch point between the receiving path and the return path and is installed near the branch point (slightly closer to inserted medal sensor 28b than the blocker 48).

If both inserted medal sensor 28a and inserted medal sensor 28b detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 and that the inserted game medal has been validly accepted. On the other hand, if inserted medal sensor 28a detects a game medal but inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 but has not been validly accepted and has been returned. Furthermore, if the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c detect the passage of game medals in an order different from the specified order (28a, 28c, and 28b), or if some of the inserted medal sensors do not detect the passage of game medals, it means that an abnormal passage has occurred, such as a game medal flowing backward.

The display window W is configured so that when all three reels 3a-3c have stopped, three symbols per reel are displayed, for a total of nine symbols, visible to the player. A pay line 29, which horizontally connects the middle symbol display areas of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, is activated when a specified number of game medals are bet. The system is configured so that the combination of symbols displayed on the activated pay line can determine whether a winning combination has been achieved. An activated pay line is also referred to as an "active line." In addition to the pay line 29, the line horizontally connecting the upper symbol display areas of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is referred to as the "upper line," and the line horizontally connecting the lower symbol display areas of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is referred to as the "lower line." Additionally, the line connecting the symbol display areas on the top row of reel 3a, the middle row of reel 3b, and the bottom row of reel 3c is referred to as the downward-sloping line, and the line connecting the symbol display areas on the bottom row of reel 3a, the middle row of reel 3b, and the top row of reel 3c is referred to as the upward-sloping line.

The slot machine 1 is also equipped with various indicator lamps, such as LED lamps. In this embodiment, the indicator lamps include a MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a, a BET count indicator lamp 46b, a deposit possible indicator lamp 46c, a game start indicator lamp 46d, a replay indicator lamp 46e, a status indicator lamp 46f, a count indicator lamp 46g, a stored number indicator lamp 46h, a payout number indicator lamp 46j, and stop operation acceptance lamps 46ka, 46kb, and 46kc. These indicator lamps are configured to be controlled by the main control board 60 (main control means 100), which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is lit when a gaming medal can be bet. It is located inside the MAX-BET switch 23 and, when lit, illuminates the MAX-BET switch 23 partially or entirely. The left stop operation acceptance lamp 46ka is located inside the left stop switch 26a, the middle stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb is located inside the middle stop switch 26b, and the right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc is located inside the right stop switch 26c. Each of these lamps illuminates the MAX-BET switch 23 partially or entirely when lit. The other indicator lamps are located to the side or below the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The bet number indicator lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as "bet lamp 46b") displays the number of gaming medals bet. It consists of a 1-bet indicator lamp 46bC that lights up when one or more gaming medals have been bet, a 2-bet indicator lamp 46bB that lights up when two or more gaming medals have been bet, and a MAX-bet indicator lamp 46bA that lights up when three gaming medals have been bet. The insertion possible indicator lamp 46c lights up when gaming medals can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 46d lights up when a game can be started by operating the start lever 25. The replay indicator lamp 46e lights up when a replay role (described below) is achieved in any game and gaming medals are automatically bet by the automatic bet processing (described below).

The status indicator lamp 46f is lit when accumulated (credited) gaming medals are redeemed, and the count indicator lamp 46g displays the number of possible push navigations (which is decremented by one each time a push navigation is executed and may also be increased by a lottery, etc.) when, for example, AT is set. The accumulated medal count indicator lamp 46h (hereinafter also referred to as the "CRE lamp 46h") displays the number of accumulated gaming medals in increments of one, and the payout number indicator lamp 46j displays the number of gaming medals to be paid out when a minor winning combination, described below, is achieved in increments of one. The accumulated medal count indicator lamp 46h and the payout number indicator lamp 46j each display two 7-segment indicators (consisting of seven segment lamps for displaying numbers and one segment lamp for displaying a decimal point (dot)) to display the upper and lower digits of the numbers.

Furthermore, this payout number display lamp 46j is configured to display letters (alphabet) or numbers (hereinafter also referred to as "error codes") indicating the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. Errors that can be set in this embodiment include an HP error, an HE error, an H0 error, a CE error, a CP error, a CH error, a C0 error, a C1 error, an FE error, an E1 error, an E5 error, an E6 error, and an E7 error. An HP error is an error that occurs when it is determined that game medals are stuck at the medal payout outlet of the hopper 50 (described later), an HE error is an error (hopper empty error) that occurs when it is determined that the hopper 50 is empty of game medals, and an H0 error is an error that occurs when it is determined that game medals have abnormally passed through the payout sensor. The CE error is an error (game medal retention error) that occurs when the inserted medal sensor determines that a game medal has accumulated, the CP error is an error that occurs when it determines that an inserted game medal has passed through improperly, the C0 error is an error that occurs when it determines that there has been an abnormal input to the inserted medal sensor, and the C1 error is an error that occurs when it determines that there has been an abnormality in the passage of the inserted medal sensor.The FE error is an error (full error) that occurs when it determines that the auxiliary storage 85 described below is full, the E1 error is an error (RAM error) that occurs when the contents of the memory device (RAM) are abnormal when the power is turned on, and the E5 error is an error (reel stop error) that occurs when the combination of symbols when all the reels have stopped is abnormal (the corresponding symbols that constitute a role other than the role that is allowed to be achieved are displayed as stopped). The E6 error is an error (setting value error) that occurs when the value of the setting value (setting value) described below for determining the probability of winning a role is out of range, and the E7 error is an error (built-in random number error) that occurs when an abnormality is detected in the update state of the built-in random number used in each lottery, etc. Errors E1, E5, E6, and E7 (collectively referred to as "E-series errors") can be cleared by changing the settings described below, and other errors can be cleared by operating the reset switch 82 described below.

Furthermore, this payout number display lamp 46j also has the function of displaying the navigation number, described below, which indicates the operation sequence (press order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. The payout number display lamp 46j when displaying the navigation number is also referred to as the "main side press order indicator." The payout number display lamp 46j also has the function of displaying the setting value, described below, when confirming or changing the setting, described below. The payout number display lamp 46j when displaying the setting value is also referred to as the "setting value indicator." The stop operation acceptance lamps 46ka, 46kb, and 46kc light up when the stop operation of the corresponding stop switch is enabled, and turn off when the stop operation is disabled.

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 30, with decorative lamps 32a and 32b located on both its left and right ends. A translucent lower panel base with a predetermined design and a lower panel illumination lamp (neither shown) are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 31; when the lower panel illumination lamp is turned on, the design on the lower panel base is illuminated from behind.

The tray assembly 40 has a medal payout outlet 41 for paying out medals, and a medal storage tray 42 for storing medals facing the medal payout outlet 41. An ashtray 43 is provided to the left of the medal storage tray 42. Furthermore, on the left and right of the medal payout outlet 41, speaker openings 45a and 45b consisting of a number of small holes are formed, facing the front of a pair of lower speakers 44a and 44b (see Figure 2) located on the back side of the tray assembly 40.

Furthermore, the main body cabinet 5 is provided with a hopper 50 (see Figure 2) for dispensing game medals that are won when a predetermined winning pattern is achieved as a result of playing, and this hopper 50 is provided with a medal detection unit 51 (see Figure 2) for detecting game medals. This hopper 50 also has the function of physically storing game medals that are inserted and validly accepted. Furthermore, near the hopper 50 is provided an auxiliary storage 85 (see Figure 2) for storing game medals that overflow from the hopper 50, and is provided with a fullness detection unit 86 (see Figure 2) for detecting whether this auxiliary storage 85 is full (a state in which game medals may overflow from the auxiliary storage 85).

<Connection between the control board and each device>
In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 2, the slot machine 1 is equipped with three main control boards: a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B (the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as the sub-control board 70). The main control related to the progress of the game (including drive control of the reels 3a-3c and role determination processing) is performed by a control circuit disposed on the main control board 60, while the control of illumination by lamps such as the back lamps 38a-38c is performed by a control circuit disposed on the sub-main control board 70A. Furthermore, the control of effect image display by the image display device 11 and the control of sound generation from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are mainly performed by control circuits disposed on the sub-sub control board 70B. Furthermore, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 can only be performed in one direction, from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A, while information transmission between the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B can be performed in both directions.

<Configuration of main control board 60>
The main control board 60 is provided with a main CPU 61 that performs various arithmetic processing related to games, a ROM 62 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and a RAM 63 ("RAM" is also referred to as "RWM") that is a storage device that can write and read information. The main CPU 61 controls the various drive circuits and the like in accordance with the control programs stored in the ROM 62, thereby controlling the progress of games in the slot machine 1. The ROM 62 and RAM 63 are non-volatile storage devices that are configured to retain the information stored therein even when power is not supplied.

Connected to the main CPU 61 are a clock pulse generator 64 for generating clock pulses (clock signals), a frequency divider 65 for dividing the clock pulses generated by the clock pulse generator 64, a random number generator 66 for generating random numbers used for determining roles and the like based on the clock pulses (or divided clock pulses), and a random number capture circuit 67 for capturing the random numbers generated by the random number generator 66. The clock pulse generator 64 is composed of two oscillators (not shown), each of which outputs asynchronous clock signals. Hereinafter, the clock signal of a predetermined frequency output from one oscillator will be referred to as the "internal clock," and the clock signal of a predetermined frequency (which may be different from the internal clock or may be the same frequency) output from the other oscillator will be referred to as the "external clock." For example, the internal clock is used as the operating clock for the main CPU 61 and as an update clock for random numbers used in predetermined lotteries other than role determination, while the external clock is used as an update clock for random numbers used in role determination. The main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, random number capture circuit 67, interface circuit 68, etc. may be mounted on a single IC chip to form a one-chip microcomputer. The main CPU 61 is also configured to send signals to the motor drive circuit 36, display lamp control circuit 47, hopper drive circuit 52, and sub-control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and to receive signals from the reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, 37c, payout detection signal circuit 53, and storage status signal circuit 87.

The motor drive circuit 36 controls the rotation and stopping of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c that rotate the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively. The indicator lamp control circuit 47 controls the various indicator lamps mentioned above. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, and 37c transmit detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) installed on each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c to the main control board 60 (detection circuit 37a corresponds to reel 3a, detection circuit 37b corresponds to reel 3b, and detection circuit 37c corresponds to reel 3c). The hopper drive circuit 52 drives the hopper 50 to pay out medals when a minor winning combination is achieved. The payout detection signal circuit 53 transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when the medal detection unit 51 detects that medals have been paid out from the hopper 50. The storage status signal circuit 87 is a circuit that sends a storage status signal indicating whether the auxiliary storage cabinet 85 is full or not to the main control board 60 in accordance with the detection result of the fullness detection unit 86.

In addition, power is supplied to the slot machine 1 from a power supply device 80 via the main control board 60. A power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key switch 83 are connected to this power supply device 80, and signals from each of these switches are sent to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68. Furthermore, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from a setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

The power switch 81 is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply 80 to the slot machine 1, and the reset switch 82 is a switch that is operated by a game store employee or the like when a specific error (excluding the above-mentioned E-type error) occurs in the slot machine 1 and the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved. Operating the reset switch 82 clears the information about the error stored in the main control board 60 and sub-control board 70, and the main control board 60 and sub-control board 70 then execute the processing required to resolve the error. The setting key switch 83 is a switch that is operated to check or change the setting value that determines the degree (rank) of the winning probability, and the setting change switch 84 is a switch that changes the setting value in multiple stages (six stages in this embodiment).

When the front door 2 is open (also referred to as the "door open state") and power is being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is ON), operating the setting key switch 83 to the ON state will shift the machine to setting confirmation mode, allowing settings to be confirmed. Also, when the door is open and power is not being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is OFF), operating the setting key switch 83 to the ON state and then operating the power switch 81 to the ON state while in that state (powering on the slot machine 1) will shift the machine to setting change mode, allowing settings to be changed. Furthermore, in this state, the setting value can be updated by one step each time the setting change switch 84 is operated. After updating the setting value, tilting the start lever 25 will confirm the updated setting value, and after confirmation, operating the setting key switch 83 to the OFF state will complete the setting change process.

The setting key switch 83 can be switched between ON and OFF by inserting a specified key (setting key) into a specified lock provided on the main body and turning it. Furthermore, setting confirmation and setting changes cannot be performed while a game is in progress (when game medals have been bet (including when an automatic bet has been placed) or when the reels are spinning), and can only be performed while the game is in standby mode. In setting confirmation mode and setting change mode, the setting value is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j using six integer values from "1" to "6" (a separate lamp for displaying the setting value may also be provided inside the cabinet of the slot machine 1, etc.).

Power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further to the sub-sub control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A (power may also be supplied directly from the power supply device 80 to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage supply status is provided on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines a power interruption when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage value and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main CPU 61 and a sub-main CPU 71 (described below). Furthermore, each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines a power-on state when the supply voltage returns to a predetermined voltage value (which may be a value different (e.g., a higher value) from the voltage value used to determine a power interruption, but may also be the same value), and outputs a power-on detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71. In addition, the voltage value when detecting a power outage on the main control board 60 is set to a value higher than the voltage value when detecting a power outage on the sub-main control board 70A, and the main control board 60 is configured to perform the processing (power outage processing) programmed to be executed when power is out before the sub-main control board 70A (the same may be true for power-on).

In addition, signals from the reel stop signal circuit 91, start lever 25, inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, 1-BET switch 22, MAX-BET switch 23, and settlement switch 24, which are connected to or mounted on the switch board 90, are input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68.

The main CPU 61 is also connected to a blocker 48 via an interface circuit 68, and is configured to control the on/off of this blocker 48. In the following description, the signal for controlling the on/off of the blocker 48 is also referred to as the "blocker signal." Furthermore, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor that detects the open/closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. The main CPU 61 determines, based on the signal from the door sensor, whether the front door 2 is closed (also referred to as the "door closed state") or open (door open state).

Also, although not shown in the figure, when a predetermined gaming state (for example, AT state or bonus state) is reached, the main CPU 61 outputs a predetermined signal (also called an "outer end signal") to a data counter, hall computer, etc. via an external connection terminal board, etc., and is configured to use this outer end signal to manage the number of times set in the predetermined gaming state, etc., and to present it to the player.

<Configuration of sub-control board 70>
The sub-control board 70 is composed of a sub-main control board 70A and a sub-sub control board 70B. The sub-main control board 70A is equipped with a sub-main CPU 71, which mainly performs various arithmetic operations related to the management of effects, a ROM 72, which is a read-only memory device storing control programs, and a RAM 73, which is a memory device that can write and read information. The drive circuits operate in accordance with the control programs stored in the ROM 72, thereby controlling the management of image and sound effects in the slot machine 1, as well as the lamp effects. The ROM 72 and RAM 73 are non-volatile memory devices that are configured to retain stored information even when power is not supplied. The sub-main CPU 71 is also connected to a clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown), and performs predetermined processing in response to clock signals generated by the clock pulse generator and the frequency divider.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and send signals to the lamp control circuit 18. The lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls the lighting of lamps such as the backup lamps 38a-38c. The sub-main CPU 71 also receives output signals from the selection button 54 and the decision button 55 via the interface circuit 74, and in response to the received output signals from each button, causes the sub-sub control board 70B to display a menu screen on the image display device 11, providing information in response to the player's selection operations and changing the content of the effects displayed on the image display device 11 during play.

The sub-main CPU 71 is connected to the sub-sub control board 70 via the interface circuit 74.
The main control board 60 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub-main control board 70A and to receive various signals from the sub-sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, signals (control signals) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A will also be referred to as "control commands," and signals (alert signals and performance signals) transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B will also be referred to as "performance commands." Furthermore, signals (status signals) transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A will also be referred to as "status commands."

The sub-sub control board 70B is equipped with a sub-sub CPU 75 that performs various calculations related to the control of image and sound effects, a ROM 76 that is a read-only memory device that stores control programs, etc., and a RAM 77 that is a memory device that can write and read information. Control of image and sound effects is performed by operating each drive circuit, etc. in accordance with the control program stored in ROM 76. ROM 76 and RAM 77 are non-volatile memory devices that are configured to retain the information stored therein even when power is not supplied.

The sub-sub CPU 75 is configured to receive notification signals or effect signals from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, send signals to the display device control circuit 16 and speaker control circuit 17, and send status signals to the sub-main control board 70A. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a specified effect image, and the speaker control circuit 17 is a circuit that controls the type and volume of sound etc. emitted from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. The image display device 11 is also configured to function as a push indicator (also referred to as the "sub-side push order indicator") that displays the operation order (press order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

<<Configuration inside the main body>>
Next, the internal configuration of the main body housing 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 3. As shown in FIG. 3, a hopper 50, an auxiliary storage 85, and a power supply unit 80 are provided in the lower portion of the main body housing 5 (above the bottom plate 5d). A middle plate 5f is provided in the center of the main body housing 5, spanning the left and right side plates 5a and 5b. A reel unit RU having three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is provided on this middle plate 5f. A main control board case unit 160 having a main control board 60 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the upper portion of the main body housing 5 (on the upper inner surface of the back plate 5e) via a board case holding bracket mechanism 170 so as to be swingable in the front-rear direction. In addition, a sub-control board case unit (not shown) having a sub-control board 70 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the rear of the front door 2.

<Reel>
Each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is configured to rotate by being driven by a stepping motor 35a, 35b, and 35c, respectively. Each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is made of a translucent cylindrical member, and a translucent reel tape bearing a plurality of symbols, as shown in FIG. 4, is attached to the outer periphery of each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c. Each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is provided with a back lamp 38a, 38b, and 38c on its inner surface. When turned on, the back lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c can illuminate the entire area of each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c facing the display window W from the inner surface, or can illuminate only a portion of each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c so as to highlight a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., a pay line 29 or a symbol corresponding to a game combination aligned at a position other than the pay line 29) displayed on each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c.

<Reel symbol arrangement>
In this embodiment, the symbols displayed on each reel 3a-3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 4(a). Here, the "left reel" in FIG. 4(a) represents reel 3a, the "middle reel" represents reel 3b, and the "right reel" represents reel 3c. Thus, each reel 3a-3c has a predetermined number of ten types of symbols, including "Red Seven,""GoldSeven,""BlackBar,""BlueBar,""BlankA,""BlankB,""BellA,""BellB,""Watermelon," and "Replay," as shown in FIG. 4(b). Each symbol on the reel tape is printed in one symbol area, divided into 20 equal sections along the length of the reel tape. Hereinafter, reels 3a, 3b, and 3c will also be referred to as the left reel (left reel), the middle reel (middle reel), and the right reel (right reel), respectively. 4 is intended to illustrate the arrangement of symbols on each of reels 3a to 3c, and does not reflect the size of the symbols actually depicted on the reel tape (the relative proportions of the sizes of the symbols). As shown in FIG. 4(a), the symbol at the top of this reel tape in the longitudinal direction is the "Bell A" symbol with symbol number 19, and the symbol at the bottom is the "Replay" symbol with symbol number 0. Therefore, when the reel tape is attached to a reel, the joint of the reel tape will be between the "Bell A" symbol with symbol number 19 and the "Replay" symbol with symbol number 0.

<Types of game roles>
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations displayed when stopped on each of the reels 3a to 3c are set as shown in Figures 5 to 8, and these are the symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) that constitute the gaming roles. In this embodiment, a total of 51 types of gaming roles are set: two types of special roles, BB roles 1 and 2 (BB roles; BB stands for big bonus, and is also referred to as "Type 1 BB" or "bonus role"), five types of replay roles, 1 to 5, and 44 types of winning roles (minor roles), 1 to 44. The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) required to achieve each gaming role, the number of gaming medals paid out when the gaming role is achieved, etc. are as shown in Figures 5 to 8.

When BB roles 1 and 2 are formed, no game medals are paid out. Instead, their formation triggers the activation of a predetermined bonus (also referred to as "BB" in this embodiment) as a special role, which transitions the player to a special game state (also referred to as "BB in operation") advantageous to the player, allowing the start of a predetermined bonus game (also referred to as "BB game") that is executed under conditions different from normal gameplay from the next game. BB role 1 corresponds to the symbol combination "blue bar, blue bar, red seven," and BB role 2 corresponds to the symbol combination "black bar, black bar, red seven" (the names of the symbols that make up the game roles are written in the order of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c; the same applies below). The bonus game, which can be started by the formation of BB role 1 or BB role 2, ends when a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 70 medals in this embodiment, but this number can be changed as appropriate) have been acquired (alternatively, it may end when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) have been played). BB roles 1 and 2 can be formed in non-RT and RT1 (within BB), which will be described later, but are roles that cannot be formed in RT2 (while BB is operating) ("-" in Figures 5 to 8 indicates that they cannot be formed).

In this embodiment, only the BB role is provided as a special role. However, other special roles such as the RB role (RB stands for regular bonus) or the MB role (MB stands for middle bonus, also referred to as "two types of BB") may also be provided. Furthermore, when an RB role is achieved, an RB game as a bonus game may be set to start from the next play, and when an MB role is achieved, an MB game as a bonus game may be set to start from the next play. In this case, the RB game may end, for example, when a minor role is achieved a predetermined number of times (e.g., 8 times) or when a predetermined number of plays (e.g., 12 times) have been played, and the MB game may end, for example, when a predetermined number of game medals (e.g., over 200) have been paid out. Furthermore, multiple special roles (for example, multiple types of BB roles, or both BB and MB roles) may be provided.

Replay roles 1 through 5 are game roles (replay roles) that, when achieved, do not result in the payout of game medals, but allow the player to play the next game without reducing the number of game medals held by the player (without inserting new game medals). Replay role 1 is configured so that when its corresponding symbol "Bell A Replay (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven)" (the "/" in parentheses means "or") is stopped and displayed on the active line 29, the "Replay" symbol is aligned on a downward-sloping line to the right within the display window W. For this reason, replay role 1 is also referred to as a "downward-sloping replay" (replay is also referred to as "RP"). For the same reason, replay roles 2 through 4 are also referred to as upward-sloping RP, upper RP, and middle RP, respectively. In addition, the replay role 5 is configured so that when the corresponding symbols "Bell A, (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven), Bell B" are stopped and displayed on the active line 29, the symbol "Watermelon" is lined up on the upper line in the display window W. For this reason, the replay role 1 is also called "Upper Watermelon RP."

As shown in Figure 4 (reel symbols), the "Replay" symbols on each of the left reel 3a, center reel 3b, and right reel 3c that make up replay role 4 are arranged at intervals of five symbols or less on each reel. As a result, when replay role 4 is won, its corresponding "Replay Replay Replay" symbol can be displayed as a stopped symbol (also referred to as "pulled in") on the pay line 29 regardless of the press order or position (see the explanation of the reel rotation stop control by the reel control means 134 described below). A role like replay role 4, which can pull its corresponding symbol (or any of multiple pairs, if present) onto the pay line 29 regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch, is also referred to as a "100% pull-in possible role" or a "no miss-out role." Note that replay roles 1 to 3 and 5, like replay role 4, are also 100% pull-in possible roles. Additionally, replay roles 1 to 5 can be achieved in non-RT and RT1 modes, as described below, but cannot be achieved in RT2.

Small winning combinations 1 to 44 are game combinations (winning combinations) that are configured to pay out a predetermined number of game medals when achieved. Of the small winning combinations 1 to 44, small winning combinations 1 to 36 can be achieved in non-RT, RT1, and RT2 (described below), while small winning combinations 37 to 39 can only be achieved in RT2 (when BB is in operation). Furthermore, since the payout number for small winning combinations 1 to 23 and 40 to 43 is set to one medal when achieved, they are also referred to as "1-coin combinations." Similarly, small winning combinations 24 to 37 are also referred to as "15-coin combinations," and small winning combinations 38 and 39 are also referred to as "3-coin combinations." The 15-coin combination is also referred to as the "bell small winning combination."

Small win 37 is configured so that when its corresponding symbol, "Bell A, Watermelon, (Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven)," stops and is displayed on pay line 29, the "watermelon" symbol is lined up on a line sloping downward to the right within display window W. For this reason, small win 37 is also referred to as the "watermelon small win." Small win 40 is a single-coin win whose corresponding symbol is "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven." For this reason, small win 40 is also referred to as the "Red 7s, Single-Coin Win." Small wins 1 to 7 and 24 to 37 are gaming roles with a 100% chance of winning.

<Basic operations for playing games>
To play the slot machine 1, a player first places a bet by inserting a medal into the medal slot 21, or operates either the 1-bet switch 22 or the MAX-bet switch 23 to bet a specified number of medals within the credit limit, thereby activating a pay line 29. In this embodiment, the specified number of medals required to activate the pay line 29 is set to three medals in each of the RT states, non-RT, RT1, and RT2, described below. However, the specified number is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, for example, by setting the specified number to a different value depending on the RT state, etc. Alternatively, multiple pay lines may be provided, and the number of activated pay lines may be changed depending on the number of medals bet.

Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the bet amount is confirmed (the bet medals are used in the game), and the winning combination determination process described below is performed. After that, it is confirmed that the minimum play time has elapsed, and then each of the reels 3a to 3c begins to spin. Here, the minimum play time refers to the minimum time that must be ensured from when all the reels start to spin in one game until when all the reels start to spin in the next game, and in this embodiment, this is set to 4.1 seconds. When each of the reels 3a to 3c begins to spin, multiple types of symbols displayed on the outer surfaces of the reels 3a to 3c are displayed moving up and down (usually from top to bottom) within the display window W. When the rotation of reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and becomes constant speed rotation, each stop switch 26a to 26c is enabled (the operation of the stop switch can be validly accepted), and when the player operates stop switch 26a, the rotation of reel 3a stops, when stop switch 26b, the rotation of reel 3b stops, and when stop switch 26c, the rotation of reel 3c stops.

Here, if it is determined that the symbol combination displayed on the pay line 29 is a predetermined winning combination (a symbol corresponding to a game role that can earn game medals), the number of game medals corresponding to each winning combination is paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIGS.
<Function Block>
As shown in FIG. 9, the slot machine according to this embodiment, from a functional point of view, mainly includes betting operations for betting game medals (for example, inserting game medals into the medal insertion slot 21, pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23), reel rotation start operations for rotating each of the stopped reels 3a to 3c (for example, tilting the start lever 25), and reel rotation stop operations for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c that variably display a plurality of types of symbols (for example, The device is equipped with an operation signal output means 95 that outputs signals (also referred to as "game operation signals") corresponding to each game operation performed by the player, such as a game operation (for example, pressing stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c), a settlement operation (for example, pressing settlement switch 24) to pay out game medals that have been bet or saved (credited), a main control means 100 (corresponding to main control board 60) that performs main control related to the progress of the game, and a sub-control means 200 (corresponding to sub-control board 70) that performs predetermined presentation control according to the game situation.

(1) Functional Blocks of the Main Control Means 100 The main control means 100 is broadly composed of a game status management means 110 that mainly manages the game status, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages the game progress, and a main communication control means 150 that controls communication in the main control means 100. Of these, the game status management means 110 includes a setting value control means 111, an RT status control means 112, a replay operation control means 113, a bonus operation control means 114, a freeze control means 115, a game mode control means 116, and a random number generation/capture means 117.

The game progress management means 130 includes a received medal management means 131, a role determination means 132, a performance group number determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display symbol determination means 135, a paid medal management means 136, a blocker control means 137, a display lamp control means 138, a push order management means 139, and a condition device group number determination means 140, and the main communication control means 150 includes a control command transmission means 151 and an outer end signal transmission means 152. The above-mentioned means in the main control means 100 are implemented by hardware such as a main CPU 61, a ROM 62, a RAM 63, and electronic circuits arranged on the main control board 60 shown in FIG.
It is a functional representation of what is configured by software such as control programs stored in M62 etc.

(1-1) Means Constituting the Game Status Management Means 110 The setting value control means 111 is configured to control a numerical value (also referred to as a "management setting value") for internally managing the setting value (configured as six levels from Setting 1 to Setting 6) of the winning combination probability. In this embodiment, consecutive integer values from 1 to 6 (the integer values from 1 to 6 correspond to Settings 1 to 6, respectively) are used as the management setting values. The management setting value data is stored in a predetermined memory area of the RAM 63 and is referenced when confirming the setting value in the winning combination determination process and when displaying the setting value on the setting value indicator (payout number indicator lamp 46j) during setting confirmation or setting change. The management setting value is also changed in response to a setting change operation by a gaming facility staff member. Specifically, when the setting key switch 83 is operated to the ON state and the setting change switch 84 is operated in that state, the setting value is updated by one.

The RT state control means 112 is configured to control the setting of three RT states: non-RT, RT1, and RT2. Non-RT is the RT state that is set when RAM (RAM 63) is initialized. RT1 is the RT state (also referred to as "inside BB") that is set when the selection of a Type 1 BB-A condition device or Type 1 BB-B condition device (winning BB role 1 or BB role 2) is carried over. RT2 is the RT state (also referred to as "in BB operation") that is set from the next game when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is achieved, and bonus games can be played during this RT2. In RT2, the replay role does not win, and one of the winning J to Q condition devices is selected (no misses). The transition control of each of the RT states described above will be explained in detail later.

The replay activation control means 113 is configured to, when a replay role is achieved, set a state (also referred to as the "replay activation state") in which the player is permitted to play the next game without betting any of his or her game medals. When the replay activation state is set, information indicating the replay activation state (also referred to as the "replay activation state flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a specified memory area of RAM 63. The set replay activation state flag is cleared (for example, the value "0" is stored) at a specified point in time until the replay activation state is resolved.

The bonus operation control means 114 is configured to operate from the time when the bonus combination (in this embodiment, BB combination 1 or BB combination 2) is won (when the first type BB-A condition device or the first type BB-B condition device is selected) to the time when the bonus combination (in this embodiment, BB combination 1 or BB combination 2) is won (when the first type BB-A condition device or the first type BB-B condition device is selected).
It is configured to execute predetermined processing during the period until the end of the bonus game, which is executed in response to the establishment of B role 1 or BB role 2. Specifically, when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won, information indicating that BB role 1 or BB role 2 has been won (also referred to as a "Type 1 BB win flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a predetermined storage area of RAM 63. In addition, in response to the establishment of BB role 1 or BB role 2, information indicating that the BB is in an activated state (also referred to as a "Type 1 BB activation flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a predetermined storage area of RAM 63.

The freeze control means 115 is configured to set a freeze that delays the execution of control processes related to the progress of the game (such as processes that accept bet operations, reel spin start operations, reel spin stop operations, etc.) for a predetermined time when a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, four types of freezes can be executed: win wait (freeze time 2 seconds), fake wait (freeze time 5 seconds), announcement wait (freeze time 2 seconds), and wait when all reels stop (freeze time 5 seconds).

The game mode control means 116 is configured to control the setting of eight game modes, from game mode 0 to game mode 7. A game mode refers to a game state (also referred to as the "main game state") that is controlled by the main control means separately from the RT state and is mainly related to the setting state of the AT. The game mode control means 116 also uses the zone type number (which takes the value of 0 or 1) to manage whether the player is staying in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, described below. Here, zone type number = 0 indicates staying in a normal zone, and zone type number = 1 indicates staying in an advantageous zone. Furthermore, the game mode control means 116 uses the AT winning flag (which takes the value of 0 or 1) to manage whether the player has won the AT. Here, AT winning flag = 0 indicates that the player has not won the AT, and AT winning flag = 1 indicates that the player has won the AT.

Game mode 0 is the normal (non-advantageous) game state. Game mode 0 is a mode in which the player stays in the normal zone and does not perform lotteries related to AT play (assisted play). Game mode 1 is a game state also known as "chance" that is mainly entered when the zone type number = 1 but the AT has not been won. Game mode 2 is a game state also known as "post-AT win 1" that is mainly entered when the zone type number = 1 is reached and the AT has been won but the BB has not been won. Game mode 3 is mainly an AT game state that is entered when the BB has been won while the AT has been won. In game mode 3, the push navigation described below is executed, making it a very advantageous game state for the player.

Game mode 4 is a game state that is mainly referred to as "after AT" and is entered after a BB is established in game mode 7, which will be described later. Game mode 5 is a game state that is mainly referred to as "after AT win 2" and is entered after an AT is won in game mode 4. Game mode 6 is a game state that is mainly referred to as "inside chance" and is entered inside a BB when the section type number is 1 and the AT has not been won. Game mode 7 is a game state that is mainly referred to as "inside post AT" and is entered after one AT has ended and the reach flag is 0.

The eight game modes 0-7 mentioned above are divided into game modes belonging to the normal zone (game mode 0) and game modes belonging to the advantageous zone (game modes 1-7). The normal zone is a period during which push navigation (prize navigation, RP navigation, and eye-pressing navigation) is not performed, and is also a period during which information that can determine the push order (information such as condition device numbers and instruction numbers) is not transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means. The normal zone is also a period during which a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous zone (for example, a lottery to transition to the advantageous zone).

The advantageous zone is a period during which push navigation can be performed, and is also a period during which information that can determine the push order can be sent from the main control means to the sub-control means. The advantageous zone is also a period during which lotteries that change the performance of the advantageous zone (for example, AT mode lottery) and processes that increase the number of AT games during the advantageous zone (for example, Seven Stock 1 lottery, Seven Stock 2 lottery) can be performed. Furthermore, during the advantageous zone, a zone indicator (for example, a DP segment lamp other than the 7-segment lamp of the payout number indicator lamp 46j (also referred to as an "advantageous zone lamp") is lit to notify the player that they are in the advantageous zone. While staying in the advantageous zone, winning navigation may be performed at least once (in this case, if winning navigation has not been performed even once, it may be impossible to move to the normal zone).

In addition, there is an upper limit (1,500 games) on the period during which a player can continuously stay in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous zone ends, all information related to the advantageous zone (for example, information such as the AT winning flag and the value of the seven stock number counter) is cleared. Note that when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous zone ends, it is not necessary that a winning navigation was performed even once while the player was in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, when the lottery to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous zone and the lottery to change the performance of the advantageous zone are performed based on the role determination result (condition device), they may be performed only for role determination results that do not have a setting difference, and in particular, the lottery to change the performance of the advantageous zone may be performed based on conditions other than the role determination result. In this case, they may be performed without referring to the setting value.

The random number generation and capture means 117, which is composed of the aforementioned CPU 61, clock pulse generator 64, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, and random number capture circuit 67, generates and captures random numbers used in various lotteries. In this embodiment, it has four 16-bit random number means (4ch: ch stands for "channel") capable of generating random number sequences in a maximum range of "0-65535," and four 8-bit random number means (4ch) capable of generating random number sequences in a maximum range of "0-255," each capable of independently generating random number sequences. The random numbers generated by these 16-bit random number means or 8-bit random number means are updated based on the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator 64, and are therefore also referred to as hardware random numbers. Although not shown, this embodiment also includes a random number generation means separate from the random number generation and capture means 117. This random number generation means is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61 and RAM 63, and has random number means capable of generating a sequence of random numbers within a predetermined numerical range as random numbers used for determining winning roles, etc. Because these random numbers are updated based on a program, they are also called software random numbers (soft random numbers).

(Regarding RT state transition control)
The transition control of the RT state by the RT state control means 112 described above will be explained with reference to Figure 10. As shown in this figure, when a Type 1 BB-A condition device or a Type 1 BB-B condition device is selected during non-RT, condition P1 is satisfied, and this triggers the RT state control means 112 to transition the RT state from non-RT to RT1. Also, during RT1, when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established (also referred to as "BB establishment" or "BB operation"), condition P2 is satisfied, and this triggers the RT state control means 112 to transition the RT state from RT1 to RT2.

RT2 is an RT state (also referred to as "BB in operation") that is set from the next game when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is achieved, and bonus play becomes possible during this RT2. In RT2, replay roles are not won, and one of the winning J to Q condition devices is selected (no misses). During RT2, when more than the specified number (70) of game medals are acquired and the bonus game ends (also referred to as "BB operation end"), condition P3 is satisfied, and this triggers the RT state control means 112 to transition the RT state from RT2 to non-RT.

(Game mode transition control)
The game mode transition control by the game mode control means 116 will be described with reference to Figures 11 and 12. As shown in Figure 11, in game mode 0, satisfaction of condition Q1 triggers a transition from game mode 0 to game mode 1, satisfaction of condition Q2 triggers a transition from game mode 0 to game mode 2, satisfaction of condition Q3 triggers a transition from game mode 0 to game mode 3, and satisfaction of condition Q4 triggers a transition from game mode 0 to game mode 6. The contents of each transition condition (conditions Q1 to Q15) are shown in simplified form in Figure 11, but more detailed contents are described in the flowchart described below.

In game mode 1, satisfaction of condition Q5 triggers a transition from game mode 1 to game mode 0, satisfaction of condition Q6 triggers a transition from game mode 1 to game mode 6, satisfaction of condition Q7 triggers a transition from game mode 1 to game mode 2, and satisfaction of condition Q8 triggers a transition from game mode 1 to game mode 3. Here, the chance game number counter included in condition Q5 is a counter (taking a value from 0 to 30) that manages the number of games played in game mode 1, and the value of the chance game number counter is set to 30 when the game mode is transitioned to game mode 1, and thereafter, it is decremented by 1 for each game (see also FIG. 12). In addition, the Type 1 BB winning flag included in conditions Q6 to Q8 is a flag (taking the value of 0 or 1) that manages whether or not a BB has been won in the role lottery in the game, and Type 1 BB winning flag = 0 indicates that a BB has not been won in the game, while Type 1 BB winning flag = 1 indicates that a BB has been won in the game (see also Figure 12).

When condition Q9 is satisfied in game mode 2, a transition to game mode 3 occurs. When condition Q11 is satisfied in game mode 3, a transition to game mode 0 occurs, and when condition Q12 is satisfied, a transition to game mode 7 occurs. The bell count counter included in conditions Q11 and Q12 is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 134) that manages the number of times (also referred to as "bell count") that push navigation (winning navigation) can be executed during the AT, and winning navigation can be executed when the value of the bell count counter is 1 or greater (see also Figure 12).

The seven numbers included in conditions Q11 and Q12 are numbers that manage the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), with seven number = 1 indicating red seven and seven number = 2 indicating gold seven (see also Figure 12). The seven counter is a counter (taking a value from 0 to 26) that manages the number of red sevens stocked, the cumulative counter is a counter (taking a value from 0 to 2412) that manages the number of game medals won (the difference in number of medals) in one advantageous zone, and the reach flag is a flag (taking a value of 0 or 1) that adjusts whether the number of game medals won (the difference in number of medals) has reached the upper limit (see also Figure 12).

In game mode 6, satisfaction of condition Q10 triggers a transition to game mode 1. In game mode 7, satisfaction of condition Q10 triggers a transition to game mode 4. In game mode 4, satisfaction of condition Q8 triggers a transition from game mode 4 to game mode 3, satisfaction of condition Q13 triggers a transition from game mode 4 to game mode 0, and satisfaction of condition Q14 triggers a transition from game mode 4 to game mode 7. Here, the AT cycle counter included in conditions Q13 and Q14 is a counter (taking a value from 0 to 3) that manages the stay cycle during the AT.

Furthermore, when condition Q7 is satisfied during game mode 4, a transition from game mode 4 to game mode 5 occurs, and when condition Q9 is satisfied during game mode 5, a transition to game mode 3 occurs.

Furthermore, while in any of game modes 1 to 7 (i.e., in the advantageous zone), the game will transition to game mode 0 when condition Q15 is met. The advantageous zone clear counter included in condition Q15 is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 1500) that manages the number of consecutive games played in the advantageous zone; it is set to 1500 when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, and is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the advantageous zone (see also Figure 12). The net increase counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 2412) that manages the number of wins (difference in number of coins) during the advantageous zone; it is set to 0 when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, and is subsequently updated according to the number of wins (see also Figure 12).

In this way, when a game transitions from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is set to "1500," and the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the advantageous zone. When the value of the advantageous zone clear counter reaches "0," a forced transition to the normal zone occurs. Furthermore, if a game transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone before the value of the advantageous zone clear counter reaches "0," the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and when a game transitions from the normal zone to the advantageous zone again, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is reset to "1500."

This embodiment also includes a net increase counter that counts the number of game medals won (the difference in number of medals) during the advantageous period. This net increase counter is set to "0" at the start of the advantageous period (it can also be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous period), and updates its counter value with each subsequent game and game result. When updating, if the difference in number of medals falls below 0, the counter value is corrected to "0", and if the difference in number of medals is a positive value, it is accumulated and updated as is (such correction may not be performed). When the accumulated difference in number of medals exceeds 2,400, the advantageous period ends and the game transitions to the normal period. Functionally, the accumulation counter is a counter that performs the same counting as the net increase counter. When checking the number of game medals won (the difference in number of medals) during control processing, the value of the accumulation counter or the value of the net increase counter is checked depending on the processing content.

In addition, a correction counter is also provided as a counter that counts the number of game medals won (difference in number) during the advantageous zone. This correction counter (which takes a value between 0 and 2101) counts the number of game medals that are expected to be won during one advantageous zone (also referred to as the "expected number won" or "expected number of medals that can be won"), which is calculated by adding the value of the net increase counter (accumulation counter) to the number of AT stocks such as red sevens and gold sevens and the value of the bell count counter. When the value of the correction counter (expected number won) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), this may trigger the end of the advantageous zone at a predetermined timing and a transition to the normal zone.

This configuration makes it difficult for players to determine when the advantageous zone ends. For example, if the end of the advantageous zone is determined solely by the value of the advantageous zone clear counter or the net gain counter, displaying these values to the player allows the player to easily determine when the advantageous zone ends. However, if a correction counter is provided, the advantageous zone may end when the correction counter reaches a predetermined value, even if the advantageous zone clear counter or net gain counter has not yet reached its upper limit. This makes it difficult to determine when the advantageous zone ends, increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by setting the predetermined value (2100) of the correction counter to a value smaller than the upper limit (2400) of the net gain counter, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the advantageous zone ending during an automatic timetable. For example, if the value of the correction counter (expected win number) exceeds the predetermined value (2100) during an automatic timetable, allowing the next automatic timetable to be executed after the end of that automatic timetable, the net gain counter may exceed the upper limit (2400) during the execution of the next automatic timetable, thereby increasing the possibility of the advantageous zone ending. If the advantageous period ends during AT, players may become disappointed, but this can be prevented by ending the advantageous period once the correction counter value (expected wins) exceeds a predetermined value (2100).

(Lottery executed in each game mode)
Next, various lotteries performed by the game mode control means 116 in the above-mentioned game modes 0 to 7 will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 20. The advantageous zone transition lottery shown in Figure 13(A) is a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to an advantageous zone, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group A number (condition device group numbers will be described later). The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group A number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 1 lottery shown in Figure 13 (B) is a lottery to determine the chance mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during chance (game mode 1)), and selects one of the chance mode numbers 0 to 4 based on the condition device group H number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group H number is as shown in the figure.

Chance Mode 2 Lottery-1 shown in Figure 13 (C) is a lottery that determines the chance mode number during BB operation during chance (game mode 1), and selects one of chance mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) based on the condition device group D number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group D number is as shown in the figure.

Chance Mode 2 Lottery-2 shown in Figure 13 (D) is a lottery that determines the chance mode number when BB is not activated during a chance (game mode 1), and selects one of the chance mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) based on the condition device group B number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group B number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 3 lottery shown in Figure 13 (E) is a lottery to determine a new chance mode number at the end of a stay cycle during chance (game mode 1). A new chance mode number from 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected based on the current chance mode number 1 to 3 (no lottery if 0). The winning set value number corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown. Note that chance mode number 4 indicates an AT win. The chance mode lotteries in Figures 13 (B) to (E) are collectively referred to as AT lotteries.

The chance game number lottery shown in Figure 14 (A) is a lottery that determines the number of games to stay in chance (game mode 1) when one of chance mode numbers 1 to 3 is selected in the chance mode 1 lottery (also referred to as "chance mode winning"). Based on the selected chance mode number 1 to 3, one of the following games is selected: 0, 10, 20, or 30. The winning number corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown.

The chance cycle lottery shown in Figure 14 (B) is a lottery that determines the number of cycles when a chance mode is won, and selects one of the cycle numbers 0 to 4 based on the chance mode number 1 to 3 selected in the chance mode 1 lottery. The winning number corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The EX1 mode lottery shown in Figure 14 (C) is a lottery to determine the add-on mode number after winning the AT (the number that manages the stock add-on status during the AT), and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2) based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The EX2 mode lottery shown in Figure 14 (D) is the same as the EX1 mode lottery in that it determines the add-on mode number after winning the AT. It is a lottery that is held specifically while in game mode 2 or 5, and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 0 or 2) based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown.

AT Mode Lottery-1 shown in Figure 14 (E) is a lottery held specifically while in game modes 0-2 to determine the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT win occurs, and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0-5 based on the condition device group J number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

AT Mode Lottery-2 shown in Figure 14 (F) is similar to AT Mode Lottery-1 in that it determines the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT win occurs. It is a lottery that is held specifically while in game modes 3 to 5, and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the condition device group J number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

AT Mode Lottery-3 shown in Figure 14 (G) is similar to AT Mode Lottery-1 and -2 in that it determines the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT win occurs. It is a lottery that is held after all reels have stopped (also called "after all stops"), and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the condition device group J number. The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 1 lottery shown in Figure 15 (A) is a lottery held during game mode 1 or 4 and after a full stop to determine the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), and selects one of the seven numbers 0 to 2 based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown.

The Seven 2 lottery shown in Figure 15 (B), like the Seven 1 lottery, is a lottery held specifically while in game mode 2 or 5 to determine the type of AT, and selects one of the Seven numbers 0 to 2 based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown.

The AT mode rewrite lottery shown in Figure 15 (C) is a lottery to rewrite the AT mode number after the AT ends, and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the value of the advantageous zone clear counter (less than 300 or 300 or more). The winning number corresponding to each advantageous zone clear counter value is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Loop Lottery shown in Figure 15 (D) is a lottery to determine whether or not Red Seven will continue, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the loop number (the number that controls the continuation rate of Red Seven). The number of winning positions corresponding to each loop number is as shown.

The Gold Seven Loop Lottery shown in Figure 15 (E) is a lottery to determine whether or not to continue with Gold Seven, and selects either a winning number (1) or a losing number (0). The winning numbers assigned to winning numbers (1) and losing numbers (0) are as shown.

The Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery shown in Figure 15 (F) is a lottery to rewrite the continuation rate of Gold Seven, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group E number. The winning numbers corresponding to each condition device group E number are as shown.

The add-on mode lottery shown in Figure 15 (G) is a lottery to determine the add-on mode number during the AT, and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2). The winning number assigned to each add-on mode number is as shown in the figure.

The bell count change lottery shown in Figure 16 (A) is a lottery to rewrite the number of bells, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the value of the bell count counter. The number of wins corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 1 lottery shown in Figure 16 (B) is a lottery to determine whether or not to add AT stocks, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The winning numbers corresponding to each condition device group C number are as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 2 lottery shown in Figure 16 (C) is the same as the Seven Stock 1 lottery, in that it determines whether or not to add to the AT stock number, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group E number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown.

The effect lever wait lottery shown in Figure 16 (D) is a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a fake wait as a freeze, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group J number. The number of wins corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown.

AT Cycle Lottery-1 shown in Figure 17 (A) is a lottery that is held when the AT mode number is 1 or 2, in particular, to determine the number of stay cycles during the AT (the number of BB operations required to return from game mode 3 to game mode 3 via game modes 7 and 4) at the end of the AT. Based on the value of the bell count counter, one of the stay cycle numbers 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) is selected. The winning number corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

AT Cycle Lottery-2 shown in Figure 17(B) is similar to AT Cycle Lottery-1 in that it is a lottery held at the end of the AT to determine the number of stay cycles during the AT, particularly when the AT mode number is 3 or 4. Based on the value of the bell count counter, one of the stay cycle numbers 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) is selected. The winning number corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The Retraction 1 Lottery-1 shown in Figure 17 (C) is a lottery that is held, particularly when the AT mode number is 1 to 3, to determine whether or not the AT will be won again after the AT has ended. Based on the condition device group C number, either a win (1) or a loss (0) is selected. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown.

The Retraction 1 Lottery-2 shown in Figure 17(D) is similar to the Retraction 1 Lottery-1 in that it determines whether or not the AT will be won again after the AT has ended, and is a lottery that is held especially when the AT mode number is 4. Based on the condition device group C number, either a win (1) or a loss (0) is selected. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown.

Return 1 Lottery-3 shown in Figure 18 (A) is similar to Return 1 Lottery-1 and -2 in that it determines whether or not the AT will be won again after the AT has ended, and is a lottery that is held especially when the AT mode number is 5. Based on the condition device group C number, either a win (1) or a loss (0) is selected. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown.

The Drawback 2 lottery shown in Figure 18 (B) is a lottery to determine whether or not you will win the AT again after the number of stay cycles during the AT has reached 0, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the AT mode number. The number of wins corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle preferential game number lottery shown in Figure 18 (C) is a lottery to determine the number of games to be set in a predetermined preferential state after the AT ends (also called the "preferential state game number"), and selects one of the preferential state game numbers 0, 10, 20, or 30 based on the AT mode number. The winning number corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 1 lottery shown in Figure 19 (A) is a lottery to determine the Seven Table number (the number that manages the table that determines the continuation rate during Red Seven), and one of the Seven Table numbers 0 to 15 is selected based on the AT mode number. The winning number corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 2 lottery shown in Figure 19 (B) is the same as the Seven Table 1 lottery, in that it determines the Seven Table number, and selects one of the Seven Table numbers 0 to 15 based on the condition device group G number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group G number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 1 Lottery-1 shown in Figure 20 (A) is the first lottery held to determine the number of bells, especially when the game mode is 0 to 2. Based on the CU rank number (a number that controls the ease of counting up), one of the following bell numbers is selected: 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20. The winning number corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown.

Like Bell Number 1 Lottery-1, Bell Number 1 Lottery-2 shown in Figure 20(B) is the first lottery held to determine the number of bells, especially when the game mode is 4 or 5. Based on the CU rank number, one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 is selected. The winning number corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 2 lottery shown in Figure 20 (C) is a lottery held from the second draw onwards to determine the number of bells, and selects one of the following bell numbers from 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 based on the CU rank number. The winning number corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 3 lottery shown in Figure 20 (D) is the same as the Bell Number 2 lottery, and is the lottery for the second or subsequent times to determine the number of bells, and selects one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20. The winning numbers assigned to each bell number are as shown in the figure.

(1-2) Means Constituting the Game Progress Management Means 130 Returning to FIG. 9, the received medal management means 131 is configured to control whether the actually accepted medals (the medals that are guided to the acceptance passage and detected by the accepted medal sensor 28b, also referred to as "accepted medals") among the medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 21 (also referred to as "inserted medals") are to be directly bet or credited. In this embodiment, if the number of bets does not reach the maximum allowable number of bets (the number of bets required to execute a game (specified number "3")), the accepted medals are to be directly bet, and if the number of bets reaches the maximum allowable number of bets and the number of credits does not reach the maximum allowable number of credits (for example, "50"), the accepted medals are to be credited.

Furthermore, the accepted medal management means 131 is configured to perform automatic betting processing (processing to set a state in which the same number of medals as the number bet in the previous game are bet without reducing the number of medals held by the player) in a game that has been set to the replay operation state. Even in the replay operation state, if the number of credits has not reached the maximum credit allowance, the inserted medals are accepted as medals to be credited (although they may not be accepted). If the number of bets has reached the maximum bet allowance and the number of credits has also reached the maximum credit allowance, the inserted medals are not accepted and are returned.

The role determination means 132 is configured to perform a role determination process (internal lottery) to select at least one role determination result from multiple role determination results (condition devices) based on a preset role determination probability (lottery setting number) when the start lever 25 is operated (when the operation of the start lever 25 is validly accepted). This role determination process is performed using a random number generated by the above-mentioned 16-bit random number means. Specifically, when the start lever 25 is operated, the random number generated by the 16-bit random number means is captured. Then, when performing the role determination process, the captured random number is read, a predetermined software random number is added to the read random number, and the resulting random number is used to select a condition device. It is also possible to select a condition device using the read random number without adding the predetermined software random number.

The role determination process is performed by referencing a predetermined role determination table (not shown). The role determination table is configured so that the lottery placement number data corresponding to each condition device is stored in a predetermined memory area (multiple addresses) in ROM 62, by setting value. When one or more condition devices are selected in the role determination process, the game role corresponding to the selected condition devices becomes the role that is allowed to be formed in that game. Information on the selected condition device (winning role) is stored in a predetermined memory area in RAM 63, but if the information on the winning item stored in a single game is information related to the winning of a minor role or a replay role, it is cleared (reset to "0") after the game ends, regardless of whether these minor roles or replay roles are formed. On the other hand, if the BB role is won but not formed, information related to the winning of the BB role is stored and not cleared until the BB role is formed.

The effect group number determination means 133 is configured to perform processing to associate effect group numbers with the condition devices selected by the role determination processing. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, effect group A group numbers (0 or 1) are associated with bonus condition devices, and effect group B group numbers (0-29) are associated with winning replay condition devices. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(A), effect group A group number 1 is commonly associated with type 1 BB-A condition devices and type 1 BB-B condition devices. Also, as shown in FIG. 21(B), effect group B group number 13 is commonly associated with winning-A1 to A12 condition devices, and effect group B group number 14 is commonly associated with winning-B1 to B12 condition devices, where differences in the push order can result in gameplay advantages or disadvantages (impact on ball payout) and differences in the number of game medals paid out (number of medals won).

In contrast, for replay-A to L condition devices that correspond to the winning of replay roles in which differences in button press order do not affect gameplay advantage or disadvantage (no effect on ball output), and winning replay condition devices that correspond to the winning of small roles (winning roles) in which differences in button press order do not affect the number of game medals paid out (number won) or in which the number of game medals that can be won is small (for example, below the specified number of bets), different presentation group B numbers are associated with each individual condition device.

Returning to Figure 9, the reel control means 134 is configured to, when the start lever 25 is operated (when the operation of the start lever 25 is validly accepted), start the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c after confirming that the minimum play time has elapsed, and, after all the reels that have started to rotate are rotating at a constant speed, stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c are operated in sequence (when the operations of each of the stop switches 26a to 26c are validly accepted), sequentially stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3a to 3c.

The rotation stop control of each reel 3a to 3c is performed by the stop switches 26a to 26c based on each stop table (not shown) that is set according to the result of the role determination process.
The operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c is performed in accordance with the manner of operation (such as the order of pressing the buttons and the timing of operation). The reels 3a to 3c are stopped within a predetermined allowable stop time (for example, 190 milliseconds) from the timing at which the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated (within the range of the maximum number of sliding frames, 5 frames, in this embodiment).

In other words, if a specific gaming role is selected as a role that is allowed to be achieved as a result of the role determination process, reels 3a-3c are controlled to stop so that the symbols corresponding to the selected gaming role are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29 as much as possible within the allowable stop time, and in the event of a loss, the symbols corresponding to none of the gaming roles are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29. Note that if a replay role or small role is won while a special role has been won, or if a special role and a replay role or small role are both won, the reels may be controlled to stop spinning with priority given to the replay role, in that order (small roles may be given higher priority than special roles).

The stopped display symbol determination means 135 is configured to determine which symbols are stopped and displayed on the reels 3a to 3c based on the timing at which the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated, and to determine whether a gaming combination has been achieved based on the symbol combination determined to be stopped and displayed on the pay line 29 (which may differ from the symbol combination that was actually stopped and displayed).

When a minor winning combination is achieved, the payout medal management means 136 pays out a number of game medals corresponding to the achieved minor winning combination by adding the number of credits to the number of credits if the number of credits has not reached the maximum allowable number of credits, or by actual payout by driving the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52 if the number of credits has reached the maximum allowable number of credits. Furthermore, when a settlement operation (pressing the settlement switch 24) is validly accepted, the payout medal management means 136 drives the hopper 50 to pay out the number of game medals that were bet or credited.

The blocker control means 137 is configured to output a blocker signal for controlling the blocker 48, switching the blocker 48 between an ON state (a state in which game medals can be accepted) and an OFF state (a state in which game medals cannot be accepted). When the blocker 48 is switched to the OFF state, game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 are guided to the return passage and returned. However, the insertion of game medals is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28a.

The display lamp control means 138 is configured to control the lighting and extinguishing of the various display lamps mentioned above (MAX-BET indicator lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, insert possible indicator lamp 46c, game start indicator lamp 46d, replay indicator lamp 46e, status indicator lamp 46f, count indicator lamp 46g, CRE lamp 46h, and payout number indicator lamp 46j) via the display lamp control circuit 47. When the payout number indicator lamp 46j is to function as a main push order indicator, the payout number indicator lamp 46j is controlled by the push order management means 139.

The push order management means 139 is configured to select an instruction number (any one of 0 to 6) corresponding to the push order to be notified, depending on the role determination result (condition device) selected by the role determination process. Instruction number 0 is selected when the push order should not be notified, and instruction numbers 1 to 6 are selected when the push order should be notified. In this embodiment, instruction number 1 corresponds to the push orders of "left, center, right," instruction number 2 to "left, right, center," instruction number 3 to "center, left, right," instruction number 4 to "center, right, left," instruction number 5 to "right, left, center," and instruction number 6 to "right, center, left."

The push sequence management means 139 is also configured to cause the payout number display lamp 46j to function as a main side push sequence indicator, announcing the selected instruction number and thereby performing push navigation (main side push navigation). This push navigation uses two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "7-seg") provided on the payout number display lamp 46j to announce the navigation number. For example, an "=" is displayed on the left 7-segment lamp, and the numerical value of the instruction number (for example, "2" for instruction number 2) is displayed on the right 7-segment lamp. The "=" displayed on the left 7-segment lamp is intended to distinguish it from when the payout number display lamp 46j is displaying the payout number. When navigation number 0 is selected, no display is made by the payout number display lamp 46j, but in another embodiment, "=" may be displayed on the left 7-segment display and "0" on the right 7-segment display, or "0" may be displayed on both the left and right 7-segment displays, or "0" may be displayed on only one of the left or right 7-segment displays.

The conditional device group number determination means 140 is configured to determine the conditional device group number used to select winning values in various lotteries, based on the effect group A group number and effect group B group number determined by the effect group number determination means 133. Specifically, the conditional device group numbers are divided into 10 types, from conditional device group A number to conditional device group J number, and each combination of effect group A group number and effect group B group number is pre-associated with each number value, from conditional device group A number to conditional device group J number. Specific associations are shown in Figure 22. For example, for the combination of effect group A group number 1 and effect group B group number 0, conditional device group A number 1, conditional device group B number 2, conditional device group C number 2, conditional device group D number 0, conditional device group E number 0, conditional device group F number 1, conditional device group G number 0, conditional device group H number 1, conditional device group I number 0, and conditional device group J number 1 are respectively associated. In addition, the notes column in the table in Figure 22 lists abbreviations that describe the contents of each combination of performance group A group number and performance group B group number.

(Detailed explanation of the role determination process)
The role determination process executed by the role determination means 132 is a series of processes that involves drawing a role once per game based on a predetermined probability (role determination probability) and determining the symbol combination that can be displayed on a winning line based on the winning number determined by the role determination. More specifically, a role is first drawn based on the role determination probability, and one winning number is determined from multiple winning numbers (including losing numbers) through this role selection. Each winning number is pre-assigned a bonus condition device number or a winning replay condition device number. Once a winning number is determined, the bonus condition device number or winning replay condition device number associated with that winning number is stored in a predetermined memory area of RAM. Here, the bonus condition device number and the winning replay condition device number are stored in different memory areas. This allows the symbol combinations associated with the condition devices of the various condition device numbers stored in RAM to be aligned on a winning line.

In the above example, one winning number was linked to either a bonus condition device number or a winning replay condition device number, but one winning number may also be linked to both a bonus condition device number and a winning replay condition device number.

The above-described winning probability can be set arbitrarily. Furthermore, the winning probability can be configured to change depending on the setting value set by a gaming parlor staff member or the like. In this embodiment, six setting values are configured, from setting 1 to setting 6. There are winning numbers for which the winning probability varies depending on the setting value, and winning numbers for which the winning probability remains constant even when the setting value is changed. Hereinafter, setting the winning probability to vary depending on the setting value is referred to as "setting a difference." Whether or not to set a difference for each winning number can be determined arbitrarily. As an example, there may be no setting difference for winning numbers linked to the condition device number of a condition device that triggers a lottery that affects the payout rate (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game medals used for play) in the slot machine 1, while there may or may not be a setting difference for winning numbers linked to the condition device number of a condition device that does not trigger a lottery.

Figure 23 shows an example of the probability of winning a prize in slot machine 1, showing the number of winning positions assigned to each winning number (a total of 65,536 positions). Figure 23 does not show the winning numbers, but rather the condition devices associated with the condition device numbers associated with each winning number. This example also shows the number of winning positions in each RT state (non-RT, RT1, and RT2) for three settings: 1, 3, and 6. According to this example, the probability of selecting a winning number associated with a Type 1 BB-A condition device number or a winning number associated with a Type 1 BB-B condition device number during non-RT is set relatively high at approximately 7/100. Furthermore, the probability of selecting one of the winning numbers corresponding to the prize-winning-A1 to -A12 condition device numbers during non-RT or RT1 is set fairly high at approximately 7/10.

The table in Figure 24(A) shows the type of bonus condition device, the bonus condition device number assigned to that bonus condition device, and the symbol combination associated with each condition device (referred to as "winning role" in Figure 24(A)). The tables in Figure 24(B) and Figures 25 to 29 show the type of winning replay condition device, the winning replay condition device number assigned to that winning replay condition device, and the symbol combination associated with each condition device (referred to as "winning role" in Figure 24(B) and Figures 25 to 29). The contents of some of the condition devices will be explained in detail below.

In the bonus condition device shown in Figure 24 (A), the Type 1 BB-A condition device is assigned bonus condition device number 1, and the Type 1 BB-B condition device is assigned bonus condition device number 2. Bonus condition device number 0 indicates that it does not correspond to any bonus condition device. The Type 1 BB-A condition device is associated with the symbol combination of BB role 1, and this symbol combination can be displayed as a stopped symbol during non-RT, as described below. Furthermore, if the symbol combination of BB role 1 cannot be aligned on an active line, the game transitions to RT1, as described below, and the state in which the symbol combination can be aligned is carried over. On the other hand, in RT2, the symbol combination of BB role 1 cannot be aligned on an active line, and therefore, that state is not carried over (in Figure 24 (A), the "-" in the "RT2 (BB in operation)" column indicates that the symbol combination cannot be aligned, and the state in which it can be aligned is not carried over). The Type 1 BB-B condition device is associated with the BB2 symbol combination, and this symbol combination can be displayed as a stopped symbol during non-RT. Furthermore, if the BB2 symbol combination cannot be aligned on an active line, the game transitions to RT1, and the state in which the symbol combination can be aligned is carried over. Furthermore, in RT2, the BB2 symbol combination cannot be aligned on an active line, and therefore this state is not carried over.

The replay-A to L condition devices shown in FIG. 24(B) are assigned winning replay condition device numbers from 1 to 12, respectively. These condition devices are condition devices to which replay symbol combinations are associated. While a replay symbol combination may be aligned during non-RT, i.e., RT1, such a state does not exist during RT2. Furthermore, if any of the winning replay device numbers 1 to 12 in FIG. 24(B) is linked to the winning number determined by the role lottery, the symbol combination shown in the "winning role" column corresponding to that number will be aligned on an active line. For example, if winning number 1 is determined by the role lottery, any one of the symbol combinations of replay roles 1 to 4 associated with the replay-A condition device of winning replay condition device number 1 will be aligned. Furthermore, if the winning number 12 is determined by the winning combination lottery, it will be possible to complete any one of the replay combinations 2 to 5 associated with the replay-L condition device of the winning replay condition device number 12. The number 0 shown in FIG. 24(B) indicates that a winning number has been determined that will result in no winning or replay combination being possible, i.e., a loss. In this embodiment, a loss state can only occur during non-RT, but it may also occur during RT1 or RT2.

The winning-A1 to A12 condition devices shown in Figures 24(B), 25, and 26 are each assigned a corresponding winning replay condition device number from 13 to 24. These condition devices are condition devices to which symbol combinations of small winning combinations are associated. Furthermore, during non-RT and RT1, symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices may be aligned, but such a state does not occur during RT2. The winning-B1 to B12 condition devices shown in Figures 26 to 28 are each assigned a corresponding winning replay condition device number from 25 to 36. These condition devices are condition devices to which symbol combinations of small winning combinations are associated. During non-RT and RT1, symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices may be aligned, but such a state does not occur during RT2. The winning-C to winning-E condition devices shown in Figure 29 are each assigned a corresponding winning replay condition device number from 37 to 39. These condition devices are condition devices to which small winning symbol combinations are associated, and while during non-RT and RT1, it is possible to line up symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-C to winning-E condition devices, this is not possible during RT2.

(Detailed explanation of reel control according to the result of the lottery)
Next, a description will be given of the reel control executed by the reel control means 134 when a symbol combination corresponding to each of the above-mentioned condition devices can be achieved.
(a) Reel control related to type 1 BB During a non-RT in which a state has been reached in which a symbol combination corresponding to the type 1 BB-A condition device shown in Figure 24 (A) can be aligned, or during RT1 in which a state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the type 1 BB-A condition device can be aligned has been carried over, if the player's push position allows the corresponding symbols of BB role 1, "blue bar, blue bar, red seven," to be pulled onto the active line 29, then BB role 1 is established. Similarly, during a non-RT in which a state has been reached in which a symbol combination corresponding to the type 1 BB-B condition device can be aligned, or during RT1 in which a state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the type 1 BB-B condition device can be aligned has been carried over, then BB role 2 is established if the player's push position allows the corresponding symbols of BB role 2, "black bar, black bar, red seven," to be pulled onto the active line 29.

(b) Reel control for replay When a symbol combination corresponding to the replay-A to D condition devices shown in FIG. 24(B) is aligned, reel control is performed so that replay role 4 (middle RP) is always achieved, regardless of the push order or push position, whether in non-RT or RT1. Also, when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay-E to G condition devices is aligned during non-RT or RT, reel control is performed so that replay role 1 or 3 is achieved. Also, when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay-H to J condition devices is aligned during non-RT, replay role 2 (right-up RP) is always achieved regardless of the push order or push position, whereas when a symbol combination is aligned during RT1, reel control is performed so that replay role 4 (middle RP) is always achieved regardless of the push order or push position. Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay-K, L condition device is aligned during non-RT, replay role 5 (upper row watermelon RP) is always established regardless of the order or position of pressing, whereas when a symbol combination is aligned during RT1, reel control is performed so that replay role 4 (middle row RP) is always established regardless of the order or position of pressing.

In addition, if a losing winning number is determined during RT1, when the losing winning number is determined, and the button presses are pressed in a predetermined order, such as in reverse (the stop switch 26c is operated first), a "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" symbol combination (also referred to as a "Red 7s combination symbol") may be displayed in the display window W (for example, on the active line 29) depending on the button presses. This Red 7s combination symbol is the same as the corresponding symbol for the small win 40 (Red 7s combination small win), but the small win 40 is only formed during RT2 (see Figure 8). Therefore, the Red 7s combination symbol that stops and is displayed during RT1 is always a losing symbol.

(c) Reel control related to winning When the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices shown in Figures 24 (B), 25, and 26 are aligned during non-RT, a predetermined 1-piece role is always achieved regardless of the pressing order or pressing position, and when they are aligned during RT1, reel control is performed so that the role that is achieved varies depending on the pressing order and pressing position. For example, the winning-A11 condition device shown in Figure 26 is a condition device corresponding to symbol combinations of small roles 6, 10, 15, 16, 21, and 34, and when these symbol combinations are aligned during non-RT, reel control is performed so that small role 6, which is a 1-piece role, is always achieved regardless of the pressing order or pressing position.

On the other hand, if a symbol combination corresponding to the winning-A11 condition device is aligned during RT1, the reels are controlled so that minor win 6, a 15-coin combination, occurs with a 1/1 probability when the button presses are "center, right, left," minor win 34, a 15-coin combination, occurs with a 1/1 probability when the button presses are "right, center, left," and minor win 34, a 15-coin combination, occurs with a 1/1 probability when the button presses are "right, center, left," and minor win 10, 15, or 16, a 1-coin combination, occurs with a 1/8 probability when the button presses are other than "left, center, right," "left, right, center," "center, left, right," and "center, right, left," respectively. Note that "left," "center," and "right" refer to stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and their order indicates their operation sequence. For example, "center, right, left" indicates the order in which the stop switches are operated in the order 26b, 26c, and 26a. In Figures 25-28, each button press sequence is indicated by the numbers "1," "2," and "3." The numbers "123", "132", "213", "231", "312", and "321" in the diagram correspond to the push orders of "left-center-right", "left-right-center", "center-left-right", "center-right-left", "center-right-left", and "right-center-left", respectively.

During RT1, the state in which symbol combinations corresponding to the bonus condition device can be aligned is carried over, so depending on the button press order and button press position, BB1 or BB2 may be achieved. For example, if the state in which symbol combinations corresponding to a Type 1 BB-B condition device (i.e., the symbol combination of BB2) can be aligned during RT1, and the state in which symbol combinations corresponding to a prize-winning-A11 condition device can be aligned is reached, if the button press order is "center, right, left" or "right, center, left," small symbol 6 and small symbol 34 will always be achieved, respectively, and BB2 will never be achieved. On the other hand, with other button press orders ("left, center, right," "left, right, center," "center, left, right," "center, right, left"), if the button press order allows the corresponding symbols of small symbol 10, 15, or 16 to be drawn, BB2 will not be achieved. However, if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn, and conversely, if the corresponding symbols of BB2, "black bar/black bar/red seven," can be drawn, BB2 will be achieved.

Specifically, the case where the push order is "left, center, right" will be described as an example. First, a case will be described where the push position on the first left reel is within the range where the "red seven" symbol can be drawn. In this case, reel control is performed on the left reel to draw the "red seven" symbol, so at that stage, there remains the possibility of achieving either small win 16 or small win 21. Next, if the push position on the second center reel is within the range where the "blue bar" symbol can be drawn, reel control is performed on the center reel to draw the "blue bar" symbol, so at that stage, there remains the possibility of achieving small win 16. Finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the "blue bar" symbol can be drawn, reel control is performed on the right reel to draw the "blue bar" symbol, so finally, small win 16 (corresponding symbols "red seven, blue bar, blue bar") will be achieved. On the other hand, if the pressing position on the second middle reel is within a range that can pull in the "Red Seven" symbol, reel control is performed on the middle reel to pull in the "Red Seven" symbol, and a miss (no winning combination is achieved) is confirmed at that stage (there remains a possibility that the "Red Seven Red Seven Red Seven" symbol combination will ultimately be displayed), and finally, if the pressing position on the third right reel is within a range that can pull in the "Red Seven" symbol, reel control is performed on the right reel to pull in the "Red Seven" symbol, and the "Red Seven Red Seven Red Seven" symbol combination will ultimately be displayed.

Next, we will explain what happens when the push position on the first left reel is within the range where the "black bar" symbol can be drawn. In this case, reel control is performed on the left reel to draw the "black bar" symbol, leaving the possibility of achieving either BB 2, small symbol 10, or small symbol 15 at that stage. Next, if the push position on the second center reel is within the range where the "black bar" symbol can be drawn, reel control is performed on the center reel to draw the "black bar" symbol, leaving the possibility of achieving BB 2 at that stage. Finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the "red seven" symbol can be drawn, reel control is performed on the right reel to draw the "red seven" symbol, ultimately resulting in BB 2 (corresponding symbols: black bar, black bar, red seven). On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within a range that can pull in the "Gold Seven" symbol, the middle reel will be controlled to pull in the "Gold Seven" symbol, leaving the possibility of achieving minor win 10 at that stage; and finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within a range that can pull in the "Gold Seven" symbol, the right reel will be controlled to pull in the "Gold Seven" symbol, ultimately achieving minor win 10 (corresponding symbols: black bar, gold seven, gold seven).

When the symbol combinations of the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices shown in Figures 26 to 28 are aligned during non-RT or RT1, reel control is performed so that the winning combinations differ depending on the push order and push position. For example, the winning-B7 condition device shown in Figure 27 is a condition device associated with symbol combinations of small wins 4, 5, 8, 13, 18, 23, and 30. When these symbol combinations are aligned during non-RT, reel control is performed so that when the push order is "middle first," small win 30, a 15-coin combination, is achieved with a 1/1 probability, and when the push order is "left first" or "right first," small win 5, a 1-coin combination, is achieved with a 1/1 probability. Note that "left first" refers to the push order in which stop switch 26a is operated first, "middle first" refers to the push order in which stop switch 26b is operated first, and "right first" refers to the push order in which stop switch 26c is operated first. In Figures 26 to 29, the push orders for "left first," "center first," and "right first" are displayed as "1 - - -," "- - 2 - -," and "- - - - 3," respectively.

On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning-B7 condition device is aligned during RT1, when the push order is "middle left right", the small symbol 4 or small symbol 5, which is a 1-piece role, is established with a probability of 1/1, when the push order is "right left middle", the small symbol 30, which is a 15-piece role, is established with a probability of 1/1, and when the push order is other push orders ("left middle right", "left left middle", "middle right left", "right middle left"), any of the small symbols 8, 13, 18, and 23, which are 1-piece roles, is established with a probability of 1/8. Also, during RT1, when the state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the type 1 BB-A condition device (i.e., the symbol combination of BB role 1) is aligned is carried over, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning-B7 condition device is aligned, when the push order is "middle left left" and "right left middle", the small symbols 4, 5, and 30 are always established, so the BB role 1 is never established. On the other hand, when pressing in any other order ("left-center-right,""left-right-center,""center-right-left,""right-center-left"), if the pressing position allows the corresponding symbol of small symbols 8, 13, 18, or 23 to be drawn in, BB symbol 1 will not be formed, but the reels will be controlled so that these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn in, and conversely, if the corresponding symbol of BB symbol 1, "blue bar/blue bar/red seven," can be drawn in, BB symbol 1 will be formed.

The symbol combinations of the winning-C to E condition device shown in Figure 29 are designed to always result in a minor win 36, which is a 15-coin combination, regardless of the order or position of the buttons pressed, whether they are aligned during a non-RT or RT1.

The winning-F through Q condition devices shown in Figure 29 are configured so that the associated symbol combinations do not line up during non-RT or RT1, but are selected during RT2. Of these, the winning-F, G, L, and M condition devices, when the associated symbol combinations line up during RT2, perform reel control to ensure that the watermelon minor combination (minor combinations 24 through 37), which is a 15-coin combination, is achieved regardless of the push order or push position. When symbol combinations associated with the winning-I, J, K, O, P, and Q condition devices line up during RT2, reel control is performed to ensure that a 1-coin combination (minor combinations 1 through 23, 40 through 44) is achieved, depending on the push position. When symbol combinations associated with the winning-H condition device line up during RT2, reel control is performed to ensure that a 3-coin combination (minor combinations 38 and 39) is achieved, depending on the push position. When a symbol combination associated with the winning-N condition device is aligned during RT2, if the button press order is "left first" or "center first", a 1-coin combination will be achieved depending on the button press position, and if the button press order is "right first", a 7-coin combination 1-coin combination (small combination 40) will be achieved depending on the button press position.

(1-3) Means Constituting the Main Communication Control Means 150 The control command transmitting means 151 is configured to transmit control commands containing various information related to the game at predetermined timing. For example, control commands transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated include a control command containing information indicating which game mode is set (also referred to as a "game mode command"), a control command containing information indicating which RT state is set (also referred to as an "RT command"), and a control command containing information indicating the operation state of replay (also referred to as an "operation state command"). Furthermore, control commands transmitted in response to the operation of the start lever 25 include, for example, a control command containing information on a command number (also referred to as an "command number command") and a control command containing information on the effect group numbers (the effect group A number and the effect group B number) (also referred to as an "effect group number command"). In addition, control commands including information on setting values, control commands including information on the values of various counters such as a bell count counter, control commands including information instructing the content of the presentation to be executed by the secondary control means, and control commands including information to be transmitted in the bonus game described below may be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, when the start lever 25 is operated, or at some other trigger.

In this way, when the operation of the start lever 25 is validly accepted, various control commands (collectively referred to as "lever operation acceptance commands") equivalent to the instruction number commands and effect group number commands in the slot machine 1 are transmitted from the control command transmission means 151 to the sub-control means 200 (more specifically, the sub-main control means 200A), which will be described later. By receiving these lever operation acceptance commands, the sub-control means 200 can identify that the operation of the start lever 25 has been validly accepted (that the start lever 25 has been validly operated).

Furthermore, the control command transmitting means 151, upon confirmation that the minimum play time has elapsed, transmits a control command (also referred to as a "start all reels spin command") including information indicating that all reels will start spinning before all reels actually start spinning. Furthermore, upon acceptance of a first stop operation (an operation of the stop switch to stop the reels for the first time), the control command transmitting means 151 transmits a control command (also referred to as a "first stop acceptance command") including information indicating that the first stop operation has been accepted, and upon acceptance of a first reel stop (a stop of the reels corresponding to the first stop operation), the control command transmitting means 151 transmits a control command (also referred to as a "first stop command") including information indicating that the first reel stop has been accepted. Similarly, upon acceptance of a second stop operation (an operation of the stop switch to stop the reels next), the control command transmitting means 151 transmits a control command (also referred to as a "second stop acceptance command") including information indicating that the second stop operation has been accepted, and upon acceptance of a second reel stop (a stop of the reels corresponding to the second stop operation), the control command transmitting means 151 transmits a control command (also referred to as a "second stop command") including information about the second reel stop. Similarly, upon receipt of the third stop operation (finally operating the stop switch to stop the reels), a control command (also referred to as the "third stop acceptance command") containing information indicating that the third stop operation has been accepted is sent, and upon receipt of the third drum stop (stopping of the reels corresponding to the third stop operation), a control command (also referred to as the "third stop command") containing information about the third drum stop is sent.

In this way, each time each stop switch validly accepts a stop operation and switches from the OFF state to the ON state, the control command sending means 151 sends a control command (first, second, or third stop acceptance command) containing information indicating that the stop operation has been accepted to the sub-control means 200 (more specifically, the sub-main control means 200A), which will be described later. By receiving these stop acceptance commands, the sub-control means 200 can then identify that each stop switch has validly accepted a stop operation (first, second, or third stop operation).

Furthermore, after each stop switch has validly accepted a stop operation, each time the stop operation is released and the stop switch switches from the ON state to the OFF state, the control command transmission means 151 transmits a control command (stop operation release command) containing information indicating that the accepted stop operation has been released. Specifically, a control command containing information indicating that the first stop operation has been released (referred to as the "first stop operation release command"), a control command containing information indicating that the second stop operation has been released (referred to as the "second stop operation release command"), and a control command containing information indicating that the third stop operation has been released (referred to as the "third stop operation release command") are transmitted. By receiving these stop operation release commands, the sub-control means 200 can identify that the stop operation validly accepted by each stop switch has been released (that the player's hand has been removed from the stop switch). Note that the first and second stop operation release commands may not be transmitted, and only the third stop operation release command may be transmitted.

Furthermore, the control command sending means 151 sends a control command including information on all reels stopping (also referred to as an "all stop command") before determining the stopped symbol, and a control command including information on the number of game medals to be paid out (also referred to as a "payout number command") after determining the stopped symbol. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after all reels have stopped, it sends a control command including information on the winning determination result (also referred to as a "role determination result command"). Communication between the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A) is only possible in one direction, from the former to the latter.

The outer edge signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an outer edge signal to an external device, such as a data counter or hall computer, when a predetermined game state is reached. In this embodiment, the outer edge signal is output when a situation occurs in which 15 game medals are paid out twice (consecutively) when the symbol combination associated with the winning-A1 to A12 condition device or the winning-B1 to B12 condition device is aligned while the player is in game mode 3 in the advantageous zone. Such a situation can occur both within the BB and when not within the BB (not within the BB). If the outer edge signal were output only when such a situation occurred within the BB, the output of the outer edge signal would enable the player to determine that the BB is in place. In contrast, in this embodiment, the outer edge signal is output when the above situation occurs, whether within the BB or not within the BB. Therefore, even if the outer edge signal is output, it is difficult to reliably determine whether the player is within the BB. However, the possibility of 15 game medals being paid out when not inside the BB is significantly lower than when inside the BB. Therefore, when an outer end signal is output, there is a high possibility that it was output when inside the BB. Therefore, even if a player checks the number of times the outer end signal has been output using an external device, etc., and determines that this number represents the number of times the game has transitioned to inside the BB, that determination will not deviate significantly from the actual situation (reliability can be ensured when the outer end signal is interpreted as a signal indicating that the game is now inside the BB).

(2) Functional blocks of the sub-control means 200 The sub-control means 200 is composed of a sub-main control means (also referred to as the "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly manages (instructs) lamp effects, image effects, and sound effects, and a sub-sub control means (also referred to as the "second sub-control means") 200B that mainly controls (executes) image effects and sound effects.

(2-1) Means Constituting Sub-Main Control Means 200A The sub-main control means 200A is broadly divided into a presentation management means 210 and a sub-main communication control means 230. The presentation management means 210 comprises a game presentation management means 211, an announcement presentation management means 212, and a lamp presentation control means 213, and the sub-main communication control means 230 comprises a control command receiving means 231, a presentation command transmitting means 232, and a status command receiving means 233. Note that the above-mentioned means in the sub-main control means 200A are functional representations of the hardware, such as the sub-main CPU 71, ROM 72, RAM 73, and electronic circuits, arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. 2, and the software, such as a control program stored in the ROM 72.

(Means constituting the performance management means 210)
The game effect management means 211 is configured to manage the timing of the effects (also referred to as "game effects") using images and sounds executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, mainly for the purpose of increasing the interest in the game and enhancing the playability, based on control commands from the main control means 100. Game effects include, for example, continuous effects, single effects, assist effects, etc.

Continuous effects are effects that continue over multiple game periods, and include primarily using the image display device 11 to display images that tell a continuous story over multiple game periods, or displaying effect images that symbolize the player being in a specific game mode (for example, game mode 5). When performing continuous effects or the single effects described below, effects may be performed using effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b or decorative lamps 32a, 32b, or may be combined with effects using speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b.

A one-off effect is an effect that is executed one-off when a specific situation arises during the progress of the game. For example, an effect in which the image display device 11 displays an image that suggests the expected winning probability of a game role as each reel spins. Another example of a one-off effect is an effect in which, when the number of AT games (number of bells) is added by the main control means 100, the value of the added number of AT games (for example, characters such as "+10") is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11.

Assist effects are effects that assist the player, and in this embodiment, the push navigation effect is mainly performed in response to the navigation number information transmitted by the navigation number command from the main control means 100. This push navigation effect (sub-side push navigation) is a one-off effect that uses the image display device 11 as a sub-side push order display to display the push order (correct push order) corresponding to the navigation number on the display screen 11a for the player. In this embodiment, an RP navigation effect (sub-side RP navigation) corresponding to the above-mentioned RP navigation, a prize navigation effect (sub-side prize navigation) corresponding to the prize navigation, and a spot-press navigation effect (sub-side spot-press navigation) corresponding to the spot-press navigation are executed.

Specific examples of push order navigation effects (RP navigation effects, winning navigation effects) that notify players of the correct push order include displaying numbers indicating the corresponding push order (for example, for the "left first" push order, "1" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 11a, and for the "center left and right" push order, the numbers indicating the push order are displayed in the order "2," "1," and "3" from left to right at the bottom of the display screen 11a). When displaying the first through third push orders, the display of the first push order may be erased when the player operates the first stop switch in accordance with the displayed first push order, the display of the second push order may be erased when the player operates the second stop switch in accordance with the displayed second push order, and the display of the third push order may be erased when the player operates the third stop switch in accordance with the displayed third push order.

Also, if the player operates the stop switch in an order different from the displayed push order, the push navigation effect may be immediately terminated. Furthermore, when displaying the push order, the sounds "middle," "left," and "right" may be output from speakers 15a, 15b, etc., in association with the next operation to be performed. Furthermore, effect lamp 13a may correspond to "left," effect lamp 12 to "middle," and effect lamp 13b to "right," and these may light up or flash in association with the next operation to be performed. A display for sub-side push navigation may also be provided. For example, a display consisting of three 7-segment lamps arranged horizontally may be provided below the display window W, and in the case of a push order of "right-center-left," the numbers "3," "2," and "1" may be displayed on the left, center, and right 7-segment lamps, respectively.

The notification effect management means 212 is configured to manage the execution timing of image and audio effects (hereinafter referred to as "notification effects") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B based on control commands from the main control means 100, primarily for the purpose of notifying the player of information related to the game. Examples of notification effects include error notification effects that notify the player of the occurrence of an error using text information such as "Error Occurred," and effects that notify the player that an image is being prepared when power is restored using text information such as "Image Preparing." Another example of a notification effect is an effect that displays an image containing text information (also referred to as a "warning image") to attract the player's attention in order to prevent the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game (addiction).

The lamp effect control means 213 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, and 14b, the decorative lamps 32a and 32b, and the back lamps 38a to 38d. It is also configured to perform the suggestive effects described below.

(Means constituting the sub-main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving means 231 is configured to receive control commands from the main control means 100 and store them in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control commands).

The performance command sending means 232 is configured to send a performance command including various information related to the performance (for example, a performance command including image information) to the sub-sub control means 200B based on a control command from the main control means 100.

The status command receiving means 233 is configured to receive status commands (e.g., status commands including information that a reception error has occurred for a performance command) from the sub-sub control means 200B and store them in a predetermined storage area such as RAM 73 (e.g., a command buffer for the received status command).

(2-2) Means Constituting the Sub-Sub Control Means 200B In contrast to the sub-main control means 200A configured as described above, the sub-sub control means 200B is broadly divided into a presentation execution control means 250 and a sub-sub communication control means 270. The presentation execution control means 250 is provided with a game presentation execution control means 251 and an announcement presentation execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 is provided with a presentation command receiving means 271 and a status command sending means 272. Note that the above-mentioned means in the sub-sub control means 200B are functional representations of those configured with hardware such as the sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 76.

(Means constituting the performance execution control means 250)
The game effect execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, speakers 15a, 15b, etc. based on effect commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned game effects.

The notification effect execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, speakers 15a, 15b, etc. based on effect commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned notification effects.

(Means constituting the sub-sub communication control means 270)
The performance command receiving means 271 is configured to receive performance commands from the sub-main control means 200A and store them in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for the received performance commands).

The status command sending means 272 is configured to send the above-mentioned status commands to the sub-main control means 200A.

The transmission of control commands from the control command transmission means 151, the transmission of performance commands from the performance command transmission means 232, and the transmission of status commands from the status command transmission means 272 are all performed via serial communication (parallel communication may also be used). Each transmission means 151, 232, 272 has a similar configuration, and is equipped with a command buffer (also referred to as "CB") as a storage area for temporarily storing commands to be transmitted, a command processing unit that performs processing such as writing and reading the commands to be transmitted, and a command transmission unit that transmits commands via serial communication.

The CB has multiple memory areas, each distinguished by an address, and is configured to be able to store one byte of command data in each memory area. The command processing unit is configured to generate command data to be sent and write it to the address area indicated by the CB's write pointer, as well as read previously written command data from the address area indicated by the CB's read pointer and write it to the TDR (transmit data register) of the command sending unit. The command sending unit is configured to transfer the command data written to the TDR to the TSR (transmit shift register), where it is converted to serial data and sent.

When using the parallel communication method, previously written command data is read from the address area indicated by the CB read pointer, and this command data is written to a specified output port (output port for sending to the secondary control means) for transmission. In this embodiment, one command is typically two bytes long (the checksum is one byte long). The communication method is asynchronous (start-stop synchronization), and has one stop bit and one parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command structure can be changed as needed).

<Major control processes>
Below, among the control processes performed by the main control means 100 of the slot machine 1, the setting change process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process will be described with additional reference to Figures 30 to 58. Note that the variables such as counters and flags used in the following description are briefly explained in the variable list of Figure 12.

<Settings change process>
First, the basic flow of the setting change device processing will be explained with reference to Figure 30 (A). The setting change device processing is executed when a setting change is made, and performs a process of saving "0" in all storage areas (addresses in RAM 63 that store information about advantageous zones) that affect the performance of the instruction function (step K1).

<Game Progress Control Processing>
Next, the basic flow of the game progress control process will be described with reference to Figures 30(B) to 57. The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during a game, and as shown in Figure 30(B), first, a game start standby process is performed (step S1). In this game start standby process, as shown in Figure 30(C), it is determined whether the total stop wait number is 0 (step S11). Here, if the total stop wait number is not 0, the process waits for the standby time corresponding to the total stop wait number (step S12) and proceeds to step S13. If the total stop wait number is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S13. Then, in step S13, 0 is saved as the total stop wait number, and the game start standby process is terminated and returned.

After the game start standby process is completed, the process proceeds to step S2 in Figure 30 (B). Here, the process waits in that state until operation of the start lever 25 is accepted, and once accepted, the internal lottery start process is performed (step S3). In this internal lottery start process, an internal lottery is performed (step S21), as shown in Figure 31 (A). In this internal lottery, the bonus condition device number and the winning replay condition device number are determined. After the internal lottery is performed, the process proceeds to group number setting process.

In the group number setting process, as shown in FIG. 31(B), a value corresponding to the bonus condition device number (see FIG. 21(A)) is stored in the effect group A number (step S31), and a value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number (see FIG. 21(B)) is stored in the effect group B number (step S32). Next, values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number (see FIG. 22, same below) are stored in the condition device group A number (step S33), values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group D number (step S34), and values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group G number (step S35).

Similarly, values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group B number (step S36), values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group C number (step S37), and values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group E number (step S38). Furthermore, values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group I number (step S39), values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group F number (step S40), and values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group H number (step S41). Then, values corresponding to the effect group A number and effect group B number are stored in the condition device group J number (step S42), and the process proceeds to the section type number management lever processing.

In the section type number management lever processing, as shown in FIG. 32, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 (normal section) (step S51). If the section type number is 0, proceed to step S52 to determine whether BB is not activated. If BB is not activated, it is determined whether BB is in operation (step S53). If not, proceed directly to step S55. If BB is in operation, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 (step S54). If the condition device group A number is 1, proceed to step S51. On the other hand, if the determination in step S52 above is that BB is in operation, or if the determination in step S54 above is that the condition device group A number is not 1, proceed not to step S51 but to the standby effect processing described below.

In step S51, advantageous zone transition processing is performed. In this advantageous zone transition processing, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 0 (step S71), and if it is 0, the advantageous zone transition processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 0, an advantageous zone lottery is performed (step S72), and the lottery result is saved in the zone type number (step S73). Next, it is determined whether the zone type number is 0 (step S74), and if it is 0, the advantageous zone transition processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the zone type number is not 0, a chance mode 1 lottery is performed (step S75), and the lottery result is saved in the chance mode number (step S76). Furthermore, a Seven Table 1 lottery is performed (step S77), and the lottery result is saved in the Seven Table number (step S78).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 (step S79). If the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S83, where a chance game number lottery process is performed. In this chance game number lottery process, as shown in FIG. 34(B), a chance game number lottery is performed (step S91), the lottery result is saved in the chance game number counter (step S92), and the process returns. Upon returning from the chance game number lottery process, the process proceeds to step S84 in FIG. 34(A), where a chance cycle lottery is performed. The lottery result is then saved in the chance cycle counter, the advantageous zone transition process is terminated, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the chance mode number is determined to be 4 in step S79, the process proceeds to step S80 and AT winning processing is performed. In this AT winning processing, as shown in FIG. 35, first, 1 is saved in the AT winning flag (step S101). Next, an AT mode lottery is performed and the lottery result is saved in the AT mode number (step S102). Further, a Seven 1 lottery is performed and the lottery result is saved in the Seven number (step S103). Next, Seven number correction processing is performed (step S104).

In this seven number correction process, as shown in FIG. 36A, first, correction counter processing is performed (step S121). In this correction counter processing, as shown in FIG. 36B, correction counter data (a counter that adds up the value of the Gold Seven Counter and the value of the Seven Counter) is set to 0 (step S131), and it is determined whether the seven number is 2 (step S132). If the seven number is 2, the value of the Gold Seven Counter is set to the correction counter data (step S133), and 1 is added to the correction counter data (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. On the other hand, if the seven number is not 2 as determined in step S132, the process proceeds directly to step S135. In step S135, the value of the Seven Counter is added to the correction counter data, and the process proceeds to step S136. In step S136, a value calculated based on the cumulative counter, correction counter data, and bell count counter values is saved in the correction counter data, and the process returns from the correction counter processing.

Upon return from the correction counter processing, the process proceeds to step S122 in FIG. 36 (A), where it is determined whether the correction counter value is 1901 or greater. If the correction counter value is 1901 or greater, 1 is saved in the seven-number (step S123), and the seven-number correction processing is terminated and the process returns. If the correction counter value is not 1901 or greater, the process returns as is. In the achievement flag processing described below, the processing procedure branches depending on whether the correction counter value is 2101 or greater. In contrast, in this processing, whether to save 1 in the seven-number depends on whether the correction counter value is 1901 or greater, and the correction counter value (also referred to as the "discrimination value") used for branching is different. This is because saving 1 in the seven-number enables at least one more AT play the next time, and the discrimination value is set to be less than 2101 in the achievement flag processing, taking into consideration the corresponding increase in the number of game medals that can be won in the future. In this way, by changing the discrimination value according to the situation, it is possible to manage the number of game medals that can be won in the future without overcounting more than necessary.

Upon return from the seven-number correction process, the process proceeds to step S105 in Figure 35 to determine whether the seven-number is 1. If the seven-number is not 1, the process stores 3 in the gold seven-number counter (step S106) and then proceeds to step S107. If the seven-number is 1, the process proceeds directly to step S107. In step S107, the arrival flag process is performed.

In this reach flag processing, as shown in Figure 36 (C), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S141). After the correction counter processing is completed, it is determined whether the correction counter is 2101 or greater (step S142). If it is 2101 or greater, 1 is saved in the reach flag (step S143), and the reach flag processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the correction counter is not 2101 or greater, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 (step S144). If it is 3, the process returns; if it is not 3, 0 is saved in the reach flag (step S145) and the process returns.

When returning from the arrival flag processing, proceed to step S108 in FIG. 35 to determine whether the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is 1, the AT winning processing ends and returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1, an EX mode 1 lottery is performed (step S109), the lottery result is saved in the EX mode number (step S110), and then the AT winning processing ends and returns.

When returning from the AT winning processing process, proceed to step S81 in Figure 34 (A) and determine whether the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is not 1, the transition to the advantageous zone ends and return occurs; if the condition device group A number is 1, the AT entry lever processing is performed (step S82).

In this AT entry lever processing, first, loop CU rank set processing is performed (step S151) as shown in Fig. 37. In the loop CU rank set processing, as shown in Fig. 38(A), the seven set counter is incremented by 1 (step S171), a value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the loop number (step S172), a value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the CU rank number (step S173), and the process returns.

When the loop CU rank set process returns, the process proceeds to step S152 in FIG. 37, where it is determined whether the seven number is 1. If the seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S154, where the seven loop lottery process is performed. In the seven loop lottery process, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), a seven loop lottery is performed (step S181), the lottery result is saved in the seven counter (step S182), and the process returns. When the seven loop lottery process returns, the process proceeds to step S155 in FIG. 37, where the reach flag process is executed and the process proceeds to step S156. On the other hand, if the seven counter value is not 0 as determined in step S153 above, the process proceeds directly to step S156. Furthermore, if the seven number is not 1 as determined in step S152 above, the gold seven counter value is decremented by 1 (step S158), and gold seven loop lottery correction process is performed (step S159).

In this Gold Seven Loop lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), it is determined whether the reach flag is 0. If it is not 0, the Gold Seven Loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the reach flag is 0, correction counter processing is performed (step S192), and after completion of this, it is determined whether the correction counter value is less than 1900 (step S193). Here, if the correction counter value is 1900 or greater, the Gold Seven Loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the correction counter value is less than 1900, a Gold Seven Loop lottery is performed (step S194), and it is determined whether the result is 0 (step S195). Here, if the result of the Gold Seven Loop lottery is 0, the Gold Seven Loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the Gold Seven Loop lottery is not 0, 3 is stored in the Gold Seven counter (step S196), reach flag processing is performed (step S197), and the process returns.

Upon return from the Gold Seven Loop lottery correction process, the process proceeds to step S156 in FIG. 37, where a draw for the additional mode is conducted and the result is saved in the additional mode number (step S157). Next, correction counter processing is conducted (step S160), and after completion, a draw for the number of bells is conducted (step S161), and the result is saved in the bell count counter (step S162). Next, bell count counter correction processing is conducted (step S163).

In this bell count counter correction process, as shown in FIG. 39, first, the allowable bell count value (the number of bells allowed until the correction counter reaches its upper limit) calculated based on the difference between the upper limit value (2100) and the current value of the correction counter is stored in the correction counter (step S201). Next, it is determined whether the reach flag is 0 (step S202). If it is not 0, the process proceeds directly to step S203. If it is 0, it is determined whether the correction counter value is smaller than the bell count counter value (step S206). If it is smaller, the process proceeds to step S203. In step S203, 7 is stored in the bell count counter, and after saving, the bell count counter correction process ends and returns. Upon returning from the bell count counter correction process, the process proceeds to step S164 in FIG. 37, where reach flag processing is executed, and the AT entry lever processing ends and returns. Upon returning from the AT entry lever processing, the advantageous zone transition processing in FIG. 34(A) also ends and returns, and the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 32, where lever-on wait processing is executed.

In this lever-operated wait process, as shown in FIG. 40 , first, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 (step S211). If the condition device group A number is 1, it is determined whether the AT win flag is 0 (step S212). If the AT win flag is 0, 2 is stored in the lever weight number (step S213). If the AT win flag is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever weight number (step S214). After storing the value, the lever-operated wait process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the determination in step S211 above indicates that the condition device group A number is not 1, the process proceeds to step S215, where it is determined whether the main gaming state number is less than 2. If the main gaming state number is less than 2, the process proceeds directly to step S217. If the main gaming state number is 2 or greater, it is determined whether the main gaming state number is 4 (step S230). If it is 4, the process proceeds to step S217. On the other hand, if the main gaming state number is not 4, the lever-operated wait process is terminated and the process returns.

In step S217, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0, and if it is 0, the lever-time wait processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the AT winning flag is not 0, a lever effect weight lottery is performed (step S218). It is then determined whether the result is 0 (step S219), and if it is 0, the lever-time wait processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the lever effect weight lottery is not 0, the process proceeds to step S213, where 2 is saved as the lever weight number, and after saving, the lever-time wait processing is terminated and the process returns. Upon returning from the lever-time wait processing, the process returns to the section type number management lever processing in Figure 32 and proceeds to the standby effect processing described below.

On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0 as determined in step S51 of FIG. 32, a 0 is saved in the lever full stop flag (step S57), and it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 (step S58). If the condition device group A number is 1, a 1 is saved in the Type 1 BB win flag (step S59). If the condition device group A number is not 1, a 0 is saved in the Type 1 BB win flag (step S60). After saving, it is determined whether the winning replay condition device number is one of 13 to 36 (step S61). If the winning replay condition device number is one of 13 to 36, a value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number is saved in the instruction number (step S62), and the process proceeds to step S63 of FIG. 33. If the winning replay condition device number is not one of 13 to 36, the process proceeds directly to step S63.

In step S63, the main gaming state number is determined, and depending on the main gaming state number, if the main gaming state number is 1, main gaming state number 1 lever processing is performed (step S64), and if the main gaming state number is 2, main gaming state number 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S65). Also, if the main gaming state number is 3, main gaming state number 3 lever processing is performed (step S66), if the main gaming state number is 4, main gaming state number 4 lever processing is performed (step S67), and if the main gaming state number is 5, main gaming state number 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S68). After each lever processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S56 in Figure 32. On the other hand, if the main gaming state number is any other number, no special processing is performed and the process proceeds directly to step S56.

In the main gaming state number 1 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), a chance mode 2 drawing is performed (step S241), and then a chance mode number determination process is performed (step S2421). In this chance mode number determination process, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), it is determined whether the result of the chance mode 2 drawing or chance mode 3 drawing is 0 (step S251). Here, if the result is 0, the chance mode number determination process is terminated and the process returns; if the result is not 0, the result of the drawing is saved in the chance mode number (step S252) and the process returns.

Upon return from the chance mode number determination process, the process proceeds to step S243 in FIG. 41 (A), where it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4. If the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S247, where it is determined whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. If it is 0, the process ends the main gaming state number 1 lever process and returns. If it is not 0, a chance game number lottery process is performed, and after that, the main gaming state number 1 lever process is terminated and returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4 as determined in step S242, the process proceeds to step S244, where AT winning process is performed. After that, it is determined whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0 (step S245). If it is 0, the main gaming state number 1 lever process is terminated and returns. If it is not 0, AT entry lever process is performed, and then returns.

In the main game state number 2, 5 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), first, the post-AT winning lever processing is performed (step S261). In this post-AT winning lever processing, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether the reach flag is 0 (step S271). If the reach flag is not 0, the post-AT winning lever processing ends and returns. If the reach flag is 0, it proceeds to step S272, where it is determined whether the EX mode number is 1. If the EX mode number is 1, an EX mode 2 lottery is performed (step S273), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 2 (step S274). If the lottery result is 2, 2 is saved as the EX mode number (step S275), and then it proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, if the EX mode number is not 1 as determined in step S272 above, it proceeds directly to step S276. If the EX mode number is not 2 as determined in step S274 above, it proceeds directly to step S276.

In step S276, it is determined whether the Seven Table number is less than 13. If the Seven Table number is less than 13, it is determined whether the drawn flag is 0 (step S277). If it is 0, it is further determined whether the condition device group G number is 0 (step S278). If the condition device group G number is not 0, the process proceeds to step S279. In step S279, a Seven Table 2 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether the result of the lottery is 0 (step S280). If the result of the Seven Table 2 lottery is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S282. If the result of the Seven Table 2 lottery is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the Seven Table number (step S281), and then the process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, the drawn flag is saved as 1, and the process proceeds to step S283. On the other hand, if the determination in step S276 above is that the seven table number is 13 or greater, if the determination in step S277 above is that the lottery-done flag is not 0, or if the determination in step S278 above is that the condition device group G number is 0, then proceed to step S283.

In step S283, it is determined whether the Seven number is 1. If the Seven number is 1, a Seven 2 lottery is conducted (step S284), and it is determined whether the result is 2 (step S285). If the result of the Seven 2 lottery is 2, the lottery result is saved in the Seven number (step S286), and a Seven number correction process is performed (step S287). After the Seven number correction process is performed, it is determined whether the Seven number is 2 (step S288). If the result is 2, 3 is saved in the Gold Seven counter (step S289), and the process proceeds to step S290. On the other hand, if the Seven number is not 1 as determined in step S283, if the result of the Seven 2 lottery is not 2 as determined in step S285, or if the Seven number is not 2 as determined in step S289, the process proceeds to step S291. In step S291, a Seven Stock 1 lottery is conducted, and the result is added to the Seven counter before proceeding to step S290. In this step S290, the reach flag processing is performed, and then the lever processing ends after the AT is won and the process returns.

When returning from the lever processing after winning the AT, proceed to step S262 in Figure 41 (C) and determine whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. If the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 2, 5 lever processing ends and returns; if it is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed, and then the game state number 2, 5 lever processing ends and returns.

In the main game state number 3 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), first, it is determined whether the command number is 0 (step S301). If the command number is not 0, the value of the bell count counter is decremented by 1 (step S302) and processing proceeds to step S303. If the command number is 0, processing proceeds directly to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether the reach flag is 0. If the reach flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and processing returns. If the reach flag is 0, a Seven Stock 2 lottery is performed (step S304) and the result of the lottery is added to the Seven Counter (step S306). Next, it is determined whether the reach flag is 0 (step S307). If the reach flag is not 0, it is determined whether the value of the Gold Seven Counter is 1 or 2 (step S308). If the value of the Gold Seven counter is not 1 or 2, the main game state number 3 lever processing ends and returns; if the value of the Gold Seven counter is 1 or 2, the Gold Seven loop rewrite lottery correction processing proceeds.

In the Gold Seven Loop rewrite lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 43(B), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S311), and then it is determined whether the correction counter value is less than 1900 (step S312). If the correction counter value is 1900 or greater, the Gold Seven Loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. If the correction counter value is less than 1900, the Gold Seven Loop rewrite lottery is performed (step S313), and it is determined whether the result is 0 (step S314). If the result of the Gold Seven Loop rewrite lottery is 0, the Gold Seven Loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. If the result is not 0, 3 is stored in the Gold Seven counter (step S316). Next, reach flag processing is performed (step S316), and then the Gold Seven Loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. Upon returning from the Gold Seven Loop rewrite lottery correction process, the main game state number 3 lever processing in FIG. 43(A) is also terminated and the process returns.

In the main gaming state number 4 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 44(A), a draw 1 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 (step S321). If the result of the draw 1 lottery is not 0, AT winning processing is performed (step S323), and then it is determined whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0 (step S324). If the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main gaming state number 4 lever processing is terminated and the process returns. If the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed (step S325), and then the main gaming state number 4 lever processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the draw 1 lottery is 0 as determined in step S322, the process proceeds to step S326, where it is determined whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. Here, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main gaming state number 4 lever processing is terminated and a return is made, and if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to the AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing. In this AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing, as shown in Figure 44 (B), a lottery for the AT cycle preferential game number is performed (step S331), the lottery result is stored in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S332), the AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing is terminated and a return is made. With the return from this AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing, the main gaming state number 4 lever processing in Figure 44 (A) is also terminated and a return is made.

Next, we will explain the standby effect processing that is performed after the section type number management lever processing in Figure 32. In this standby effect processing, as shown in Figure 45, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 (step S341). If the section type number is not 0, it is determined whether the main gaming state number is 3 (step S342). If the main gaming state number is 3, it is further determined whether the value of the seven set counter is 1 (step S344). If the value of the seven set counter is 1, it is determined whether the seven table number is less than 15 (step S344). If it is less than 15, it proceeds to step S345. If it is 15 or greater, it proceeds to step S347. In step S347, it is determined whether the winning replay condition device number is 1-12 or 37-39. If it is determined not to be one of these, it proceeds to step S345. If it is determined to be one of these, it terminates the standby effect processing and returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is determined to be 0 in step S341 above, or if the main gaming state number is not determined to be 3 in step S342 above, the process proceeds directly to step S345.

In step S345, it is determined whether the lever weight number is 0. If the lever weight number is 0, the process proceeds to step S345. If the lever weight number is not 0, the process waits for a period of time corresponding to the lever weight number, saves 0 as the lever weight number (step S349), and then proceeds to step S346. In step S346, it is determined whether the standby effect number is 0. If the standby effect number is 0, the process ends the standby effect processing and returns. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the process executes the standby effect (step S349), then ends the standby effect processing and returns.

When the standby effect processing is completed and the system returns, the section type number management lever processing in Figure 32 also ends, which also ends the internal lottery start processing in Figure 31 (A), and the system proceeds to step S4 in Figure 30 (B). In this step S4, it is continuously determined whether all reels have stopped, and if all reels have stopped, game medals are paid out (only if a winning combination is achieved) (step S5). Furthermore, count management is performed to update the number displayed on the display (not shown), which shows the number of game medals won during the AT, etc., depending on the number of game medals paid out (step S6). Then, the section type number management game end processing is performed (step S7).

In this section type number managed game termination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 (step S361). If the section type number is 0, the section type number managed game termination process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, a 1 is set to the lever full stop flag (step S362), and cumulative counter processing is performed (step S363). In the cumulative counter processing, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether a replay activation symbol (a symbol corresponding to a replay role) is displayed (step S381). If it is displayed, the cumulative counter processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if a replay activation symbol is not displayed, the number of game medals paid out (including 0) is added to the cumulative counter value (step S382), and the cumulative counter value is further decremented by 3 (step S383), after which the cumulative counter processing is terminated and the process returns.

Upon return from the cumulative counter process, the process proceeds to step S364 in FIG. 46, where the main gaming state number is determined. Then, depending on the main gaming state number, if the main gaming state number is 0, main gaming state number 0 full stop process is performed (step S365), if the main gaming state number is 1, main gaming state number 1 full stop process is performed (step S366), and if the main gaming state number is 2, main gaming state number 2, 5 full stop process is performed (step S367). Also, if the main gaming state number is 3, main gaming state number 3 full stop process is performed (step S368).
If the main game state number is 4, main game state number 4 full stop processing is performed (step S369), and if the main game state number is 5, main game state numbers 2 and 5 full stop processing is performed (step S370). Furthermore, if the main game state number is 6, main game state number 6 full stop processing is performed (step S371), and if the main game state number is 7, main game state number 7 full stop processing is performed (step S372).

In the main gaming state number 0 full stop processing in step S365 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 48, first, it is determined whether the AT win flag is 0 (step S391). Here, if the AT win flag is 0, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 (step S392). If the condition device group A number is 1, it is further determined whether BB is not established (step S392). If BB is not established, 6 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S394), the main gaming state number 0 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 as determined in step S392 above, or if BB is established as determined in step S393 above, 0 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S396), the main gaming state number 0 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns. Also, if the AT win flag is not 0 as determined in step S391 above, the process proceeds to step S396, where it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is not 1, the main gaming state number is saved as 2 (step S398), the main gaming state number 0 full stop processing is terminated, and the program returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is 1, the program proceeds to step S397 and performs the game termination processing when the AT is entered.

In this game termination process when entering the AT, as shown in FIG. 49, 0 is saved in the chance mode number (step S401), 0 is saved in the chance game number counter (step S402), and 0 is saved in the chance cycle counter (step S403). Then, 0 is saved in the EX mode number (step S404), 0 is saved in the AT cycle counter (step S405), and 0 is saved in the lottery-completed flag (step S406). Furthermore, 3 is saved in the main game state number (step S407), and the advantageous zone lamp is turned on (step S408).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether three "Red Seven" symbols are displayed stopped in a line on the upper line within the display window W (Step S409). If they are, the process proceeds to Step S410; if they are not, the process proceeds to Step S412. In Step S412, it is determined whether three "Red Seven" symbols are displayed stopped in a line on the active line 29 within the display window W. If they are, the process proceeds to Step S410; if they are not, the process proceeds to Step S413. In Step S413, it is determined whether three "Red Seven" symbols are displayed stopped in a line on the lower line within the display window W. If they are, the process proceeds to Step S410; if they are not, the process proceeds to Step S414. In Step S414, it is determined whether three "Red Seven" symbols are displayed stopped in a line on the downward sloping right line within the display window W. If they are, the process proceeds to Step S410; if they are not, the process proceeds to Step S415. In step S415, it is determined whether three "Red Seven" symbols are displayed in a line sloping upward to the right within the display window W. If they are displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S410; if they are not displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S416.

If the process proceeds to step S410 (when three "Red Seven" symbols are displayed stopped in a line in the display window W), a 1 is stored in the wait number when all symbols are stopped, and a 0 is stored in the standby effect number (step S411), and the process proceeds to step S418 in FIG. 49. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S416 (when three "Red Seven" symbols are not displayed stopped in a line in the display window W), a 0 is stored in the wait number when all symbols are stopped, and a 1 is stored in the standby effect number (step S417), and the process proceeds to step S418 in FIG. 49. In step S418, it is determined whether the Seven number is 2. If the Seven number is not 2, the AT entry game termination process is terminated and the process returns. If the Seven number is 2, the standby effect number is incremented by 2 (step S419), and the AT entry game termination process is terminated and the process returns. Upon returning from the AT entry game termination process, the main game state number 0 full stop process in FIG. 48 is also terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state number 1 full stop processing in step S366 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the chance game number counter is decremented by 1 (step S431), and it is determined whether the game is a BB activation end game (a game in which the operation of BB game ends) (step S432). If the game is not a BB activation end game, the process proceeds directly to step S435. If the game is a BB activation end game, 0 is saved in the chance game number counter (step S433), the chance cycle counter is decremented by 1 (step S434), and the process proceeds to step S435. In step S435, it is determined whether the AT win flag is 0. If the AT win flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the chance game number counter is 0 (step S436). If the value of the chance game number counter is 0, it is further determined whether the value of the chance cycle counter is 0 (step S437). If the chance cycle counter value is 0, a chance mode 3 lottery is performed (step S438), and then a chance mode number determination process is performed (step S439).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 (step S441). If the chance mode number is not 4, 1 is stored in the advantageous zone counter (step S441), the main gaming state number 1 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4, AT winning processing is performed (step S445), and then 2 is stored in the main gaming state number (step S448), the main gaming state number 1 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the value of the chance game number counter is not 0 as determined in step S436 above, or if the value of the chance cycle counter is not 0 as determined in step S437 above, the process proceeds to step S442, where it is determined whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. If the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main gaming state number 1 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, it is determined whether the Type 1 BB operating symbol is not displayed (step S443), and if the Type 1 BB operating symbol is not displayed, 6 is saved in the main gaming state number (step S444), and if the Type 1 BB operating symbol is not displayed, the main gaming state number 1 full stop processing ends and returns.

Also, if the AT winning flag is not 0 as determined in step S435 above, proceed to step S446, where it is determined whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. Here, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, 2 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S448), main gaming state number 1 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, AT entry game termination processing is performed (step S447), and then main gaming state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state number 2, 5 full stop processing in step S367 of Figure 46, as shown in Figure 51 (B), it is determined whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0 (step S421), and if the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the process remains as is; if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the game termination processing when AT is entered is performed (step S422), and then the main game state number 2, 5 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns.

In the main gaming state number 3 full stop process in step S368 of Fig. 46, as shown in Fig. 52, first, it is determined whether the value of the bell count counter is 0 or not (step S451). If the value of the bell count counter is not 0, the main gaming state number 3 full stop process is terminated and the process returns. If the value of the bell count counter is 0, the process returns to step S452.
The process proceeds to step S452, where it is determined whether the seven number is 1. If the seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S452, where it is determined whether the value of the seven counter is 0. If the value of the seven counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S454, where it is determined whether the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001. If the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001, it is determined whether the value of the reach flag is 0 (step S455), and if the value of the reach flag is 0, an AT mode rewrite lottery is performed (step S456). Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 (step S457), and if the lottery result is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S459, and if the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the AT mode number (step S458), and then the process proceeds to step S459.

In step S459, an AT cycle lottery is performed, and the result of the lottery is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S460). Furthermore, a Seven Table 1 lottery is performed (step S462), and the result of the lottery is stored in the Seven Table Number (step S463). Next, a lottery process for the number of AT cycle preferential games is performed (step S464), after which a 0 is stored in the AT win flag (step S465), a 0 is stored in the Seven Number (step S466), and a 0 is stored in the Seven Counter (step S467). Next, a 0 is stored in the Gold Seven Counter (step S468), a 0 is stored in the Seven Set Counter (step S469), and a 0 is stored in the Loop Number (step S470). Next, a 0 is stored in the CU Rank Number (step S471), a 0 is stored in the Attainment Flag (step S472), and a 0 is stored in the Bonus Mode Number (step S473). Furthermore, a 0 is stored in the Bell Count Counter (step S474), and a 0 is stored in the Total Winnings Counter (step S475). Then, 7 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S476), and 2 is saved as the wait number when all games are stopped (step S477), after which the main gaming state number 3 all-stop processing ends and the program returns.

On the other hand, if the Seven number is not 1 as determined in step S452 above, or if the Seven Counter is not 0 as determined in step S453 above, proceed to step S481 in FIG. 53 to determine whether the value of the Seven Set Counter is 7. If the Seven Set Counter value is not 7, proceed directly to step S484. If the Seven Set Counter value is 7, save 15 in the Seven Table Number (step S482), save 0 in the Seven Set Counter (step S483), and proceed to step S484. In step S484, loop CU rank set processing is performed, and then determine whether the Seven number is 1 (step S485). If the Seven number is not 1, determine whether the value of the Gold Seven Counter is 0 (step S487), save 1 in the Seven number (step S488), and proceed to step S489. On the other hand, if the Seven number is 1, subtract 1 from the value of the Seven Counter (step S488), and proceed to step S489.

In step S489, it is determined whether the value of the Seven Counter is 0, and if the value of the Seven Counter is 0, it is determined whether the Reach Flag is 0 (step S490). If the Reach Flag is 0, a Seven Loop lottery process (step S491) and Reach Flag process (step S492) are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S493. On the other hand, if the value of the Seven Counter is not 0 as determined in step S489 above, or if the Reach Flag is not 0 as determined in step S490 above, the process proceeds directly to step S493. If the value of the Gold Seven Counter is not 0 as determined in step S487 above, the process proceeds to step S495, where it is determined whether the value of the Gold Seven Counter is 3. If the value of the Gold Seven Counter is not 3, the process proceeds directly to step S497. If the value of the Gold Seven Counter is 3, 3 is saved as the standby effect number (step S496) and the process proceeds to step S497. In step S497, the value of the Gold Seven counter is decremented by 1, and the Gold Seven loop lottery process is executed (step S498), after which the process proceeds to step S493.

In step S493, a draw for the add-on mode is conducted, and the result of the draw is saved in the add-on mode number (step S494). Then, proceed to step S501 in Figure 54, where correction counter processing is performed. Next, a draw for the number of bells change is conducted (step S502), and it is determined whether the result is 0 (step S503). If the result of the number of bells change draw is 0, a draw for number of bells 2 is conducted (step S504), and the result is saved in the number of bells counter (step S505), before proceeding to step S508. If the result of the number of bells change draw is not 0, a draw for number of bells 3 is conducted (step S506), and the result is saved in the number of bells counter (step S507), before proceeding to step S508.

In step S508, bell count counter correction processing is performed, followed by arrival flag processing (step S509). Next, 3 is stored in the lever wait number (step S510), and it is determined whether the standby effect number is 0 (step S511). If the standby effect number is 0, 1 is stored in the standby effect number (step S512), and the program proceeds to step S477 in Figure 54. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the program proceeds directly to step S477. Then, 2 is stored in the full stop wait number, and the main game state number 3 full stop processing ends and the program returns.

In the main game state number 4 full stop processing in step S369 of FIG. 46, as shown in FIG. 55, the value of the AT cycle preferential game number counter is decremented by 1 (step S521), and it is determined whether the game is a BB operation end game (step S522). If the game is not a BB operation end game, the process proceeds directly to step S525. If the game is a BB operation end game, 0 is saved in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S523), and the value of the AT cycle counter is decremented by 1 (step S524), and then the process proceeds to step S525. In step S525, it is determined whether the AT win flag is 0. If the AT win flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the AT cycle counter is 0 (step S526), and if the value of the AT cycle counter is also 0, a draw 2 is performed (step S527). It then determines whether the lottery result is 0 (step S528), and if the lottery result is 0, it stores 1 in the advantageous zone clear counter (step S529), ends the main game state number 4 full stop processing, and returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the AT cycle counter is not 0 as determined in step S526 above, the process proceeds to step S534, where it is determined whether the Type 1 BB win flag is 0. If the Type 1 BB win flag is 0, the main game state number 4 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB win flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S535, where it is determined whether BB has not been established. If BB has not been established, the main game state number 4 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns. If BB has been established, 7 is saved in the main game state number (step S536), and the main game state number 4 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns.

Also, if the AT winning flag is not 0 as determined in step S525 above, the process proceeds to step S531, where it is determined whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. Here, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S532, where game termination processing is performed when AT is entered, main game state number 4 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S533, where 5 is saved as the main game state number, after which the main game state number 4 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns. Furthermore, if the result of the draw 2 is not 0 as determined in step S528 above, the process proceeds to step S530, where AT winning processing is performed, after which 5 is saved as the main game state number (step S533), after which the main game state number 4 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns.

In the main gaming state number 6 full stop processing in step S371 of Figure 46, as shown in Figure 56 (A), it is determined whether BB has been established (step S541). If BB has not been established, the main gaming state number 6 full stop processing ends and the process returns. If BB has been established, the main gaming state number is saved as 1 (step S542), and then the main gaming state number 6 full stop processing ends and the process returns.

In the main gaming state number 7 full stop processing in step S372 of Figure 46, as shown in Figure 56 (B), it is determined whether BB has been established (step S551). If BB has not been established, the main gaming state number 7 full stop processing ends and the process returns. If BB has been established, 4 is saved as the main gaming state number (step S552), and then the main gaming state number 6 full stop processing ends and the process returns.

After executing one of the full stop processes for main game state numbers 0 to 7 shown in steps S365 to S372 in Figure 46, the program proceeds to step S373 in Figure 46. Here, 0 is saved as the instruction number, the section type number management game termination process ends, and a return is made. Upon returning from the section type number management game termination process, the program proceeds to step S8 in Figure 30 (B), where advantageous zone clear counter management processing is performed.

In the advantageous zone clear counter management process, as shown in FIG. 57, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is decremented by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 0 before the current decrement (step S562). If the value of the advantageous zone clear counter was not 0 before the current decrement, the process proceeds to step S565, where it is determined whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter has become 0 as a result of the current decrement. If the value of the advantageous zone clear counter has become 0 as a result of the current decrement, the process proceeds directly to step S566. On the other hand, if the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is not 0 after the current decrement, the process proceeds to step S567, where it is determined whether a replay activation symbol has been displayed in the game. If a replay activation symbol has been displayed in the game, the process proceeds directly to step S569. If not, the process adds the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter (step S568), and then proceeds to step S569.

In step S569, it is determined whether the value of the net increase counter is greater than or equal to 2401. If the value of the net increase counter is less than 2401, the process proceeds to step S566. If the value is greater than or equal to 2401, the process terminates the advantageous zone clear counter management process and returns. In step S566, 0 is stored in all memory areas that store data values that affect the performance of the instruction function, and the process proceeds to step S563. On the other hand, if the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is determined to be 0 before the current subtraction in step S562 above, the process proceeds directly to step S563. In step S563, it is determined whether the zone type number is 0. If the zone type number is 0, the process terminates the advantageous zone clear counter management process and returns. On the other hand, if the zone type number is not 0, 1500 is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter (step S564), and the process terminates the advantageous zone clear counter management process and returns.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is carried out every predetermined time (e.g., 2.235 milliseconds) to read each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by a player, detect (check) the signal level, send each control command, and control the drive of the reels. As shown in FIG. 58, this timer interrupt process first performs interrupt initialization process (save registers, disable interrupts, etc.) (step MT11), and then determines whether a power outage has been detected (step MT12). If a power outage has been detected, power outage process is carried out (step MT25). The power outage process includes saving registers, saving stack pointers,
The interrupt status is saved, etc. In addition, the information about the result of the winning combination and the information about the game status (including the information about the AT) stored in a predetermined storage area is retained, and the checksum is calculated and stored, etc.

On the other hand, if a power outage is not detected, the interrupt counter value is updated (decremented by "1") (step MT13), and then a timer measurement is performed (step MT14). This timer measurement involves subtracting or adding to the timer value of any timer set in the game progress control process described above. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). This input port reading involves reading and storing the signal levels of each game operation signal input to the input port, and determining the signal levels.

Next, reel drive control processing is performed to control the drive of reels 3a-3c (e.g., acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stopped state, etc.) (step MT16). This reel drive control processing updates the reel drive pulse output counter value, which indicates the timing for switching the stepping motor's output phase (excitation phase), depending on the reel drive state (stopped, reel rotation standby, accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, etc.), and acquires, updates, and outputs reel drive pulse data that drives the stepping motor. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether the reel drive control processing has been performed for all reels. If not, the process returns to step MT16 and performs the reel drive control processing again. On the other hand, if the reel drive control processing has been performed for all reels, port output processing is performed to output excitation to the reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. (step MT18), and then control command transmission processing is performed to transmit the control commands stored in the control command buffer (CB) (step MT19).

Next, the process proceeds to step MT20, where the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in a specified memory area is read and the outer end signal is output. Next, an LED display is performed, causing the aforementioned display lamp to display a specified message (step MT21). For example, this LED display causes the payout number display lamp 46j to display the following: That is, if no error (excluding E-system errors) has occurred, the payout number "0-9" is displayed based on the number of game medals paid out, or a numerical value "1-6" is displayed based on a set value. Furthermore, when announcing the push order, the display mode of the instruction numbers "=1" to "=6" is displayed. Furthermore, if an error (excluding E-system errors) has occurred, an error message is displayed based on the value of the error number.

Next, the system proceeds to step MT22, where error management is performed. This error management begins with an error check. This error check determines whether an H0 error has occurred, whether a CE error has occurred, whether a CP error has occurred, whether a CH error has occurred, whether a C0 error has occurred, whether a C1 error has occurred, whether an E6 error has occurred, and whether an E7 error has occurred. Furthermore, if an E6 or E7 error occurs, the payout number indicator lamp 46j displays an error and game execution is stopped. If an E-system error occurs, error recovery is possible by executing the setting change process described above. If an error has occurred after this error check, an output request set process is performed when an error is detected to send error information to the sub-control means 200. After this error management process is performed, the random numbers used for determining roles, etc. are updated (step MT23), and then interrupt recovery process (register restoration, interrupt permission, etc.) is performed (step MT24), resulting in an interrupt return.

<LED board and light-emitting component>
Next, mainly with reference to Figures 59 to 66, the LED substrates and light-emitting components used for the respective effect lamps (first effect lamp 12, second effect lamps 13a and 13b, third effect lamps 14a and 14b, fourth effect lamps 16a and 16b, decorative lamps 32a and 32b) shown in Figure 1 will be described. Note that the uses of the LED substrates and light-emitting components described below are not limited to the effect lamps of slot machine 1.

(LED board component surface shape and light-emitting component configuration)
The LED board 310 shown in Fig. 59 is an example of an LED board used for the first effect lamp 12 of the slot machine 1. Similarly, the LED boards 320 and 330 shown in Fig. 59 are examples of LED boards used for the fourth effect lamps 16a and 16b of the slot machine SM, respectively. The LED boards 310, 320, and 330 are arranged around the display unit (here, the display screen 11a) that is often the focus of the player during play.

The component surface 311 of the LED board 310, the component surface 321 of the LED board 320, and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 are each formed with a curved shape when viewed from the front. That is, the upper edge 312a and the lower edge 312b of the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 are generally curved, and the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 is generally curved to the right as it extends upward. Furthermore, the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 is generally curved to the left as it extends upward. Note that the curved shapes of the component surfaces are not limited to the shapes of the component surfaces 311, 321, and 331 described above. For example, LED substrates with curved component surfaces include those in which a bent portion 303 or curved portion 304 is formed on part of the side edge of the component surface 302, such as LED substrate 301 shown in Figure 60(A), and those in which the component surface 307 is bent overall at one or more positions, such as LED substrate 306 shown in Figure 60(B).

Mounted on each of the component surfaces 311 of the LED board 310, 311 of the LED board 320, and 331 of the LED board 330 are a plurality of light-emitting components 340 (only some of which are numbered). As shown in FIG. 61, the light-emitting components 340 are surface-mounted PLCC (framed) LED devices having a rectangular parallelepiped lamp house (frame) 341, a lead frame (electrodes) 342 attached to the lamp house 341, and three light-emitting elements installed in a cylindrical recess 343 formed in the lamp house 341. The three light-emitting elements consist of a red LED element 344R, a green LED element 344G, and a blue LED element 344B, and are connected to the lead frame 342 by bonding wires (not shown). Resin is injected into the recess 343 of the lamp house 341 to seal the three light-emitting elements.

In the light-emitting component 340, as shown in FIG. 61, three light-emitting elements (red LED element 344R, green LED element 344G, and blue LED element 344B) are positioned in the shape of an equilateral triangle, and are arranged clockwise from the red LED element 344R, followed by the blue LED element 344B and the green LED element 344G. In this manner, the relative positions of the three light-emitting elements are determined. However, the arrangement of the three light-emitting elements is not limited to this. For example, the three light-emitting elements (red LED element 344R, green LED element 344G, and blue LED element 344B) may be arranged in a straight line, as in the light-emitting component 340A shown in FIG. 62(A), or the three light-emitting elements (red LED element 344R, green LED element 344G, and blue LED element 344B) may be arranged in an L-shape, as in the light-emitting component 340B shown in FIG. 62(B). Furthermore, the arrangement of the red LED elements 344R, green LED elements 344G, and blue LED elements 344B may be different from that shown in the illustrated example (for example, in the illustrated example, the positions of the red LED elements 344R and green LED elements 344G may be swapped, or the positions of the green LED elements 344G and blue LED elements 344B may be swapped).

Although the description has been given here using a surface-mounted PLCC-type LED device as an example, other types of LED devices may also be used, such as a surface-mounted PCB (circuit board) type LED device or a pin-insertion (vertical) type LED device. Also, in addition to the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements that constitute the three primary colors of light, an LED device having light-emitting elements of other colors (for example, white or yellow) may also be used.

(Installation position of light-emitting component and direction of red LED element)
Each light-emitting component 340 mounted on the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 is installed in the same orientation. Furthermore, each light-emitting component 340 mounted on the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 is also installed in the same orientation, and each light-emitting component 340 mounted on the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 is also installed in the same orientation. Specifically, on the component surface 311 of the LED board 310 arranged above the display screen 11a, as shown in FIG. 63(A), each light-emitting component 340 is installed in the same orientation (the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a) with the red LED element 344R facing downward (toward the display screen 11a). The four arrows in FIG. 63(A) indicate the up, down, left, and right directions relative to the component surface 311 when the LED board 310 is installed in the slot machine SM.

Furthermore, on the component surface 321 of the LED board 320 located to the left of the display screen 11a, as shown in Figure 63(B), each light-emitting component 340 is installed in the same orientation (the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a) with the red LED element 344R facing to the right (toward the display screen 11a). Furthermore, on the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 located to the right of the display screen 11a, as shown in Figure 63(C), each light-emitting component 340 is installed in the orientation (the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a) with the red LED element 344R facing to the left (toward the display screen 11a). The four arrows in Figure 63(B) indicate the up, down, left, and right directions relative to the component surface 321 when the LED board 320 is installed in the slot machine SM, and the four arrows in Figure 63(C) indicate the up, down, left, and right directions relative to the component surface 331 when the LED board 330 is installed in the slot machine SM.

In this way, by aligning the light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of a single LED board in the same orientation, the light emitted by each light-emitting component can be made uniform, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect of the illumination provided by each light-emitting component. On the other hand, if the light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of a single LED board are mounted in different orientations, there is a risk that the light emitted by each light-emitting component will vary, reducing the dramatic effect, especially when all light-emitting components are illuminated with the same color at the same time. While it is preferable to align all light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of a single LED board in the same orientation, some light-emitting components may be installed in different orientations. It is preferable that 70% or 80% or more of all light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of a single LED board be installed in the same orientation, but a certain degree of effectiveness can be achieved if 50% or more of the light-emitting components are installed in the same orientation. The same applies to the effect of the orientation of the red LED element 344R, as described below.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, by positioning each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a, the following effect can be achieved. The red light emitted by the red LED element 344R has a longer wavelength than green or blue light, making it easier for it to reach the human eye. Red is also a color that attracts people's attention and stands out. On the other hand, the display screen 11a is often the focus of players during play. Therefore, by positioning each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED element 344R faces the display screen 11a, the red light can more easily reach the eyes of players looking at the display screen 11a. This visually enhances the brightness of the light-emitting components 340, thereby enhancing the dramatic effects of the lighting.

In the light-emitting component 340, the orientation in which the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a preferably refers to an orientation in which the red LED element 344R is positioned closest to the display screen 11a relative to the green LED element 344G and the blue LED element 344B (as shown in FIGS. 63A to 63C ), but is not limited thereto. For example, consider a case in which the light-emitting component 340 is installed in the orientation shown in FIG. 64A . Assume that the display screen 11a is positioned to the right. In this orientation, the green LED element 344G is positioned to the right (closer to the display screen 11a) than the red LED element 344R. However, if an imaginary line L11 is set to bisect the light-emitting component 340 in the left-right direction, the red LED element 344R is positioned in an area to the right of this imaginary line L11, and in this respect, it can be said to face the display screen 11a. Therefore, the posture of the light emitting component 340 is also set so that the red LED element 344R is biased toward the display screen 11a (to the right).

Similarly, consider the case where the light-emitting component 340 is installed in the orientation shown in Figure 64 (B). In this case, the display screen 11a is positioned downward. In this orientation, the blue LED element 344B is located lower (closer to the display screen 11a) than the red LED element 344R. However, if an imaginary line L12 is set that vertically bisects the light-emitting component 340, the red LED element 344R is located in the area below this imaginary line L11, and in that respect, it can be said to be facing the display screen 11a. Therefore, in this orientation of the light-emitting component 340, the red LED element 344R is also biased toward the display screen 11a (downward).

(Installation density of light-emitting components)
As shown in Fig. 59 , the component surface 311 of the LED substrate 310 is divided into two regions, region AR1 and region AR2. Region AR1 is located lower and closer to the display screen 11a than region AR2. Region AR1 is located relatively closer to the display screen 11a (e.g., from the center of the display screen 11a), and the installation density (number of light-emitting components 340 installed per unit area) of the light-emitting components 340 is set to be higher in region AR1, which is located relatively closer to the display screen 11a, than in region AR2, which is located relatively farther from the display screen 11a (e.g., from the center of the display screen 11a). That is, the light-emitting components 340 are installed such that the arrangement pitch (the distance between adjacent light-emitting components 340) of the plurality of light-emitting components 340 in region AR1 is shorter than the arrangement pitch of the plurality of light-emitting components 340 in region AR2.

In this way, by setting the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 higher in area AR1, which is relatively close to the display screen 11a, than in area AR2, which is relatively far from the display screen 11a, the following effects can be achieved. That is, by increasing the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 in area AR1, the light intensity per unit area from each light-emitting component 340 in area AR1 can be increased. Furthermore, because area AR1 is closer to the display screen 11a than area AR2, light from the light-emitting components 340 in area AR1 is more likely to reach the eyes of a player looking at the display screen 11a. Therefore, by increasing the light intensity per unit area from each light-emitting component 340 in area AR1, it is possible to enhance the dramatic effects of the lighting.

The component surface 321 of the LED substrate 320 and the component surface 331 of the LED substrate 330 are configured in the same manner with respect to the installation density of the light-emitting components 340, and the same effect can be obtained. That is, as shown in FIG. 59 , the component surface 321 of the LED substrate 320 is divided into five regions, regions AR11 to R15. Region AR11 is located on the right side closer to the display screen 11a than region AR12, and the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is set higher in region AR11 than in region AR12. Region AR14 is located diagonally lower right closer to the display screen 11a than region AR15, and region AR13 is located diagonally lower right closer to the display screen 11a than region AR14. The installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is higher in region AR14 than in region AR15, and higher in region AR13 than in region AR14.
is set higher.

Similarly, the component surface 331 of the LED board 330 is divided into five regions, regions AR21 to AR25. Region AR21 is located on the left side, closer to the display screen 11a than region AR22, and the installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is set higher in region AR21 than in region AR22. Region AR24 is located diagonally lower left, closer to the display screen 11a than region AR25, and region AR13 is located diagonally lower left, closer to the display screen 11a than region AR14. The installation density of the light-emitting components 340 is set higher in region AR24 than in region AR25, and higher in region AR23 than in region AR24.

(Red LED elements should not be placed close to each other)
On the component surface 311 of the LED board 310, the component surface 321 of the LED board 320, and the component surface 331 of the LED board 330, the light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other. Here, the state in which the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other means that, of the two light-emitting components arranged closest to each other on the component surface of one LED board, two light-emitting components are arranged so that an LED element of a color other than red (a green LED element 344G or a blue LED element 344B) is located between the red LED element 344R of one light-emitting component and the red LED element 344R of the other light-emitting component. This point will be described in detail below.

For example, in region AR1 of component surface 311, the two light-emitting components 340 that are positioned closest to each other in the horizontal direction are arranged as shown in FIG. 65(A). In this case, between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure (more specifically, within the region between the two red LED elements 344R and within the vertical width of the two light-emitting components 340 (the rectangular region enclosed by the two-dot chain line in the figure)), the green LED element 344G of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the blue LED element 344B of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure are located. Therefore, the two light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that their red LED elements 344R are not close to each other.

As another example, in region AR11 of component surface 321, the two light-emitting components 340 that are arranged closest to each other in the vertical direction are arranged as shown in FIG. 65(B). In this case, between the red LED element 344R of the upper light-emitting component 340 in the figure and the red LED element 344R of the lower light-emitting component 340 in the figure (more specifically, within the region between the two red LED elements 344R and within the horizontal width of the two light-emitting components 340 (the rectangular region surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure)), the blue LED element 344B of the upper light-emitting component 340 in the figure and the green LED element 344G of the lower light-emitting component 340 in the figure are located. Therefore, the two light-emitting components 340 are arranged so that their red LED elements 344R are not close to each other.

Note that if there is no LED element of a color other than red between the red LED element 344R of one of two light-emitting components that are arranged closest to each other on the component surface of an LED board, then the red LED elements 344R of those two light-emitting components are arranged so that their respective red LED elements 344R are close to each other.

For example, consider a case where two light-emitting components 340 that are arranged closest to each other in the horizontal direction on the component surface of a single LED board are arranged as shown in Fig. 66(A). In this case, neither the green LED element 344G nor the blue LED element 344B is located between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure (within the region between the two red LED elements 344R and within the vertical width of the two light-emitting components 340 (the rectangular region surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure)). Therefore, the red LED elements 344R of these two light-emitting components 340 are arranged close to each other.

Note that between two light-emitting components 340 arranged as shown in FIG. 66(A), another light-emitting component 340 may be arranged, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(B). In this case, the green LED element 344G and blue LED element 344B of the light-emitting component 340 on the lower side of the figure will be located between the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the left side of the figure and the red LED element 344R of the light-emitting component 340 on the right side of the figure (within the rectangular area surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure). This eliminates the situation where the red LED elements 344R are arranged close to each other.

As described above, by arranging each light-emitting component 340 so that the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other, the following effect can be achieved. That is, as previously mentioned, the red color emitted by the red LED elements 344R is a conspicuous color that attracts people's attention. Therefore, if the red LED elements 344R are close to each other, the red color may be biased in such close areas, causing visual color unevenness. By ensuring that the red LED elements 344R are not close to each other, it is possible to eliminate partial red bias and make the color uniform, thereby enhancing the lighting's dramatic effect.

It is preferable that all light-emitting components mounted on the component surface of an LED board are installed so that their red LED elements are not in close proximity to each other, but some light-emitting components may be installed so that their red LED elements are in close proximity to each other. It is preferable that 70% or 80% or more of all light-emitting components installed on the component surface of an LED board are installed so that their red LED elements are not in close proximity to each other, but a certain degree of effectiveness can be achieved if 50% or more of the light-emitting components are installed so that their red LED elements are not in close proximity to each other.

Here, we have explained the characteristic configurations related to the shape of the LED boards and the arrangement of the mounted light-emitting components using the LED board 310 used in the first performance lamp 12 in the slot machine SM and the LED boards 320, 330 used in the fourth performance lamps 16a, 16b, respectively, as examples, but this is not limited to this and the above-mentioned characteristic configurations can be applied to any LED board and light-emitting components. Furthermore, the above-mentioned characteristic configurations of the LED boards and light-emitting components can also be applied to any LED board and light-emitting components in the pachinko gaming machine PM.

Furthermore, while the display screen 11a of the slot machine SM has been described here as an example of a display unit, this is not limited to this, and for example, the display window W or the lower panel cover 31 may also be used as a display unit. Furthermore, the display unit may also be an area where a specific character is displayed. Examples of display units in a pachinko gaming machine PM include the play area PA, an effect image display unit provided within the play area PA, or an area where a specific character is displayed.

The LED boards and light-emitting components described above can be applied not only to slot machines, but also to performance lamps and decorative lamps in pachinko gaming machines. An example of an applicable pachinko gaming machine is shown below.

<<Outline of the Pachinko Machine PM>>
Figures 67 and 68 show the schematic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine PM to which the above-mentioned LED board and light-emitting components can be applied. For convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in Figure 67 will be referred to as the front-to-back direction, the left-to-right direction, and the up-to-down direction, respectively. As shown in Figure 67, the pachinko gaming machine PM has an outer frame 401, which is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame having a rectangular outer frame size. A front frame 402, which is a mounting frame having a rectangular size matching the outer frame 401, is attached to the front of the opening of the outer frame 401 so as to be able to open and close laterally and be detachable by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403 disposed on the left front edge of the outer frame 401. The front frame 402 is always kept in a closed state, engaged with the outer frame 401, by a locking device 404 called a double lock disposed on the right front edge.

A square glass frame 405, which fits the upper front area of the front frame 402, is attached to the front frame 402 using upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached, and is kept closed at all times by using a locking device 404. A game board 410 is removably set and held in the front frame 402, and the game area PA in front of the game board 410 can be seen through the double-pane glass 405a of the glass frame 405, which is always kept closed.

The lower part of the glass frame 405 is provided with upper and lower ball trays (upper ball tray 406a and lower ball tray 406b) for storing game balls, and a launch handle 407 for launching the game balls is provided on the front right side of the lower ball tray 406b. On the front side of the glass frame 405 are an illuminated lamp 408 equipped with light-emitting elements such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and a speaker 409 that generates sound effects according to the progress of the game.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted in Figure 67, the gaming board 410 has a base made of a decorative board formed by attaching cells printed with a predetermined design to a rectangular laminated plywood that has been processed using a router, etc., and a roughly circular gaming area PA is formed surrounded by upper and lower rail decorations. The gaming area PA is provided with gaming components (all not shown), such as numerous gaming pegs, a windmill, a central decoration, an effect image display unit that displays predetermined images depending on the progress of the game, and various winning holes, and at the bottom end of the gaming area PA, an outlet (not shown) is formed that penetrates the gaming board 410 from front to back, allowing gaming balls that fall without falling into the winning holes to be ejected to the back side.

As shown in Figure 68, on the rear side of the front frame 402, a back set board 430 is based on a rectangular base frame that is slightly smaller than the front frame 402 and has a central window that connects the front and rear. The back set board 430 is connected to the rear of the front frame 402 via upper and lower hinge mechanisms 403 so that it can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached. A back set cover 430C, which is a rectangular box with an open front, is detachably attached to this back set board 430 and is always positioned to cover the back side of the game board 410 attached to the front frame 402.

The rear set board 430 is provided with various components, including a ball storage tank 431 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 432 that extends gently downward from the ball storage tank 431 to the right, a ball supply passage member 433 that connects to the right end of the tank rail 432 and extends downward, a prize ball payout unit 434 that pays out game balls guided by the ball supply passage member 433, and a prize ball passage member 435 that guides game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 434 to the upper ball tray 406.

On the rear side of the game board 410, a main control board case unit CU1 containing a main control board (not shown) that comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM, and a presentation control board case unit CU2 containing a presentation control board (not shown) that controls the overall presentation, such as image display, lighting effects, and sound effects, according to the game development, are attached so as to be covered by a back set cover 430C. On the other hand, on the rear side of the back set board 430, a payout control board case unit CU3 containing a payout control board (not shown) that controls the launch and payout of game balls, and a power supply board case unit CU4 containing a power supply board (not shown) that receives power from the gaming facility and supplies power to various control boards and electrical and electronic components are attached. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected by harnesses (connector cables), configuring the pachinko gaming machine PM to be operational.

The pachinko gaming machine PM is played with the outer frame 401 fixed to the gaming island (installation frame base) of the gaming facility, and the front frame 402, glass frame 405, etc. closed and locked. Play begins by storing gaming balls in the upper ball tray 406a and rotating the launch handle 407. When the launch handle 407 is rotated, the gaming balls stored in the upper ball tray 406a are sent one by one to the launch mechanism by a ball feed mechanism located on the back side of the glass frame 405, and the balls are then shot into the playing area PA by the launch mechanism, and the pachinko game then unfolds.

<Board case unit>
Next, the board case unit 500 shown in these figures will be described with reference to Figures 69 to 77. For convenience in the following description, the board case unit 500 will be described as corresponding to the main control board case unit CU1 (see Figure 68) of the pachinko gaming machine PM, but is not limited to this. For convenience in the following description, the front, back, left, right, up, and down directions are defined as directions when the board case unit 500 is attached to the pachinko gaming machine PM, based on the state in Figure 69, and the directions of the arrows shown in Figure 69 will be referred to as front, back, left, right, up, and down, respectively.

The main control board case unit 500 is mainly composed of a main control board 510, which is responsible for the central control of the pachinko gaming machine PM, and a board case 560 in the shape of a roughly rectangular container that houses the main control board 510.

The main control board 510 is constructed as a rectangular printed wiring board, and as shown in Figure 70, a CPU 520, a setting change unit 530, a setting value display monitor 540, a performance display monitor 550, and multiple connectors (only connectors CN1 to CN5 are numbered in the figure) are mounted on its component side (also called the "mounting side") 511. Although not shown in detail, electronic devices such as ROM and RAM, as well as electronic and electrical components such as resistors, are also mounted on this component side 511. The CPU 520 is positioned on the component side 511 so that its long side is aligned with the long side of the main control board 510 (the left-right direction in Figure 69). The main control board 510 has screw insertion holes 512a-512d at its four corners, and is fixed to the inner surface of the board case 560 (top case 565, described below) by screws (see screw 513 shown in Figure 77) inserted into each of the screw insertion holes 512a-512d.

As shown in FIG. 70, the setting change unit 530 is composed of a setting key switch 531 and a setting change switch 536. The setting key switch 531 is a switch operated to confirm or change the setting of a setting value that determines the player's advantage, for example, the degree (rank) of the probability of winning in a predetermined lottery that affects the payout rate, such as a lottery for a special symbol. The setting change switch 536 is a switch for changing the setting value in multiple stages (six stages in this embodiment). The setting key switch 531 has a setting change key cylinder 532 that can be rotated by inserting a setting change key (not shown) held by the gaming store clerk. The setting key switch 531 is configured to be switched by rotating this setting change key cylinder 532. The setting change switch 536 has a setting change button 537 that can be pressed by the gaming store clerk and is configured to be switched by pressing this setting change button 537. The setting change unit 530 (setting key switch 531, setting change switch 536) may be provided on a board other than the main control board 510, or may be provided in a location other than the board.

When power is supplied to the main control board 510 while the setting change key is inserted into the setting change key cylinder 532 and rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise (as viewed from the rear) (also referred to as the "setting change key operation direction"), and while the setting change switch 536 is in the on state (the setting change button 537 is pressed), the setting change unit 530 enters setting change mode (a mode in which the setting value can be changed). In this setting change mode, the setting value is switched between six levels (1 through 6) each time the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed, and the switched setting value is displayed on the setting value display monitor 540. When the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting value is confirmed, the setting change mode is terminated, and the game transitions to normal mode (a mode in which gameplay is possible and the setting value display monitor 540 is unlit). In addition to the above conditions, a condition for activating the setting change mode may be that the front frame 402 is open relative to the outer frame 401 (also referred to as the "front frame open state"). Furthermore, if the front frame is not in the open state, the transition from setting change mode to normal mode may not be possible. When transitioning from setting change mode to normal mode, a setting change sound is output from a specified speaker to notify that the setting change has been completed.

The setting change switch 536 in the setting change unit 600 is also configured to function as a RAM clear switch. That is, when the power is turned on while the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) is pressed to start the setting change mode, the main control board 510 clears at least the information related to the game state (normal state, special probability state, time-saving state, latent special probability state, etc.) from all information stored in RAM. At this time, the setting value is updated to the setting value with the lowest payout rate (e.g., setting 1). Instead of using the setting change switch 536 as a RAM clear switch, a dedicated RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) may be provided separately. In this case, the setting change mode may be activated when power is supplied while the dedicated RAM clear switch is in the on state. The setting value may also be configured to have only one setting (e.g., setting 1). In this case, pressing the setting change switch 536 (setting change button 537) will not update the setting value (e.g., it will remain at setting 1).

Furthermore, when power is supplied to the setting change unit 530 while the main control board 510 is not receiving power and the setting change key cylinder 532 is inserted and rotated approximately 90 degrees in the setting change key operation direction (but the setting change switch 536 is off), the setting change unit 530 enters setting confirmation mode (a mode in which the setting value can be confirmed) and displays the current setting value on the setting value display monitor 540. When the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting confirmation mode ends and the unit transitions to normal mode. In addition to the above conditions, a front frame open state may be added as a condition for activating the setting confirmation mode. In the pachinko gaming machine PM, even if the setting change key cylinder 532 is rotated with the setting change key and the setting key switch 531 is turned on after power is supplied, the unit does not transition to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display monitor 540.

The base case 560 is composed of a bottom case 561 that is detachably attached to the back of the game board 20, and a top case 565 that is detachably attached to the bottom case 561. An engagement connection mechanism 570 is provided on the right edge of the case, which is aligned front to back when the top case 565 is attached to the bottom case 561 and closed. The bottom case 561 and top case 565 are combined and integrated in a closed state with their openings facing each other. Both the bottom case 561 and top case 565 are formed by molding means such as injection molding using a colorless, transparent resin material (e.g., polycarbonate), and are configured so that the inside of the base case 560 can be seen from the outside.

The bottom case 561 is generally formed in the shape of a rectangular box with an open rear, while the top case 565 is generally formed in the shape of a rectangular box with an open front. The top case 565 is configured to be slidably mounted on the bottom case 561 in the left-right direction. That is, the top case 565 is slightly offset to the left relative to the bottom case 561, and the two cases 561, 565 are combined while facing each other in the front-to-back direction. By sliding the top case 565 to the right (hereinafter also referred to as the "closing direction"), the bottom case 561 and top case 565 can be integrated in a closed state with their openings facing each other. On the other hand, the integrated cases 561, 565 can be separated by sliding the top case 565 a predetermined distance to the left relative to the bottom case 561 (hereinafter also referred to as the "opening direction").

The engagement and connection mechanism 570 further engages and connects the integrated bottom case 561 and top case 565 to each other using a crimping member 575, thereby restricting the top case 565 from sliding in the opening direction relative to the bottom case 561. Specifically, the engagement and connection mechanism 570 is comprised of a bottom-side locking portion 571 (see Figure 71) provided on the right edge of the bottom case 561, a top-side locking portion 573 (see Figure 72) provided on the right edge of the top case 565, and a crimping member 575 (see Figure 69) for engaging and connecting the bottom-side locking portion 571 and the top-side locking portion 573.

The bottom-side locking portion 571 has a bottom-side locking hole (not shown) that opens toward the rear, and the top-side locking portion 573 has upper and lower top-side locking holes 573a (see Figure 69) that penetrate from front to back and are aligned with the bottom-side locking hole from front to back. The crimping member 575 has a shaft 575a that extends front to back, a disk-shaped operating portion 575b with a larger diameter than the shaft 575a, and a cylindrical locking pin 575c that is mounted in a pin receiving hole (not shown) recessed in the shaft 575b and supported so that it can move back and forth in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the shaft 575a. The tip of the locking pin 575c is biased by the repulsive force of a spring (not shown) mounted in the pin receiving hole so that it protrudes outward from the shaft 575a.

In the engagement and connection mechanism 570 configured as described above, when the bottom case 561 and top case 565 are integrated in a closed state, the bottom-side locking portion 571 and top-side locking portion 573 overlap, facing each other from the front to the back. In this state, the shaft 575a of the crimping member 575 is inserted so as to straddle the bottom-side locking hole and the top-side locking hole 573a, and the crimping member 575 is engaged and connected to the bottom-side locking portion 571 and the top-side locking portion 573, so that the top case 565 is closed relative to the bottom case 561 and cannot be removed (opened).

The top case 565 is formed with connector insertion/removal openings (not shown) that run through the front and back to correspond to the mounting positions of each connector (including connectors CN1 to CN5) on the main control board 510. When the main control board 510 is attached to the top case 565, each connector on the main control board 510 is exposed to the outside through the connector insertion/removal openings (see Figure 69), and can be electrically connected to the performance control board, image control board, payout control board, etc. via harnesses (connector cables).

The top case 565 also has a setting change unit access port (not shown) that penetrates from front to back and corresponds to the mounting position of the setting change unit 530 (the setting key switch 531 and the setting change switch 536) on the main control board 510. When the main control board 510 is attached to the top case 565, the setting change unit 530 is exposed to the outside through the setting change unit access port (see FIG. 69). A small door 567 (see FIG. 72) that covers the setting change unit 530 facing rearward from the setting change unit access port is attached to the top case 565 so as to be able to swing open and closed (not shown in FIG. 69). When the setting change unit 530 (the setting key switch 531 and the setting change switch 536) is operated, the small door 567 is swung upward to expose the setting change unit 530.

The board case unit 500 configured as described above, with the main control board 510 housed within the board case 560, is attached to the back side of the game board 420 with the bottom case 561 facing forward and the top case 565 facing rearward. When the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, the right edge of the board case 560 (the left and right side edges of the board case 560 on which the engagement coupling mechanism 570 is provided) is located on the open end side edge of the front frame 402 (the left and right side edges of the front frame 402 on which the front frame 402 opens, opposite the left and right side edges on which the hinge mechanisms 403a, 403b are provided).

(Differences in the configuration of 7-segment LEDs)
As shown in Fig. 73, the above-mentioned setting value display monitor 540 is composed of a single-digit LED indicator light (a seven-segment LED with a dot) 541. This LED indicator light 541 is composed of seven rod-shaped LED segments arranged in a figure-eight shape and one dot-shaped LED segment formed in a dot point shape. Each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 is configured to light up in red and to appear red even when not lit (off). For example, a red LED element is used as the light-emitting element of each LED segment, and the cover member (lamp cover) and diffusion sheet covering the LED element are made of a red translucent material.

Note that the red color of an LED segment in a lit state and the red color of an LED segment in a non-lit state are not necessarily the same color. Specifically, for example, when representing colors using the 256-level RGB color system, if the red color of an LED segment in a lit state is (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0), the red color of an LED segment in a non-lit state is not necessarily (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0). For example, if the R component is 200 or greater and the G and B components are 100 or less, specific examples such as (R, G, B) = (237, 26, 61) or (R, G, B) = (241, 91, 91) are also considered to be red. Note that the color of an LED segment in a non-lit state is the color that the non-lit LED segment is illuminated with white light (including the light from indoor lighting in an amusement arcade). In addition, taking into consideration the exact color difference, in the following description, the color of the LED segments in the lit state will be referred to as "red," and the color of the LED segments in the unlit state will also be referred to as "reddish colors."

Figure 73(A) shows the case where all LED segments of the LED indicator light 541 are in an unlit state, while Figure 73(B) shows the case where all LED segments of the LED indicator light 541 are in an lit state. Figure 73(C) shows the lit/unlit state of each LED segment when the LED indicator light 541 displays the number "6." For convenience, in these figures, lit LED segments are shown in black (actually red) and unlit LED segments in gray (actually reddish) to distinguish between the two. Red is a striking color that attracts attention and has high visibility. Therefore, by configuring each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 to light up in red, it is possible to increase the visibility of the LED indicator light 541 in an lit state. Furthermore, the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 is configured so that each LED segment appears red (or a reddish color) even in an unlit state, making it highly visible and easy to notice even in an unlit state.

On the other hand, the performance display monitor 550 is composed of four-digit LED indicator lights (seven-segment LEDs with dots) 551 to 554, as shown in FIG.
LED indicators 551-554 are composed of seven bar-shaped LED segments arranged in a figure-eight pattern and one dot-shaped LED segment. Each of the eight LED indicators 551-554 can selectively illuminate its eight LED segments to display numbers 0-9, alphabetic characters, hyphens, and other characters. The LED indicators 551 and 552, which represent the top two digits, display an identification symbol (e.g., "bL.") that identifies the type of gaming performance data for the pachinko machine PM. Meanwhile, the LED indicators 553 and 554, which represent the bottom two digits, display a numerical value (calculated value "00" to "99") indicating the calculation result of the gaming performance data. Furthermore, each of the LED indicators 551-554 flashes when the number of samples (accumulated number of balls played) for that count data has not reached a preset number, and lights up when the number of samples has reached the preset number. Furthermore, the LED indicator lights 551 to 554 of the performance display monitor 550 are configured to blink all LED segments, including the dot-shaped LED segments, for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) after power is turned on. This is provided as a test pattern to visually check whether all LED segments are lit. The blinking is performed in a pattern in which the lights alternate between on and off at predetermined intervals (e.g., 0.3 seconds ±10% tolerance; a time in the range of 0.297 seconds to 0.33 seconds) according to the interval at which the interrupt process is executed.

Each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551-554 in the performance display monitor 550 is configured to light up in red (for example, (R, G, B) = (255, 0, 0)) and to appear whitish when unlit (off). For example, red LED elements are used as the light-emitting elements of each LED segment, and the cover member (lamp cover) and diffusion sheet covering the LED elements are made of a whitish translucent material. Note that a whitish color basically refers to an achromatic, relatively bright (e.g., brightness of 7 or higher) color containing equal and uniform R, G, and B components, such as a white (R, G, B) = (255, 255, 255) or a milky white (R, G, B) = (243, 243, 243). However, a color in which the proportions of the R, G, and B components differ by approximately 10%, such as (R, G, B) = (250, 240, 230), is also considered a whitish color. Red is a conspicuous color that attracts people's attention and has high visibility. Therefore, by configuring each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 to light red, it is possible to improve the visibility of each LED indicator light 551-554 when it is lit. On the other hand, whitish colors are less conspicuous than red (reddish colors) and have low visibility. For this reason, the setting value display monitor 540 is designed so that each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551-554 appears whitish when not lit, making it less visible and less noticeable when not lit.

Figure 74(A) shows the case where all LED segments of LED indicator lights 551-554 are in an unlit state, while Figure 74(B) shows the case where all LED segments of LED indicator lights 551-554 are in an lit state. Figure 74(C) shows the lit/unlit state of each LED segment when LED indicator lights 551-554 display "bL.53". For convenience, in these figures, lit LED segments are shown in black (actually red) and unlit LED segments in white (actually a whitish color) to distinguish between the two.

Both the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 have LED segments that light up red (or flash red) when illuminated, making them equally visible when unilluminated. Meanwhile, the LED segments of the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 are configured to appear reddish even when unilluminated, while the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 are configured to appear whitish when unilluminated, making it easy to distinguish between them when unilluminated. Furthermore, since the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may flash when illuminated, each LED segment is configured to appear whitish when unilluminated and red when illuminated, making it easy to distinguish between the LED segments that light up intermittently during flashing and the LED segments that are off. In contrast, the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 does not flash when illuminated.

In addition, the cover materials for each LED segment of the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 may be made of a whitish-colored translucent material to make them relatively inconspicuous, so that they appear whitish when unlit, and the cover materials for each LED segment of the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be made of a reddish-colored translucent material to make them relatively conspicuous, so that they appear reddish when unlit. In this case, the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 are easier to see in the unlit state than the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540. Furthermore, because the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 are lit or flashing more often than the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540, the LED indicator lights 551-554 (LED elements) of the performance display monitor 550 are more susceptible to deterioration over time. However, even if the light emission intensity of the LED indicator lights 551-554 decreases due to aging or other factors, causing the red color to weaken, this can be compensated for by the red color of the cover members of each LED segment. Note that both the LED segments of the LED indicator light 541 of the setting value display monitor 540 and the LED segments of the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to appear reddish or white when not lit.

When the setting value display monitor 540 is powered on under specified circumstances, it remains in an unlit state and does not light up. Meanwhile, the performance display monitor 550 transitions from an unlit state to an lit or flashing state even when powered on under the same specified circumstances. "Powering on under specified circumstances" refers to a state in which the power is turned on without any special processing or operation. For example, power is turned on without the key switch 531 of the setting change unit 530 being rotated (also referred to as "normal power-on"), or power is turned on after the power is turned off in an error state and the key switch 531 is not rotated (in this case, an error state occurs after power-on). However, in the event of an irreversible error state, the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550, which are inconspicuous when unlit, can be made to stand out immediately after power-on by transitioning from an unlit state to an lit or flashing state when power is turned on under specified circumstances. The LED indicators 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to light or blink even when an error occurs or when settings are being changed. However, the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to turn off when an error occurs that makes it impossible to recover from the error state.

The LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 is larger than the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 (see Figure 70), which also makes it more visible and noticeable than the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550. The LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to be the same size, or the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may be configured to be larger than the LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540. The LED indicator light 541 of the set value display monitor 540 and/or the LED indicator lights 551-554 of the performance display monitor 550 may also be configured as 7-segment LEDs without dots.

Here, the differences in the configuration of the LED indicator lights (7-segment LEDs) have been described using the setting value display monitor 540 and the performance display monitor 550 in the pachinko gaming machine PM as examples. However, this is not limited to this; when any different 7-segment LEDs are used, the differences in the configurations described above can be applied to the multiple LED indicator lights used in the slot machine 1. For example, the main control board 60 of the slot machine 1 may be provided with a display monitor with a configuration similar to the performance display monitor 550 (e.g., a bonus feature ratio display monitor that displays bonus feature ratios) or a setting value display monitor with a configuration similar to the setting value display monitor 540, and these display monitors may have the differences in the configuration of the 7-segment LEDs described above. Furthermore, the differences in the configuration of the 7-segment LEDs described above may be applied to the stored coin count display lamp 46h and the payout number display lamp 46j.

(Colored caulking parts)
As described above, the right edge of the circuit board case 560 is provided with an engagement and coupling mechanism 570 (see FIG. 69 ), and the engagement and coupling mechanism 570 is provided with a crimping member 575. In this embodiment, the crimping member 575 is made of a colored member (a colored member). A colored member refers to a member whose surface is colored or plated, or a member made of a colored material. Any material, such as resin, wood, or metal, can be used to form the colored member. Note that colored refers to a state in which any color is present, excluding a colorless and transparent state, and includes achromatic colors such as white, gray, and black. If the member is colored, it may be transparent (colored and transparent) or opaque.

By constructing the crimping member 575 from a colored member, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the gaming board 420, if someone tries to look into the inside of the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72, the line of sight is blocked by the colored crimping member 575, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if the front frame 402 is opened slightly and someone looks into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine PM from the edge of the open end, it becomes difficult to see inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, making it more difficult to commit fraud against the board case 560. Furthermore, removal and/or attachment of the board case unit 500 from the rear of the game board 420 (for example, a bracket member (not shown) provided on the rear of the game board 420 to hold the board case unit 500) may be performed from a side edge (upper edge, left edge, or lower edge) other than the right edge of the board case 560, or may be performed from the right edge of the board case 560.

As shown in FIG. 72, the crimping member 575 is configured so that the diameter (diameter) D of the shaft portion 575a of the crimping member 575 is longer than the width W of the short side of the CPU 520 (the vertical direction of the CPU 520 in FIG. 72). Furthermore, when the component surface 511 of the main control board 510 is used as the reference plane for height (the front-to-rear position in FIG. 69), as shown in FIG. 75, the height H12 of the crimping member 575 from the component surface 511 is greater than the height H11 of the CPU 520 from the component surface 511. Furthermore, the crimping member 575 located lower than the CPU 520 mounted on the main control board 510 is positioned so that they are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction (on the same imaginary straight line extending in the left-right direction), as shown in FIG. In other words, when viewing the board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72, the CPU 520 is positioned so that it is hidden behind the crimping member 575. Therefore, if the front frame 402 is opened slightly, the inside of the pachinko gaming machine PM is peered into from the edge of the open end, and an attempt is made to view the inside of the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, the CPU 520 is hidden behind the crimping member 575 and cannot be seen. This makes it difficult to commit fraud targeting the CPU 520 inside the board case 560.

Here, the description has been given using the crimping member 575 as an example of a colored member installed in the board case unit 500. However, this is not limiting, and similar effects can be achieved by placing any colored member other than the crimping member on the right edge of the board case 560. For example, a test connector mounted on the main control board 510 for electrical connection with a testing device during a type test of the pachinko gaming machine PM may be formed of a colored member, and the test connector and CPU 520 may be positioned so as to be aligned linearly in the left-right direction on the component surface 511 (e.g., between the CPU 520 and the crimping member 575 in FIG. 72). In this case, it is preferable that the width of the test connector (the vertical width in FIG. 69) is longer than the width W of the short side of the CPU 520, and that the height of the test connector from the component surface 511 of the main control board 510 is greater than the height of the CPU 520 from the component surface 511. This makes it difficult to see the CPU 520 when looking into the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, as it is hidden behind the test connector.

Furthermore, the colored member as described above may be provided on a side edge (upper edge, left edge, or lower edge) other than the right edge of the board case 560. For example, if a colored member is placed on the upper edge of the board case 560 when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, when someone tries to look inside the board case 560 from above through the upper edge of the board case 560, the colored member will block the view, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. A similar effect can be achieved by placing a colored member on the left edge or lower edge of the board case 560.

(Steps at the side edges of the board case)
As shown in Figures 69 and 72, a step portion 580 is provided on the right edge of the board case 560. This step portion 580 is formed integrally with the top case 565, and as shown in Figure 76, has three steps, namely a first step portion 581, a second step portion 582, and a third step portion 583, a first wall portion 584 connecting the first step portion 581 and the second step portion 582, a second wall portion 585 connecting the second step portion 582 and the third step portion 583, and a third wall portion 586. Figure 76(A) schematically shows the step portion 580 as viewed from the direction of arrow L in Figure 72, and Figures 76(B) and (C) schematically show the step portion 580 as viewed from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72.

Providing such a step 580 on the right edge of the board case 560 provides the following effect. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the gaming board 420 and an attempt is made to look inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72, the view inside the board case 560 is interrupted or distorted by the step 580 (mainly the second step 582 and the third step 583), reducing visibility inside the board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if the front frame 402 is opened slightly and the inside of the pachinko gaming machine PM is looked into from the open end edge, it becomes difficult to see inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560 (step 580), making it more difficult to commit fraud against the board case 560.

It is also possible to arrange a colored member such as that described above in the step portion 580. For example, a test connector such as that described above may be arranged in the step portion 580. By arranging a colored member in the step portion 580, when looking into the inside of the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, not only is the view inside the board case 560 divided or distorted by the step portion 580, but the colored member also obstructs the line of sight, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560, further reducing visibility inside the board case 560.

Here, the case where the step portion 580 is provided on the right edge of the board case 560 has been described as an example, but the above-described step portion may also be provided on a side edge (upper edge, left edge, or lower edge) other than the right edge of the board case 560. For example, if a step portion is provided on the lower edge of the board case 560 when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, when an attempt is made to look inside the board case 560 from below through the lower edge of the board case 560, the view inside the board case 560 is divided or distorted by the step portion, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. Similar effects can be obtained when the step portion is directed toward the left edge or upper edge of the board case 560.

The above-mentioned step portion 580 is formed in the top case 565, but the step portion may also be formed by the bottom case 561 and the top case 565 (for example, a step portion is formed at the boundary between the bottom case 561 and the top case 565). Alternatively, the step portion may also be formed by the engagement coupling mechanism 570 and the board case 560 (for example, a step portion is formed at the boundary between the engagement coupling mechanism 570 and the board case 560), or by the above-mentioned bracket member provided on the back of the gaming board 420 and the board case 560 (for example, a step portion is formed at the boundary between the bracket member and the board case 560).

(Colored sealing member)
As shown in FIGS. 69 and 72 , a seal member SL may be attached to the stepped portion 580. This seal member SL is composed of a strip-shaped, colored sheet-like member and, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), is attached to the right edge of the board case 560 along the stepped portion 580. A colored sheet-like member refers to a sheet-shaped member whose surface is colored or printed, or a sheet-shaped member made of a colored material. Any material, such as resin, paper, or metal foil, can be used to form the colored sheet-like member. As mentioned above, colored refers to a state of being colored, excluding a colorless and transparent state, and includes achromatic colors such as white, gray, and black. The colored member may be transparent (colored and transparent) or opaque. The seal member SL may be any seal member, such as a seal seal indicating that the board case has been sealed or an identification seal bearing a one-dimensional or two-dimensional code (identifier) representing predetermined information.

By affixing the colored seal member SL to the step portion 580 (the right edge of the board case 560), the following effect is achieved. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the gaming board 420, if someone tries to look into the inside of the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560 from the direction of arrow K in Figure 72, the line of sight is blocked by the colored seal member SL, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. Therefore, for example, even if the front frame 402 is opened slightly and someone looks into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine PM from the edge on the open end side, it becomes difficult to see inside the board case 560 through the right edge of the board case 560, making it more difficult to commit fraud against the board case 560. Furthermore, by providing the sealing member SL on the step portion 580, the synergistic effect of the sealing member SL and the step portion 580 can be achieved, which has the excellent effect of more effectively reducing visibility inside the board case 560. However, the sealing member SL may also be applied to the part of the right edge of the board case 560 where the step portion 580 is not formed.

Furthermore, the colored sealing material (sheet-like material) described above may be provided on side edges (upper edge, left edge, or lower edge) of the board case 560 other than the right edge. For example, if a colored sealing material is placed on the upper edge of the board case 560 when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the game board 420, when someone tries to look inside the board case 560 from above through the upper edge of the board case 560, the colored sealing material will block the view, making it difficult to see inside the board case 560. A similar effect can be achieved when a colored sealing material is placed on the left edge or lower edge of the board case 560.

(Board mounting screws and connectors)
As described above, main control board 510 has screw insertion holes 512a to 512d at its four corners, as shown in Figure 70, and is fixed to the inner surface of top case 565 by screws inserted through screw insertion holes 512a to 512d. Figure 77 shows the relationship between screw 513 inserted through screw insertion hole 512b and connector CN3. Of all the connectors mounted on component side 511 of main control board 510, connector CN3 is the connector located closest to screw insertion hole 512b.

As shown in Figure 77, a cylindrical screw receiving portion 566 perpendicular to the component surface 511 is formed integrally with the top case 565 on the inner surface of the top case 565 (the surface facing the component surface 511). The screw 513 penetrates from the solder surface 515 side of the main control board 510 to the component surface 511 side and is inserted into the screw insertion hole 512b. The screw 513 is attached so that it enters the interior of the screw receiving portion 566 while threading into the inner surface of the screw receiving portion 566, fixing the main control board 510 to the top case 565.

As shown in FIG. 77, when the main control board 510 is fixed to the top case 565 (the screw 513 is fixed to the screw receiving portion 566 via the main control board 510), the height of the screw 513 from the component surface 511 (the length of the portion of the screw 513 protruding from the component surface 511) is defined as H1. Furthermore, the height of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3 from the component surface 511 is defined as H2, and the height of the connector CN3 from the component surface 511 (the height of the housing surrounding each terminal pin PN) is defined as H3. In this case, the height H1 of the screw 513 is configured to be higher than the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3, but lower than the height H3 of the connector CN3.

By setting the height H1 of the screw 513, the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3, and the height H3 of the connector CN3 in this way, the following effect can be achieved. That is, when the board case unit 500 is attached to the back side of the gaming board 420 and an attempt is made to insert a cheating device (e.g., a rod-shaped device) used for cheating into the board case 560 in order to commit a cheating act on the main control board 510, the height H1 of the screw 513 is higher than the height H2 of each terminal pin PN of the connector CN3, and therefore the screw 513 can block the cheating device from coming into contact with or impacting the terminal pin PN.

On the other hand, if an unauthorized device is inserted into the circuit board case 560 and an impact is applied to the screw 513 in an attempt to damage it, the height H3 of the connector CN3 is greater than the height H1 of the screw 513, so the connector CN3 can block and prevent the unauthorized device from impacting the screw 513, or the connector CN3 can mitigate the impact. This makes it difficult for the screw 513 (and screw receiver 566) to be destroyed and the main control board 510 to be removed.

Here, we have used the example of setting the height from component surface 511 for screw 513 and connector CN3 as described above, but the height can also be set in the same manner for any screw used to secure main control board 510 or any connector placed near that screw, achieving the same effect.

The characteristic configuration of the board case unit 500 (board case 560 and main control board 510) described above can be applied to other units in addition to the main control board case unit CU1 in the pachinko gaming machine PM, such as the performance control board case unit CU2, payout control board case unit CU3, and power supply board case unit CU4, and similar effects can be obtained. It can also be applied to the main control board case unit 160 and sub-control board case unit in the slot machine 1, and similar effects can be obtained.

Second Embodiment
The slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "second embodiment slot machine") will be described below with additional reference to Figures 78 to 102. Below, the characteristics of the second embodiment slot machine will be mainly described. The characteristics described below are not limited to the second embodiment slot machine, and can be combined with other embodiments. The second embodiment slot machine has a basic configuration that is common or similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes, such as the winning combination determination process and reel control process, described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the second embodiment slot machine in the same manner or with some modifications to the process content.

The following describes the characteristic configuration of the slot machine according to this embodiment.
<Basic specifications>
<Valid line>
In the slot machine of this embodiment, there is a single pay line in the shape of a mountain (inverted V) that connects the bottom of the left reel 3a, the middle of the center reel 3b, and the bottom of the right reel 3c, and this pay line becomes active when a specified number of medals are inserted. The specified number varies depending on the type of game, being two medals during CB games (described later) and three medals during other games.

<Pattern arrangement>
In this embodiment, 20 symbols are arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c as shown in Figure 78 (the "left reel,""centerreel," and "right reel" in Figure 78 represent the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively). There are nine types of symbols arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c: "red seven,""blueseven,""bar,""replay,""blank,""bell,""medal,""watermelonA," and "watermelon B." The arrows shown in Figure 78 indicate the direction in which the symbols on each reel scroll within the display window W when the reels 3a to 3c are spinning during gameplay (excluding during freeze effects).

<Types of game roles and symbol combinations>
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations that will award a player a bonus when stopped on a pay line on each of the reels 3a to 3c are set as shown in Figures 79 to 82. Here, Figure 79(a) shows the bonus symbol combinations, Figure 79(b) shows the replay symbol combinations, and Figures 80 to 82 show the minor combinations.

(Bonus symbol combination)
In this embodiment, three groups of symbol combinations of 2 types BB01 to BB03 are defined, with the group of symbol combinations of 2 types BB01 consisting of four symbol combinations, and the group of symbol combinations of 2 types BB02 and BB03 consisting of eight symbol combinations each. Even if the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated to stop the symbol combinations of 2 types BB01 to BB03 at any timing, the reel stop control ensures that one of these symbol combinations will be displayed on the pay line. In other words, the probability of winning each of the group of symbol combinations of 2 types BB01 to BB03 through reel control is 100% (PB = 1), and no misses will occur.

In this embodiment, when a bonus symbol combination aligns with a pay line, Type 2 BB game begins from the next play, and during Type 2 BB game, CB (Challenge Bonus) games, which end in one play, are continuously played. In this embodiment, the symbol combination that starts CB game is predetermined, and when one CB game ends during Type 2 BB game, a new CB game is played in the next play. In CB game, there is a rule that at least one reel must be stopped within 75 milliseconds after the corresponding stop switch is operated, and in this embodiment, the right reel is controlled to stop within 75 milliseconds. Then, Type 2 BB game ends when a total of 11 medals are paid out through consecutive CB games.

(Replay symbol combination)
As shown in Figure 79(b), eight types of symbol combinations or symbol combination groups are defined for replay 01 to 08. Of these, each of the symbol combination groups for replay 03 to 05 consists of two symbol combinations. The symbol combination for replay 06 includes a symbol combination in which "red seven" symbols are aligned on the middle horizontal line, the symbol combination for replay 07 includes a symbol combination in which "blue seven" symbols are aligned on the middle horizontal line, and the symbol combination for replay 08 includes a symbol combination in which "bar" symbols are aligned on the middle horizontal line.

(Small winning combinations)
As shown in Figures 80 to 82, 142 types of symbol combinations or symbol combination groups are set for the minor combinations, from winning 001 to 142. In this embodiment, the number of medals paid out in games other than the BB game (see the "A" column in the "Number of medals paid out" column in Figures 80 to 82) is different from the number of medals paid out in the BB game (in other words, the CB game) (see the "B" column in the "Number of medals paid out" column).

In games other than Type 2 BB games, the symbol combinations that pay out the most medals are WINNING 001, WINNING 002, and WINNING 142, and 12 medals are paid out. For convenience, these symbol combinations are also referred to as 12-coin roles. Furthermore, symbol combinations that pay out three medals are WINNING 003, 004, WINNING 072, 073, and WINNING 130-141, and these symbol combinations are also referred to as 3-coin roles for convenience. Symbol combinations for minor roles other than those mentioned above pay out one medal, and these symbol combinations are also referred to as 1-coin roles for convenience. In CB games, either two or one medal is paid out, with two medals paid out for winning combinations 001-004, winning combinations 039, 040, winning combinations 043-046, winning combinations 049, 050, winning combinations 059, winning combinations 064, winning combinations 068, 069, winning combinations 072-074, winning combinations 100, 101, winning combinations 104, winning combinations 106, winning combinations 108, winning combinations 111, and winning combinations 130-0142.

<Types of condition devices and reel stop control when the condition device is activated>
Next, with reference to Figures 83 to 89, the condition device numbers and the corresponding types of condition devices in this embodiment will be described. Figure 83(a) shows the correspondence between the bonus condition device numbers and the names and designations of the bonus condition devices, and the two-type BB symbol combinations associated with each bonus condition device. Also, Figure 83(b) shows the correspondence between the winning replay condition device numbers and the names and designations of the condition devices related to replay, and the replay symbol combinations associated with each replay condition device.

Figures 84 to 89 show the correspondence between the winning replay condition device number (simply referred to as "number" in the figures) and the name and designation of the condition device related to the winning, as well as the symbol combinations of minor winning combinations associated with each condition device related to the winning. Also, in the "Reel Control" column of Figures 84 to 89, the notation "1**" means that the first stop operation is the left stop switch 26a, and the second and third stop operations are any stop switch. The notation "2**" means that the first stop operation is the middle stop switch 26b, and the second and third stop operations are any stop switch. The notation "3**" means that the first stop operation is the right stop switch 26c, and the second and third stop operations are any stop switch. Additionally, "123", "132", "213", "231", "312", and "321" correspond to the following press orders: "left center right", "left left center", "center left right", "center right left", "center right left", and "right center left", respectively.

(Conditional Devices Related to Bonuses)
As shown in Figure 83(a), the bonus condition device of this embodiment has only one condition device named 2-kind BB, and this condition device is assigned bonus condition device number 1. Also, bonus condition device number 0 indicates that it does not correspond to any bonus condition device. The 2-kind BB condition device with bonus condition device number 1 is associated with the group of symbol combinations of 2-kind BB01 to 03 shown in Figure 79(a).

(Conditional Device Related to Replay)
As shown in Figure 83(b), there are three condition devices related to replay, Replay-A to Replay-C, and the winning replay condition device number of the Replay-A condition device is 1, and is associated with the symbol combinations of Replay 01 to 08 shown in Figure 79(b). The winning replay condition device number of the Replay-B condition device is 2, and is associated with the symbol combinations of Replay 02 to 08, and the winning replay condition device number of the Replay-C condition device is 3, and is associated with the symbol combinations of Replay 01 to 05. Furthermore, when the Replay-A or B condition device is activated according to the results of the internal lottery, if the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c are stopped in the order right → center → left (reverse push), reel stop control is performed so that one of the symbol combinations of Replay 06 to 08 is aligned. As a result, depending on the timing of the stop operation, the "Red Seven" symbol, the "Blue Seven" symbol or the "Bar" symbol will be aligned on the middle horizontal line.

(Conditional device related to winning)
As shown in Figures 84 to 89, 94 conditional devices related to winning are defined: Winning-A to -F, G1 to -G24, H1 to -H24, I1 to I12, J1 to J12, K1 to K12, L, and Winning-ALL, ALL + Replay A, ALL + Replay B, and ALL + Replay C. These conditional devices are assigned winning replay conditional device numbers 4 to 98. Winning-A to -E conditional devices (winning replay conditional device numbers 4 to 8) are also called "rare combination conditional devices," and when these conditional devices are activated based on the results of an internal lottery, a rare combination is won. When Winning-F conditional device (winning replay conditional device number 9) is activated, reel stop control is performed to match a three-coin combination (winning 03 or 04), regardless of the order in which stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed.

When the Type 2 BB condition device is activated (i.e., during a bonus), if the Winning-G1 to G24 condition device (Winning Replay condition device numbers 10 to 33) is activated, reel stop control is performed to align "Medal" symbols on either the upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, or lower horizontal line (see the "Notes" column in Figures 84 and 85) only if the stop operation is performed in one of six specific stop switch press sequences. This prevents the alignment of the Type 2 BB01 to 03 symbol combinations. This "one specific press sequence" is the press sequence that aligns the Winning-69 symbol combination for the Winning-G1 to G8 condition device, the Winning-70 symbol combination for the Winning-G9 to G16 condition device, and the Winning-71 symbol combination for the Winning-G17 to G24 condition device.

If the Type 2 BB condition device is activated and the Win-H1 to H24 condition device (Win-Replay condition device numbers 34 to 57) is activated, the reels will stop in a way that results in the "Medal" symbol being completed on either the upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, or lower horizontal line (see the remarks column in Figures 85 to 87) only if the stop operation is performed in one of six specific stop switch press sequences. This prevents the Type 2 BB 01 to 03 symbol combinations from being completed. This "one specific push order" is a push order that results in the winning 74 symbol combination for winning-H1 to H4 condition devices, the winning 75 symbol combination for winning-H5 to H8 condition devices, the winning 76 symbol combination for winning-H9 to H12 condition devices, the winning 77 symbol combination for winning-H13 to H16 condition devices, the winning 78 symbol combination for winning-H17 to H20 condition devices, and the winning 79 symbol combination for winning-H21 to H24 condition devices.

When the Type 2 BB condition device is activated and the Winning-I1 to I12 condition devices (Winning Replay condition device numbers 58 to 69) are activated, reel stop control is performed to complete a symbol combination of 3 coins (Winning 03 or 04) only when the stop switch is pressed in a specific sequence out of six possible sequences (see the "Reel Control" column in Figure 87). Hereinafter, the Winning-I1 to I12 condition devices are also referred to as "Push Sequence 3 Coin Condition Devices." Furthermore, when the Type 2 BB condition device is activated and the Winning-J1 to J12 condition devices (Winning Replay condition device numbers 70 to 81) are activated, reel stop control is performed to complete a symbol combination of 12 coins (Winning 01, 02, or 142) only when the stop switch is pressed in a specific sequence out of six possible sequences (see the "Reel Control" column in Figure 88).

When the Type 2 BB condition device is activated and the Winning-K1 to K12 condition device (Winning Replay condition device numbers 82 to 93) is activated, the reel stop control is the same as when the Winning-J1 to J12 condition device is activated. However, when the Type 2 BB condition device is not activated, the reel stop control is performed to complete a 12-coin combination (Winning 01, 02, or 142) regardless of the push order. Hereinafter, the Winning-J1 to J12 and Winning-K1 to K12 condition devices are also referred to as "Push Order 12-Coin Role Condition Devices." When the Winning-L condition device (Winning Replay condition device number 94) is activated, the reel stop control is performed to complete a 12-coin combination (Winning 01, 02, or 142) regardless of the push order of stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c.

The condition device for WIN-ALL (WIN-ALL replay condition device number 95), the condition device for WIN-ALL + replay A (WIN-ALL replay condition device number 96), the condition device for WIN-ALL + replay B (WIN-ALL replay condition device number 97), and the condition device for WIN-ALL + replay C (WIN-ALL replay condition device number 98) are all condition devices that can be activated during Type 2 BB play (more specifically, during CB play). In this embodiment, during CB play, an internal lottery is conducted only for the condition devices related to replay (details will be described later), and all condition devices related to wins are activated regardless of the lottery. Therefore, if the condition device related to replay is not activated as a result of the internal lottery during CB play, the condition device for WIN-ALL will be activated. Furthermore, if the condition device for replay -A is activated as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device for WIN-ALL + replay A will be activated. Similarly, if the result of the internal lottery is that the Replay-B condition device is activated, the Winning-ALL+Replay-B condition device will be activated, and if the Replay-C condition device is activated, the Winning-ALL+Replay-C condition device will be activated.

When the Winning-ALL condition device is activated, if the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated (pressed in order) to stop in left, center, and right order, the reels will be stopped in a way that will cause the same symbol combination (weak chance symbol) to be displayed as when Winning-C is activated alone. In contrast, if the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated (pressed in reverse) to stop in right, center, and left order, the reels will be stopped in a way that will cause the symbol combination of "bar" symbols to line up in a straight line to be displayed.

When the Winning-ALL + Replay A condition device is activated, if stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in order, the reels will stop and display the same symbol combination as when Winning-A is activated alone (a symbol combination in which "medal" symbols line up in a straight line) (i.e., the result of a weak rare combination will be displayed). Here, "a straight line" refers to the upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, lower horizontal line, upward-right line, and downward-right line. In contrast, when stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in reverse, the reels will stop and display the symbol combination in which "bar" symbols line up in a straight line.

When the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in order when the condition device for WIN-ALL+REPLAY B is activated, reel stop control is performed in which the same symbol combination (Strong Chance Eye A or Strong Chance Eye B) as when WIN-D or E is activated alone can be displayed (i.e., the result of a Strong Rare Role can be displayed).In contrast, when the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in reverse, reel stop control is performed in which a symbol combination in which "bar" symbols are aligned in a straight line can be displayed.

Furthermore, if stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in order when the condition device for WIN-ALL + Replay C is activated, reel stop control is performed such that the same symbol combination (Strong Chance Eye A or Strong Chance Eye B) as when WIN-D or E is activated alone may be displayed (i.e., the result of a Strong Rare Role may be displayed). In contrast, if stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are pressed in reverse, reel stop control is performed such that the "bar" symbols are broken into a tenpai pattern. Here, "broken into a tenpai pattern" refers to a state in which the "bar" symbols are lined up in a straight line on two of the three reels, but the "bar" symbols on the remaining reel are not lined up.

In the following, the activation of the condition device for WIN-ALL or WIN-ALL + REPLAY A will be referred to as "winning a weak rare role," and the activation of the condition device for WIN-ALL + REPLAY B or WIN-ALL + REPLAY C will be referred to as "winning a strong rare role."

<Internal lottery winning probability>
Next, the winning probability of the internal lottery executed in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the number setting tables shown in Figures 90 and 91. The number setting tables shown in Figures 90 and 91 show the winning numbers assigned to each condition device shown in Figures 83 to 89. In this embodiment, a random number generator corresponding to random number generator 66 shown in Figure 2 is capable of generating pseudo-random numbers between 0 and 65,535 (integer values), resulting in 65,536 possible pseudo-random number values. Therefore, the value obtained by dividing each winning number shown in the number setting tables in Figures 90 and 91 by 65,536 is the probability that the corresponding condition device will operate (also referred to as the "operation probability" or "winning probability").

Figure 90(a) is a number setting table showing the winning probability for each condition device in the internal lottery when the Type 2 BB condition device is not activated (Type 2 BB condition device not activated). In this number setting table, the number shown in parentheses indicates the number assigned to each corresponding condition device. For example, for prize-winning G1 to G24, 64 numbers are assigned to each condition device.

As shown in Figure 90(a), the Type 2 BB condition device operates together with the Winning-A to F, G1 to G24, H1 to H24, and I1 to I24 condition devices. Furthermore, the Replay-A to C, Winning-A to E, G1 to G24, H1 to H24, and J1 to J12 condition devices have the same activation probability in settings 1 to 6. Furthermore, when a Type 2 BB condition device is activated, the Type 2 BB condition device will not be activated in addition, as shown in Figure 90(b), and the activation probability of the condition devices related to replay and winning, excluding the Type 2 BB condition device, is the same as the activation probability when the Type 2 BB condition device is not activated. During Type 2 BB play (more precisely, during CB play), all winning condition devices operate regardless of the internal lottery, and only the Replay-A to -C condition devices undergo an internal lottery with the same probability of operation as the Replay-A to -C condition devices shown in Figure 90(b).

Figures 91(a) and (b) are table numbers showing the total number of entries for each type of conditional device (Type 2 BB, replay, and winning). Figure 91(a) is a table number of entries when the Type 2 BB conditional device is not activated, and Figure 91(b) is a table number of entries when the Type 2 BB conditional device is activated (including during CB play). As shown in these figures, there are no losses in the internal lottery of this embodiment, and the probability of the conditional devices related to replay and winning being activated is the same when the Type 2 BB is not activated and when it is activated. Also, as shown in Figure 91(a), the probability of the Type 2 BB conditional device activating is highest for setting 1 (36,378 entries), the same value for settings 2 to 5 (36,268 entries), and lowest for setting 6 (36,218 entries).

<Game state transition>
Next, referring to FIG. 92 , the transition of game states in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, there are five game states: "normal,""chancezone" (hereinafter also referred to as "CZ"), "sub-bonus,""ATgame," and "continuation chance." All of these game states are game states in the advantageous zone described in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the game transitions to the normal zone described in the first embodiment when the game transitions from "sub-bonus" to "normal," when the game transitions from "continuation chance" to "normal," when 1,500 games have been played in the advantageous zone, and when the net increase in the number of coins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400. Furthermore, if a type 2 BB game is not being played when the game transitions to the normal zone, the game transitions to the advantageous zone and "normal" in the next game. If a type 2 BB game is being played when the game transitions to the normal zone, the game transitions to the advantageous zone and "normal" in the next game.

(Transition from "normal" to "opportunity zone")
In "normal" mode, when the condition device for winning -G1 to G24 is activated and the stop switch is stopped in the "specific single push order" described above, and the "medal" symbols are lined up, "1" is added to the value of the CZ transition counter stored in the RWM of the main control board. In this way, the value of the CZ transition counter is added by "1" each time the "medal" symbols are lined up, and when the value of the CZ transition counter reaches "6", the game state transitions from "normal" to "chance zone".

(Transition from "Chance Zone" to "Normal" or "Sub Bonus")
When transitioning from "normal" to "chance zone," the number of plays (number of CZ plays) that can be played in the "chance zone" is determined by lottery within the range of 0 to 30 games. During play in the "chance zone," a CZ release lottery is held each time the result of the internal lottery is anything other than a loss. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, the result of the internal lottery cannot be a loss, so a CZ release lottery is held each time a game is played. When the number of CZ plays determined by lottery is played in the "chance zone," if the CZ release lottery is not won, the game state transitions from the "chance zone" to "normal," and if the CZ release lottery is won, the game state transitions from the "chance zone" to "sub-bonus."

In addition, when playing in the "Chance Zone," if any of the conditional devices for winning -I1 to I12 is activated, the player may be notified of the order in which to press the stop switches to win a 3-coin winning combination. Also, if any of the conditional devices for winning -J1 to J12 is activated, the player may be notified of the order in which to press the stop switches to win a 12-coin winning combination.

(Transition from "Normal" to "Sub Bonus")
In "normal" mode, if the 2-type BB condition device is activated and one of the prize-winning G1-G24 and H1-H24 condition devices is activated, the player is notified of the stop switch pressing sequence (see the "Reel Control" column in Figures 84-87) that will result in the "medal" symbols being lined up or in a ready state. When the player operates the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in accordance with the notified pressing sequence, the main control means 100 stops and displays the symbol combination that will result in the "medal" symbols being lined up or in a ready state, and performs reel stop control to prevent the 2-type BB symbol combination from lining up on the winning line. This pressing sequence that results in the "medal" symbols being lined up or in a ready state and the 2-type BB symbol combination not lining up on the winning line is called an "avoidance pressing sequence." The prize-winning G1-G24 and H1-H24 condition devices are also called "avoidance role condition devices."

If the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated in a different sequence from the avoidance sequence (any of the five sequences other than the avoidance sequence out of the six possible sequences), a Type 2 BB symbol combination will line up on the winning line, and Type 2 BB play will begin from the next play. As mentioned above, in Type 2 BB play, CB play is executed continuously. In CB play, when the condition device related to a win is activated in the internal lottery, the main control means 100 performs reel stop control to preferentially stop and display symbol combinations of minor roles with a payout of two coins on the winning line. As shown in Figure 91(b), the probability of activating the condition device related to replay in CB gaming is approximately 1/7.3 (activates once every 7.3 games), while the probability of activating the condition device related to winning is approximately 1/1.16 (activates once every 1.16 games), so the end condition for Type 2 BB gaming (payout of more than 11 medals in total) will be met in approximately 6 to 7 games.

As described above, the main control means 100 of this embodiment is configured to notify the avoidance button sequence when the avoidance role condition device is activated in "normal" mode, but not in (1) a game in which the Type 2 BB and avoidance role condition devices are activated when the Type 2 BB condition device is not activated in the normal zone, or (2) a game in which the avoidance role condition device is activated in the game following the activation of the Winning-B (Watermelon) condition device while the Type 2 BB condition device is activated in the advantageous zone (within Type 2 BB). If a Type 2 BB game is initiated during such a game by stopping the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in a press order other than the avoidance button sequence, a lottery is held to transition to a sub-bonus each time a rare role is won during the Type 2 BB game (each time any of the Winning-A through Winning-E condition devices is activated). In this sub-bonus transition lottery, the probability of winning is higher when the condition device for WIN-ALL + REPLAY B or WIN-ALL + REPLAY C is activated (when a strong rare role is won) than when the condition device for WIN-ALL or WIN-ALL + REPLAY A is activated (when a weak rare role is won). Therefore, it can be said that the benefit in Type 2 BB play is greater when a strong rare role is won than when a weak rare role is won. And if you win the transition lottery to the sub-bonus, you will transition to the sub-bonus.

At this time, if the player accidentally operates the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in the avoidance button sequence and does not achieve the Type 2 BB symbol combination, the main control means 100 will perform a V reserve lottery, and if the lottery is won, the number of V reserves (described below) will be increased by "10." This number of V reserves is stored in the RMW of the main control means 100. On the other hand, if a Type 2 BB game is started by stopping the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in a button sequence other than the avoidance button sequence, even if the avoidance button sequence has been notified, no lottery will be held to transition to the sub-bonus even if a rare combination is won in the Type 2 BB game.

In addition, if 700 plays are played in "normal" mode without transitioning to "chance zone" or "sub-bonus," the main control means 100 will transition the gaming state from "normal" to "sub-bonus."

In addition, in "normal" mode, if one of the avoidance roles (winning replay condition device numbers 10-57) is activated while the Type 2 BB condition device is operating and the avoidance push order is not announced, and a combination of Type 2 BB symbols 01-03 is completed, a specific lottery will be held, and if the specific lottery is won, the player may be placed in a game state (specialized zone) that is advantageous to the player from the start of the Type 2 BB game from the next game until its end.

In this specialized zone (during two-type BB play), for example, the player may be instructed to reverse the stop operation of stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c for each play, and when stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c are reversely pressed during a play in which the condition device for winning - ALL, the condition device for winning - ALL + replay A, or the condition device for winning - ALL + replay B is activated, if the "bar" patterns line up in a straight line (upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, lower horizontal line, upward-right line, or downward-right line) (or if the number of times they have lined up reaches a predetermined number), a V reserve lottery may be held. In this case, it can be said that the benefit in two-type BB play is more advantageous to the player when the condition device for WIN-ALL or WIN-ALL + REPLAY A is activated (i.e., a weak rare role is won) than when the condition device for WIN-ALL + REPLAY B or WIN-ALL + REPLAY C is activated (i.e., a strong rare role is won).

(Transition from "Sub Bonus" to "AT Game" or "Normal")
When transitioning to the "sub-bonus," the main control means 100 notifies the player of the avoidance push sequence when the avoidance role condition device is activated, notifies the player of the push sequence that will produce a three-coin role symbol combination when the push sequence 3-coin role condition device is activated, and notifies the player of the push sequence that will produce a twelve-coin role symbol combination when the push sequence 12-coin role condition device is activated. Hereinafter, these push sequences are also referred to as "push sequences that result in favorable game results." Furthermore, the main control means 100 increments the count value of the lottery right counter each time the rare role condition device or the push sequence 3-coin role condition device is activated, and performs an AT lottery each time the count value reaches "10." The count value of the lottery right counter is stored in the RWM of the main control means 100. When the difference in the number of coins exceeds 100 during play in the "sub-bonus," the "sub-bonus" ends, and if the player has won the AT lottery, the game transitions to "AT play." If the player has not won the AT lottery, the game transitions to "normal play."

(Transition from "AT Game" to "Continuation Chance")
In "AT game," when the condition devices for the three-coin push order, the twelve-coin push order, and the avoidance role are activated, the main control means 100 notifies the player of the push order that will result in a favorable game outcome. "AT game" ends after 10 plays and transitions to "continuation chance." However, the number of plays in "AT game" is not limited to 10, and the number of plays may be determined by lottery. Figure 93 shows the contents of the screen displayed on the image display device 11 when transitioning to "AT game." In this figure, the display area AE1 on the left side of the screen displays the number of plays of "AT game," and the displayed number of plays decreases by "1" each time a game is played in "AT game." Furthermore, the display area AE2 on the right side of the screen displays the conditions for continuing "AT game" (continuation conditions). These continuation conditions will be explained later.

(Transition from "Continuation Chance" to "AT Game" or "Normal")
In the "Continuation Chance" mode, if the continuation condition is met before the 12-coin push order condition device is activated twice, the game can transition back to "AT Game." However, if the continuation condition is not met even after the 12-coin push order condition device is activated twice, the game will transition to "Normal." This continuation condition is that the type of reel (hereinafter also referred to as the "Continuation Condition Reel") displaying the "V" mark in the display area AE2 of the screen shown in Figure 93 matches the type of reel corresponding to the first stop operation of the push order that results in the 12-coin symbol combination in the activated 12-coin push order condition device.

In display area AE2 of the screen shown in Figure 93(a), the continuation condition reel that will be activated when the 12-coin push order condition device is first activated after the "Continuation Chance" is started is displayed in [First Chance], and the continuation condition reel that will be activated when the 12-coin push order condition device is activated the second time is displayed in [Second Chance]. Two continuation condition reels are specified for each chance. For example, in [First Chance], a "V" mark is displayed in the positions corresponding to the characters "left" and "right," and a "-" mark is displayed in the position corresponding to the character "center," indicating that the left and right reels are the continuation condition reels. In addition, in [Second Chance], a "V" mark is displayed in the positions corresponding to "left" and "center," and a "-" mark is displayed in the position corresponding to the character "right," indicating that the left and center reels are the continuation condition reels.

For example, in the case of the continuation condition reel shown in Figure 93(a), if the first 12-coin push-order condition device activated during a "continuation chance" is either Winning - J1 to J4, J9 to J12, K1 to K4, or K9 to K12 (a 12-coin win can be achieved by operating the left stop switch 26a or the right stop switch 26c to the first stop), the continuation condition will be met. Also, even if the first 12-coin push-order condition device activated is either Winning - J5 to J8 or K5 to K8 (the continuation condition is not met), the continuation condition will be met if the second 12-coin push-order condition device activated is either Winning - J1 to J4, J5 to J8, K1 to K4, or K5 to K8 (a 12-coin win can be achieved by operating the left stop switch 26a or the center stop switch 26b to the first stop).

Furthermore, if there is a V reserve as mentioned above, a "V" mark will also be displayed in place of the "-" mark on the continuation condition reel displayed in display area AE2, and "V" marks will be displayed in all positions: "left," "center," and "right." For example, display area AE2 in Figure 93(b) shows a case where an "RSV" based on a V reserve has been added to the "center" position on the continuation condition reel for [Second Chance]. When "V" marks are displayed in all positions: "left," "center," and "right" in this way, the continuation of "AT game" is confirmed.

If the number of V reserves is two or more, an additional "V" mark based on the V reserve will be displayed in both the [First Chance] and [Second Chance], so the continuation condition will be met when the 12-coin push order condition device is first activated, and the next game will be played in "AT game". In this way, after transitioning from "Sub Bonus" to "AT game", the game will alternate between "AT game" and "Continuation Chance" until the continuation condition is not met in the "Continuation Chance".

<Control details regarding games>
Next, the main control contents executed by the main control means 100 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Game Progress Control Processing>
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an outline of the game progress control process that controls the progress of one game. The main control means 100 repeatedly executes this game progress control process to control the game provided by the gaming machine of this embodiment. In FIG. 94, when one game begins, the main control means 100 determines whether the start lever 25 has been operated (step Sa1). If the start lever 25 has not been operated, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 again determines whether the start lever 25 has been operated, and repeats the processing of step Sa1 until the start lever 25 is operated. If the start lever 25 is operated in this state, the determination result of step Sa1 is YES, and the main control means 100 performs an internal lottery to determine the operation of various condition devices based on the probabilities of the number placement table shown in FIG. 90 (step Sa2), and stores the results in the RWM (step Sa3). In this embodiment, not only the results of the internal lottery for the current game but also the results of the internal lottery for the previous game are stored in the RWM.

Next, the main control means 100 performs a game state-specific lever process that notifies the player of the order in which to press the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c and controls the transition of game states according to the current game state ("normal,""chancezone,""sub-bonus,""ATgame," or "continuation chance") (step Sa4), and then determines whether the rotation of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c has all stopped (step Sa5). If all reels have not stopped, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 again determines whether all reels have stopped, and repeats the process of step Sa5 until all reels have stopped. Note that the order in which the player pressed the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c during this process is stored in the RWM provided on the main control board 60. When all the reels stop in this state, the result of the judgment in step Sa5 becomes YES, and the main control means 100 performs a winning judgment process to determine whether or not a winning combination of symbols is aligned on the winning line by identifying the symbols displayed in the display window W (step Sa6).

The main control means 100 then performs a game state-specific full stop process (step Sa7) that controls game state transitions and the like depending on the current game state, and then performs a medal payout process (step Sa8) that pays out the number of medals corresponding to a minor winning symbol combination if a minor winning symbol combination is aligned on a winning line, and then performs a game end check process (step Sa9). The game end check process in step Sa9 mainly determines whether the end condition has been met if a Type 2 BB game is being played, and if the end condition has been met, performs various processes associated with the end of Type 2 BB game and controls the transition between advantageous and normal zones.

After completing the processing of step Sa9, the main control means 100 performs advantageous zone clear counter management processing (step Sa10), which updates the counter value that counts the number of games played during the advantageous zone and the counter value that counts the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous zone, and ends the game progress control processing shown in Figure 94.

<Normal operation lever processing and full stop processing>
The game state-specific lever processing executed in step Sa4 of the game progress control processing when the game state is "normal" and the game state-specific all-stop processing executed in step Sa7 will be described with reference to Figures 95 and 96. Figure 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal time lever processing executed in the game state-specific lever processing described above when the game state is "normal," and Figure 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal time all-stop processing executed in the game state-specific all-stop processing described above when the game state is "normal."

(Normal lever processing)
In the normal mode lever process of Fig. 95, first, the main control means 100 judges whether or not a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa20). If a Type 2 BB game is not being played, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 adds "1" to the value of the normal mode counter stored in the RWM 63 (hereinafter also referred to simply as "RWM") of the main control board 60 (step Sa21). This normal mode counter is a counter for counting the number of games played in "normal" mode.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether an avoidance role was won in the internal lottery performed in step Sa2 of the game progress processing shown in FIG. 94 (i.e., any of the condition devices for winning - G1 to G24 and H1 to H24 was activated) (step Sa22). If any of the avoidance roles was won, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 then determines whether the Type 2 BB condition device is activated (i.e., Type 2 BB is currently active) (step Sa23). If the Type 2 BB condition device is activated, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether a watermelon was won in the internal lottery performed in the previous game (i.e., the condition device for winning - B was activated) (step Sa24). If a watermelon was not won, the determination result in step Sa24 is NO, the avoidance button sequence corresponding to the winning avoidance role is announced (step Sa25), and the regular flag stored in the RWM is turned off (step Sa26). This normal flag indicates whether the avoidance button press sequence was announced in a game in which an avoidance role was won.

In the judgment process of step Sa23, if the condition device of the 2nd kind BB has not been activated, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 turns on the above-mentioned regular flag (step Sa27). Also, in the judgment process of step Sa24, if the watermelon was won in the internal lottery performed in the previous game, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 1
00 proceeds to step Sa27 and sets the normal flag to ON.

When the main control means 100 turns off the regular flag in step Sa26 or turns on the regular flag in step Sa27, it next determines whether the value of the normal game counter described above has reached 700 (step Sa28). If the value of the normal game counter has reached 700, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 turns on the SBN transition flag stored in the RWM (step Sa29), and terminates the normal lever processing shown in Figure 95. This SBN transition flag is a flag that indicates whether processing (described below) should be performed when transitioning the game state from "normal" to "sub-bonus," and is initially off. If, in the determination processing of step Sa28, the value of the normal game counter has not reached 700, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the normal lever processing shown in Figure 95 while leaving the SBN transition flag off.

Next, in the judgment process of step Sa20 described above, if a Type 2 BB game is being played, the judgment result will be YES, and the main control means 100 will determine whether the SBN lottery flag is on (step Sa30). This SBN lottery flag is a flag that indicates whether a sub-bonus lottery can be played, and the flag's on/off control is performed in the normal full-stop processing described next. If the SBN lottery flag is on, the judgment result will be YES, and the main control means 100 will determine whether a rare role was won (i.e., whether any of the condition devices for winning -A to -E was activated) in the internal lottery performed in step Sa2 of the game progress processing shown in FIG. 94 (step Sa31).

In contrast, if the SBN lottery flag is OFF in the judgment process of step Sa30, or if a rare combination has not been won in the judgment process of step Sa31, the judgment result will be NO in both cases, and the main control means 100 will end the normal lever processing of FIG. 95. On the other hand, if a rare combination has been won in the judgment process of step Sa31, the judgment result will be YES, and the main control means 100 will conduct a sub-bonus lottery to determine whether to transition the gaming state from "normal" to "sub-bonus" (step Sa32). Then, it is determined whether the sub-bonus lottery has been won (step Sa33). If a win has been won, the judgment result will be YES, and the process will proceed to step Sa29. The main control means 100 will turn ON the SBN transition flag stored in the RWM, and then end the normal lever processing shown in FIG. 95. In contrast, if a sub-bonus lottery has not been won, the judgment result of step Sa33 will be NO, and the normal lever processing shown in FIG. 95 will end.

(Normal power outage processing)
In the normal mode full stop processing of FIG. 97, first, the main control means 100 determines whether a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa40). If a Type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether any of the Type 2 BB symbol combinations 01 to 03 has aligned on a pay line in the current game (step Sa41). If any of the Type 2 BB symbol combinations has aligned on a pay line, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the aforementioned regular flag is on (step Sa42). If the regular flag is on, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 updates the state of the SBN lottery flag stored in the RWM to on (step Sa43), performs processing to start a Type 2 BB game from the next game (step Sa44), and then terminates the normal mode full stop processing of FIG. 97.

In the judgment process of step Sa41, if any of the two-kind BB symbol combinations is not aligned on the winning line, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 judges whether or not the "medal" symbol is aligned on any of the upper horizontal line, the middle horizontal line, or the lower horizontal line (
If the medal symbols are aligned in a horizontal line in either the upper, middle, or lower row, the result of the determination is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the regular flag is on (step Sa46).

If the regular flag is on, the result of the determination in step Sa46 is YES, and a V reserve acquisition lottery is held to determine whether or not the aforementioned V reserve can be acquired (step Sa47). It is then determined whether or not the aforementioned V reserve acquisition lottery has been won (step Sa48), and if the winner has been won, the result of the determination is YES, and "10" is added to the value of the V reserve counter stored in the RWM of the main control board 60 (step Sa49). Here, the value of the V reserve counter indicates the number of accumulated V reserves.

Here, if the regular flag is on, it means that the avoidance button press sequence was not announced when one of the avoidance roles was won, and if the "medal" symbols line up in this state, it means that the player accidentally pressed the stop switch in the avoidance button press sequence. In other words, this means that the player missed a good opportunity to execute a sub-bonus lottery in Type 2 BB play. Therefore, in this embodiment, a V reserve lottery is conducted as a compensation measure in such cases.

After processing step Sa49, the main control means 100 next determines whether the aforementioned SBN transition flag is on (step Sa50). If the SBN transition flag is on, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 draws the number of AT transition games and saves the number of games determined by the lottery in the RWM (step Sa51). This AT transition game number lottery determines the number of games that can confirm a transition to "AT play" in the "sub-bonus" gaming state, and is determined within the range of 20 to 80 games. In this embodiment, the termination condition for the "sub-bonus" gaming state is determined by the difference in number of coins, so the number of games that can be played in the "sub-bonus" is not determined. Therefore, if more games than the number determined by the AT transition game number lottery are played in the "sub-bonus," a V reserve is awarded as a bonus.

Next, the main control means 100 clears the values of the SBN game counter and AT lottery right counter stored in the RWM (setting them to "0") (step Sa52). Here, the SBN game counter is a counter for counting the number of games played with the "sub-bonus," and the AT lottery right counter is a counter for counting the number of rights (described below) required to perform the AT lottery in the "sub-bonus." After processing step Sa52, the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "normal" to "sub-bonus" (step Sa53) and terminates the normal full stop processing of FIG. 96. Note that if the SBN transition flag is off in the judgment processing of step Sa50 described above, the judgment result will be NO, and the normal full stop processing of FIG. 96 will terminate.

In the judgment process of step Sa46 described above, if the normal flag is off, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 adds "1" to the value of the CZ transition counter stored in the RWM (step Sa54) and judges whether the value of the CZ transition counter has reached "6" (step Sa55). This CZ transition counter value is referenced when determining whether to transition the gaming state from "normal" to "chance zone." If the value of the CZ transition counter reaches "6," the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 transitions the gaming state from "normal" to "chance zone" (step Sa56) and then terminates the normal full-stop processing of FIG. 96. On the other hand, if the value of the CZ transition counter has not reached "6," the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the normal full-stop processing of FIG. 96 while maintaining the gaming state at "normal."

In the judgment process of step Sa40 described above, if a Type 2 BB game is currently being played, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 judges whether the total number of medals paid out in the Type 2 BB game exceeds 11 (step Sa57). If the total number of medals exceeds 11, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 ends Type 2 BB game (step Sa58), and ends the normal full stop processing of Figure 96. In this case, a game without the Type 2 BB condition device in operation will start from the next game. On the other hand, if the total number of medals does not exceed 11, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 ends the normal full stop processing of Figure 96 while continuing Type 2 BB game.

In the bonus game (Type 2 BB game) of this embodiment, the number of medals paid out when a small winning combination is achieved is one or two, compared to the specified number of two medals, so it is not an attractive benefit to be given to the player. Therefore, by offering the player the chance to transition to a "sub-bonus" when a specified condition is met in Type 2 BB game (in this embodiment, when a rare combination is achieved), it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game without diminishing their motivation to play. Also, in this embodiment, there are no missed symbol combinations for Type 2 BB01-03 (PB = 1), so the player can transition to Type 2 BB game without having to use their eyes to press the buttons.

<Lever processing and full stop processing in "Sub Bonus">
The game state-specific lever processing executed in step Sa4 of the game progress control processing shown in Fig. 94 when the game state is "sub bonus" and the game state-specific all-stop processing executed in step Sa7 will be described with reference to Fig. 97 and Fig. 98. Fig. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sub bonus lever processing executed in the game state-specific lever processing described above when the game state is "sub bonus", and Fig. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sub bonus all-stop processing executed in the game state-specific all-stop processing described above when the game state is "sub bonus".

(Lever processing in "Sub Bonus")
In the sub-bonus lever processing of Fig. 97, first, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa70). If a type 2 BB game is being played, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 ends the sub-bonus lever processing of Fig. 97. On the other hand, if a type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 subtracts the value of the prescribed number from the value of the difference number counter stored in the RWM (step Sa71). Here, the prescribed number is "2" in a type 2 BB game and "3" in games other than a type 2 BB game.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether a minor role has been won through the internal lottery (whether a conditional device related to a win has been activated) (step Sa72). If any conditional device related to a win has been activated, the value of the largest payout number among the payout numbers specified for the symbol combination of the minor role corresponding to the activated conditional device is added to the value of the difference number counter (step Sa73). The number of medals added to the value of the difference number counter is determined based on the payout number specified for the symbol combination of the minor role corresponding to the activated conditional device, not the medals actually paid out. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether a push order role has been won, i.e., whether any of the conditional devices for win-I1 to I12, J1 to J12, or K1 to K12 has been activated (step Sa74). If any push order role has been won, the determination result is YES, and the player is notified of the push order in which the symbol combination that will pay out the most medals is aligned with the winning line (step Sa75). Here, if the winning condition devices I1 to I12 are activated, the main control means 100 will announce the push order in which a three-coin symbol combination will line up on the winning line, and if the winning condition devices J1 to J12 and K1 to K12 are activated, the main control means 100 will announce the push order in which a twelve-coin symbol combination will line up on the winning line.

Next, the main control means 100 adds "1" to the value of the SBN game counter described above (step Sa76). Note that if the small role has not been won in the judgment process of step Sa72, or if the push order role has not been won in the judgment process of step Sa74, the judgment result becomes NO in both cases, and the process proceeds to step Sa76, where "1" is added to the value of the SBN game counter. After processing step Sa76, the main control means 100 determines whether the state of the AT flag stored in the RWM is on (step Sa77). The AT flag is a flag that the main control means 100 refers to when determining whether to transition to "AT game" or "normal" when the termination condition of the "sub-bonus" is met.

In the judgment process of step Sa77, if the AT flag is off, the judgment result is NO, and it is determined whether the value of the SBN game counter is equal to or greater than the value of the AT transition game number determined in the AT transition game number lottery process of step Sa51 in Figure 96 (step Sa78). If the value of the SBN game counter is equal to or greater than the value of the AT transition game number lottery, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 updates the state of the AT flag stored in the RWM to ON (step Sa79). After completing the process of step Sa79, or if the judgment result of step Sa77 is YES (the AT flag was on), the main control means 100 determines whether the result of the internal lottery was a loss (step Sa80). If it was not a loss, the judgment result is NO, and a V reserve acquisition lottery is performed (step Sa81). Then, the value determined by the V reserve acquisition lottery (which may be 0) is added to the value of the V reserve counter described above (step Sa82), and the sub-bonus lever processing of Figure 97 is terminated. Furthermore, if the result of the internal lottery in the judgment process of step Sa80 is a loss, the judgment result will be YES, and the sub-bonus lever process of FIG. 97 will end.

In the judgment process of step Sa78 described above, if the value of the SBN game counter is less than the value of the AT transition game count, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 judges whether a rare role has been won by the internal lottery (wonder - any of the condition devices A to E has been activated) (step Sa83). If a rare role has been won, the judgment result is YES, and "3" is added to the value of the AT lottery right counter described above (step Sa84). On the other hand, if a rare role has not been won, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 judges whether a three-coin role has been won by the internal lottery (wonder - any of the condition devices I1 to I12 has been activated) (step Sa85). If a three-coin role has not been won, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 ends the sub-bonus lever processing of FIG. 97.

If a 3-coin combination is won, the result of the determination in step Sa85 is YES, and "1" is added to the value of the AT lottery right counter (step Sa86). Next, it is determined whether a 3-coin combination has been won for four or more consecutive games (step Sa87). If a 3-coin combination has been won for four or more consecutive games, the result of the determination is YES, and another "1" is added to the value of the AT lottery right counter (step Sa88). Next, it is determined whether a 3-coin combination has been won for five or more consecutive games (step Sa89). If a 3-coin combination has been won for five or more consecutive games, the result of the determination is YES, and another "1" is added to the value of the AT lottery right counter (step Sa90).

When the processing of step Sa84 or Sa90 is completed or the judgment result of step Sa87 or Sa89 is NO, the main control means 100 judges whether the value of the AT lottery right counter has exceeded "9" (step Sa91). If the value of the AT lottery right counter has not exceeded "9," the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the sub-bonus time lever processing of FIG. 97. On the other hand, if the value of the AT lottery right counter has exceeded "9," the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 clears the value of the AT lottery right counter to "0" (step Sa92), and then performs an AT lottery to determine whether to transition to AT play when the "sub-bonus" termination condition is met (step Sa93). Then, it is judged whether the AT lottery has been won (step Sa94). If the AT lottery has not been won, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the sub-bonus time lever processing of FIG. 97. On the other hand, if the AT lottery is won, the judgment result will be YES, and the state of the AT flag stored in the RWM will be updated to ON (step Sa95), and then the sub-bonus lever processing in Figure 97 will be terminated.

(Total stop processing in "Sub-bonus")
In the sub-bonus full stop processing of Fig. 98, first, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa100). If a type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the difference number counter stored in the RWM exceeds "88" (step Sa101). If the value of the difference number counter does not exceed "88", the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 ends the sub-bonus full stop processing of Fig. 98. On the other hand, if the value of the difference number counter exceeds "88", the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the state of the AT flag stored in the RWM is ON (step Sa102).

In the judgment process of step Sa102, if the AT flag is off, the judgment result is NO and the main control means 100 judges whether the value of the SBN game counter stored in the RWM is less than 20 (step Sa103). If the value of the SBN game counter is 20 or greater, the judgment result is NO and the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "sub-bonus" to "normal" (step Sa104), and then terminates the sub-bonus full stop processing of FIG. 98.

In contrast, if the determination result in step Sa102 is YES (the AT flag is on) or if the determination result in step Sa103 is YES (the value of the SBN game counter is less than 20), the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "sub-bonus" to "AT game" (step Sa105). In this way, in this embodiment, when the number of times the "sub-bonus" has been played is less than 20 times, if the difference in number of coins is the largest within the range not exceeding 100 coins (i.e., when the "sub-bonus" termination condition is met), a transition to "AT game" is made even if the AT flag is off. As a result, if the "sub-bonus" termination condition is met with a small number of times (less than 20 times) in the "sub-bonus," control is exercised to always transition to "AT game" as a compensation measure.

After processing step Sa105, the main control means 100 then sets the initial value of the AT game counter stored in the RWM to "10" (step Sa106). The value of this AT game counter indicates the number of games that can be played in "AT game." In this embodiment, it is set to "10," but this is not limited to this. The initial value of the AT game counter may also be determined to any number of games by lottery. Next, the main control means 100 performs a continuation condition reel lottery to determine the continuation condition reel for the [First Chance] and [Second Chance] shown in Figure 93 (step Sa107).

This lottery determines two continuation condition reels (one of three possibilities: left reel and center reel, center reel and right reel, or left reel and right reel) for each of the [First Chance] and [Second Chance] displayed in the right display area G2 shown in Figure 93. As a result, when transitioning to "AT game," a "V" mark is displayed in the square corresponding to the determined continuation condition reel among the "left," "center," and "right" squares displayed in the right display area G2 of the image display device 11. In addition, a "-" mark is displayed in the square corresponding to the reel that was not the continuation condition reel (hereinafter also referred to as the "non-continuation condition reel").

After processing step Sa107, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the V reservation counter stored in the RWM is equal to or greater than "1" (step Sa108). If the value of the V reservation counter is "0", the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 displays a "V" mark in the square corresponding to the non-continuation condition reel in the [Second Chance] (step Sa109), and ends the sub-bonus full stop processing of Figure 98. In this way, in this embodiment, even if the number of V reservations is "0" when the termination condition of the "sub-bonus" is met, one V reservation will always be awarded. Furthermore, in this case, the V reserve will always be used for the [Second Chance], so for example, if the first stop reel in the push order that produces a 12-coin symbol combination in the [First Chance] matches the continuation condition reel determined by the continuation condition reel lottery in step Sa107 (i.e., the continuation condition is met), the V reserve granted by the processing of step Sa109 will not be consumed and will be carried over to the next "continuation chance".

In the determination process of step Sa108, if the value of the V reserve counter is "1" or greater, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the V reserve counter stored in the RWM is "1" (step Sa110). If the value of the V reserve counter is "1", the determination result is YES, and a V reserve allocation lottery is performed to determine whether the V reserve will be applied to the [First Chance] or [Second Chance] (step Sa111). Then, after applying the V reserve to the non-continuation condition reel for either [First Chance] or [Second Chance] determined by the V reserve allocation lottery (step Sa112), the value of the V reserve counter is cleared to "0" (step Sa113), and the sub-bonus full stop processing of FIG. 98 is terminated.

In the judgment process of step Sa110, if the value of the V-reserved counter is not "1," the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 applies V-reserved to the non-continuation condition reels in both the "First Chance" and "Second Chance" (step Sa114). Then, "2" is subtracted from the value of the V-reserved counter (step Sa115), and the sub-bonus full stop processing of FIG. 98 is terminated. Also, in the judgment process of step Sa100 described above, if a Type 2 BB game is currently being played, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the total number of medals paid out in the Type 2 BB game exceeds 11 (step Sa116). If the total number of medals exceeds 11, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 terminates Type 2 BB game (step Sa117), and the sub-bonus full stop processing of FIG. 98 is terminated. In this case, a game without a Type 2 BB condition device activated will begin from the next game. On the other hand, if the total number of medals does not exceed 11, the result of the judgment will be NO, and the main control means 100 will continue the Type 2 BB game while ending the sub-bonus full stop processing of FIG. 98.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the number of plays in the "sub-bonus" equals or exceeds the number of AT transition games determined by the AT transition game number lottery, a transition to "AT game" is always made (step Sa78, YES → Sa79 in FIG. 97). Furthermore, if the number of plays in the "sub-bonus" ends before 20 times (hereinafter, this number of plays (20 times) will also be referred to as the "minimum number of games"), a transition to "AT game" is always made (step Sa103, YES → Sa105 in FIG. 98). Therefore, if the number of AT transition games is determined to be "20" by the AT transition game number lottery, a transition to "AT game" is confirmed if the termination conditions for the "sub-bonus" are met before 20 games, and a transition to "AT game" is also confirmed if the termination conditions for the "sub-bonus" are met after 20 games or more. In other words, a transition to "AT game" is always made regardless of the number of plays in the "sub-bonus".

As a result, if the termination condition of the "sub-bonus" is stipulated by the difference in the number of coins, the transition to "AT game" may be confirmed regardless of the number of games played.
This can create anticipation regarding the transition to "AT game" and provide a sense of security by confirming the transition to "AT game." Therefore, in order to achieve such an effect, it is desirable that the value of the minimum number of games and the value of the number of games to transition to the AT can match. In this embodiment, the minimum number of games is fixed at 20 games, and the number of games to transition to the AT is determined by drawing lots for the number of games to transition to the AT in step Sa51 of FIG. 96. However, conversely, the minimum number of games may be determined by drawing lots between, for example, 20 and 80 games, and the number of games to transition to the AT may be fixed at, for example, 80 games.

<Lever processing and full stop processing in "AT games">
The game state-specific lever processing executed in step Sa4 of the game progress control processing shown in Fig. 94 when the game state is "AT game" and the game state-specific all-stop processing executed in step Sa7 will be described with reference to Fig. 99 and Fig. 100. Fig. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the AT game lever processing executed in the game state-specific lever processing described above when the game state is "AT game", and Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the AT game all-stop processing executed in the game state-specific all-stop processing described above when the game is "AT game".

(Lever processing in "AT games")
In the lever processing during AT game in Fig. 99, first, the main control means 100 judges whether or not a type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa130). If a type 2 BB game is being played, the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 ends the lever processing during AT game in Fig. 99. On the other hand, if a type 2 BB game is not being played, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game counter stored in the RWM (step Sa131).

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the push order role has been won through the internal lottery described above, i.e., whether any of the condition devices for winning - I1 to I12, J1 to J12, or K1 to K12 has been activated (step Sa132). If none of the push order roles have been won, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 terminates the lever processing during AT play shown in FIG. 99. On the other hand, if any of the push order roles have been won, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 notifies the player of the push order in which the symbol combination that will pay out the most medals will align on the winning line (step Sa133). Here, if the condition device for winning - I1 to I12 has been activated, the main control means 100 notifies the player of the push order in which the symbol combination for a 3-coin role will align on the winning line; if the condition device for winning - J1 to J12 or K1 to K12 has been activated, the main control means 100 notifies the player of the push order in which the symbol combination for a 12-coin role will align on the winning line. Then, once the above-mentioned push order has been announced, the main control means 100 ends the AT game lever processing shown in Figure 99.

(Total stop processing in "AT gaming")
In the AT game total stop processing of FIG. 100, the main control means 100 first determines whether or not a Type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa140). If a Type 2 BB game is being played, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the total number of medals paid out in the Type 2 BB game exceeds 11 (step Sa141). If the total number of medals exceeds 11, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 ends the Type 2 BB game (step Sa142), ending the AT game total stop processing of FIG. 100. In this case, a game without a Type 2 BB condition device in operation will begin from the next game. On the other hand, if the total number of medals does not exceed 11, the determination result of step Sa141 is NO, and the main control means 100 ends the AT game total stop processing of FIG. 100 while continuing the Type 2 BB game.

On the other hand, in the judgment process of step Sa140, if a type 2 BB game is not being performed, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 judges whether the value of the AT game counter stored in the RWM is "0" or not (step Sa143). If the value of the AT game counter is not "0", the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 simply ends the AT game full stop processing of Fig. 100. On the other hand, if the value of the AT game counter is "0", the judgment result is YES, and the main control means 100 transitions the game state from "AT game" to "continuation chance" (step Sa144), and then ends the AT game full stop processing of Fig. 100.

<Lever processing and full stop processing during "Continuation Chance">
When the gaming state is "continuation chance", the gaming state-specific lever processing executed in step Sa4 of the gaming progress control processing shown in Fig. 94 and the gaming state-specific all-stop processing executed in step Sa7 will be described with reference to Fig. 101 and Fig. 102. Fig. 101 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuation chance lever processing executed in the gaming state-specific lever processing described above when there is a "continuation chance", and Fig. 102 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuation chance all-stop processing executed in the gaming state-specific all-stop processing described above when there is a "continuation chance".

(Lever processing in "Continuation Chance")
In the continuation chance lever processing of Fig. 101, first, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a type 2 BB game is currently being performed (step Sa150). If a type 2 BB game is being performed, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 ends the continuation chance lever processing of Fig. 101. On the other hand, if a type 2 BB game is not being performed, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not a push order role has been won by internal lottery, that is, whether or not any of the condition devices of winning -I1 to I12, J1 to J12, K1 to K12 has been activated (step Sa151). If none of the push order roles has been won, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 ends the continuation chance lever processing of Fig. 101.

In contrast, if any of the push-order combinations is won, the determination result in step Sa151 will be YES, and the main control means 100 will determine whether or not the push-order 12-coin combination has been won, i.e., whether or not the condition devices for winning J1-J12 and K1-K12 have been activated (step Sa152). If any of the push-order 12-coin combinations is won, the determination result will be YES, and the main control means 100 will add "1" to the value of the continuation chance counter stored in the RWM (step Sa153). Here, the continuation chance counter is used to determine whether, at that point in time, the push-order 12-coin combination is won, and whether it is a "first chance" or a "second chance." In other words, the initial value of the continuation chance counter is "0," and a counter value of "1" indicates a "first chance," while a counter value of "2" indicates a "second chance."

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the continuation chance counter is "1" (step Sa154). If the value of the continuation chance counter is "1," the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the first stop reel (hereinafter also referred to as the "12-coin first stop reel") that can stop and display a 12-coin symbol combination on the pay line for the activated condition device matches one of the two continuation condition reels determined for the [First Chance] (step Sa155). If the 12-coin first stop reel matches one of the continuation condition reels, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 updates the state of the continuation flag stored in the RWM to ON (step Sa156). The state of this continuation flag is referenced when the main control means 100 determines whether to transition the game state to "AT game" or "normal" when the end condition for the "continuation chance" is met.

Next, the main control means 100 initiates a freeze effect (step Sa157). During this freeze effect, the main control means 100 reverses the rotation of the first 12-coin reel in the activated condition device (in the direction opposite to the arrow shown in FIG. 78). This freeze effect may be canceled by operating the MAX-BET switch 23. One example of this freeze effect is one in which the cancel operation is enabled after _T1 seconds (e.g., ₂ seconds) have elapsed since the freeze effect began, and an effect is performed (e.g., a reel action in which all reels start rotating but then instantly stop) to tease which reel will rotate during the first period (e.g., 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the reel effect) from _T1 to T2 seconds (e.g., 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the reel effect). At this stage, the first 12-coin reel in the activated condition device is not revealed, and no indication is given as to whether the continuation condition has been met.

Furthermore, during the second period ( _T2 to _T3 seconds after the freeze effect starts, for example, 3 to 6 seconds after the reel effect starts), a continuation effect is performed to display whether or not the continuation condition is met. For example, if the first stopped reel of the 12-coin combination matches any of the continuation condition reels, an image of a "V" mark is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and if they do not match, the image of the "V" mark is not displayed. Furthermore, during the third period ( _T3 to _T4 seconds after the freeze effect starts, for example, 6 to 9 seconds after the reel effect starts), a presentation image (push order navigation image) showing the push order to complete the 12-coin combination on the activated condition device is displayed on the image display device 11.

If the freeze effect is canceled during the first period described above, the freeze effect is terminated and a continuation effect is performed. If the freeze effect is canceled during the second period, the freeze effect is terminated, while the continuation effect is still being performed (or after the continuation effect is terminated), and the push order navigation image is displayed. If the freeze effect is canceled during the third period, the freeze effect and continuation effect are terminated, and the effect to be performed afterwards is displayed while the push order navigation image remains displayed, or only the freeze effect is canceled and the continuation effect and push order navigation image displayed on the image display device 11 are maintained (without any changes to the effects).

In the judgment process of step Sa155, if the first stop reel for the 12-coin role does not match any of the continuation condition reels, the judgment result will be NO, and step Sa157 will be processed without performing step Sa156.The main control means 100 then announces the push order that will result in the symbol combination with the highest payout number of coins being aligned on the winning line among the symbol combinations for the minor role corresponding to the activated condition device (step Sa158), and ends the lever processing at the time of the continuation chance in Figure 101.In the judgment process of step Sa152 described above, if the push order 12-coin role is not won, the judgment result will be NO, and step Sa158 will be processed.

In the judgment process of step Sa154 described above, if the value of the continuation chance counter is not "1", the judgment result will be NO, and the main control means 100 will determine whether the first stopped reel for the 12-coin role matches one of the two continuation condition reels determined for the [Second Chance] (step Sa159). If the first stopped reel for the 12-coin role matches one of the continuation condition reels, the judgment result will be YES, and the main control means 100 will perform the processing from step Sa156 described above. On the other hand, if the first stopped reel for the 12-coin role does not match one of the continuation condition reels, the judgment result will be NO, and the main control means 100 will perform the processing from step Sa157 onwards.

(Total stop processing during "Continuation Chance")
In the continuation chance time full stop processing of Fig. 102, first, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a type 2 BB game is currently being played (step Sa170). If a type 2 BB game is being played, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 terminates the continuation chance time full stop processing of Fig. 102. On the other hand, if a type 2 BB game is not being played, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the continuation flag stored in the RWM is on (step Sa171). If the continuation flag is off, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the continuation chance counter stored in the RWM is "2" (step Sa172).

If the value of the continuation chance counter is "2", the judgment result in step Sa172 will be YES, and the main control means 100 will transition the game state from "continuation chance" to "normal" (step Sa173), and end the continuation chance full stop processing in FIG. 102. Also, if the value of the continuation chance counter is not "2" in the judgment processing in step Sa172, the judgment result will be NO, and the continuation chance full stop processing in FIG. 102 will end.

In the determination process of step Sa171, if the continuation flag stored in the RWM is on, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs processing to determine the continuation condition reels for the [First Chance] and [Second Chance] to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 11 in the restarted "AT Game." First, it is determined whether the value of the continuation chance counter stored in the RWM is "1" (step Sa174). If the value of the continuation chance counter is "1," the continuation condition is met in the [First Chance]. In this case, the determination result of step Sa174 is YES, and the continuation condition reel for the [Second Chance] is set as the continuation condition reel for the [First Chance] to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 11 in the next "AT Game" (step Sa175). Then, the continuation condition reel lottery described above is performed to determine the continuation condition reel for the [Second Chance] (step Sa176).

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the V reservation counter stored in the RWM is "1" or greater (step Sa177). If the value of the V reservation counter is "1" or greater, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the V reservation counter stored in the RWM (step Sa178) and applies V reservation to the non-continuation condition reel in the [Second Chance] (step Sa179). As a result, a "V" mark is displayed in the square corresponding to the non-continuation condition reel in the [Second Chance] displayed in the right display area G2 of the display screen of the image display device 11 shown in Figure 93.

Then, the main control means 100 changes the game mode from "continuation chance" to "AT game" (step Sa180) and ends the continuation chance full stop processing of FIG. 102. Also, in the judgment processing of step Sa177, if the value of the pending counter is "0", the judgment result will be NO, and the process will proceed to step Sa180, change the game mode from "continuation chance" to "AT game", and then end the continuation chance full stop processing of FIG. 102.

In the determination process of step Sa174, if the value of the continuation chance counter stored in the RWM is not "1" (in this case, the value of the continuation chance counter is "2"), the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 performs a continuation condition reel lottery to determine the continuation condition reel for the above-mentioned [First Chance] and [Second Chance] (step Sa181). Next, it is determined whether the value of the V reservation counter stored in the RWM is "1" (step Sa182). If the value of the V reservation counter is "1", the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs a V reservation allocation lottery to determine whether the V reservation will be applied to [First Chance] or [Second Chance] (step Sa183). Then, after applying the V reservation to the non-continuation condition reel for [First Chance] or [Second Chance] determined by the V reservation allocation lottery (step Sa184), the value of the V reservation counter is cleared to "0" (step Sa185). After that, the process proceeds to step Sa180, the game state is changed from "continuation chance" to "AT game", and then the continuation chance full stop process in FIG. 102 is terminated.

In the judgment process of step Sa182, it is determined whether the value of the V reservation counter stored in the RWM is "1" (step Sa182). If the value of the V reservation counter is not "1", the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 then determines whether the value of the V reservation counter is "2" or greater (step Sa186). If the value of the V reservation counter is not "2" or greater, the judgment result is NO, and the main control means 100 proceeds directly to the processing of step Sa180, transitions the game state from "continuation chance" to "AT game", and then terminates the continuation chance full stop processing of FIG. 102.

In contrast, if the value of the V reservation counter is "2" or greater in the judgment process of step Sa186, the judgment result will be YES, and the main control means 100 will apply V reservation to the non-continuation condition reels in both the [First Chance] and [Second Chance] (step Sa187). Then, after subtracting "2" from the value of the V reservation counter (step Sa188), the process will proceed to step Sa180, and the game state will be changed from "Continuation Chance" to "AT Game", after which the continuation chance full stop processing of FIG. 102 will be terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a 12-coin push-order combination is won during the "Continuation Chance" and the first stop reel in the push-order where the 12-coin combination aligns on the winning line matches one of two continuation condition reels previously determined by lottery, the game will transition back to "AT Game." This increases the probability that gameplay will continue in "AT Game," which is advantageous for the player, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, if a V reserve is acquired, the continuation of gameplay in "AT Game" is confirmed, and the V reserve can be used as compensation for the player (for example, a V reserve acquisition lottery performed in step Sa47 of the normal full-stop processing in FIG. 96) or as a bonus to be awarded to the player (for example, a V reserve acquisition lottery performed in step Sa81 of the sub-bonus lever processing in FIG. 97).

[Third embodiment]
The slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "third embodiment slot machine") will be described below with additional reference to Figures 103 to 119. Below, the characteristics of the third embodiment slot machine will be mainly described. The characteristics described below are not limited to the third embodiment slot machine, but can be combined with other embodiments. The third embodiment slot machine has a basic configuration that is common to or similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes, such as the winning combination determination process and reel control process, described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the third embodiment slot machine in the same manner or with some modifications to the process content.

The following describes the characteristic configuration of the slot machine according to this embodiment. In the following description, the "stop operation" of the stop switch refers to the operation of pressing the stop switch corresponding to the reel that is spinning.
<<Push order navigation effect>>
In this embodiment, during AT play, the image display device 11 and speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b are used to produce push order navigation effects. These push order navigation effects will be explained below with reference to Figures 103 to 105. The push order navigation effects are controlled by the sub-control board 70, and when the push order navigation effects are performed, push order navigation is also performed using the push order indicator (e.g., corresponding to the payout number display lamp 46j in Figure 1) controlled by the main control board 60.

<Changes in push order navigation effects as you play>
First, referring to FIG. 103, the changes in the image displayed on the screen 11a of the image display device 11 and the sounds output from the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b that accompany game operations during the execution of the push order navigation effect will be described. Here, the push order navigation effect shown in FIG. 103 instructs the player to press the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in order (left → center → right). In this embodiment, to avoid redundant description, hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the term "stop switch" refers to the "stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c," and the term "speaker" refers to the "speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b."

When the push order navigation effect is performed during AT play, the player first inserts the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 25. As shown in FIG. 103(a), numbers indicating the order in which to push the stop switches are displayed on the lower left, lower center, and lower right of the screen 11a, superimposed on the effect image ATP during AT play displayed on the screen 11a, and the type of stop switch to be operated first is output as audio from the speaker. Here, the number displayed on the lower left side of the effect image ATP indicates the order in which to stop the left stop switch 26a, the number displayed in the lower center of the effect image ATP indicates the order in which to stop the middle stop switch 26b, and the number displayed on the lower right side of the effect image ATP indicates the order in which to stop the right stop switch 26c.

Here, the images of numbers indicating the order in which to operate each stop switch are called navigation number images NF, and the navigation number images NF corresponding to each stop switch are displayed on screen 11a superimposed on the navigation background image NB. The navigation number image NF showing the number "1" and its navigation background image NB are collectively called the "first stop instruction image," the navigation number image NF showing the number "2" and its navigation background image NB are collectively called the "second stop instruction image," and the navigation number image NF showing the number "3" and its navigation background image NB are collectively called the "third stop instruction image." Furthermore, when referring to the first to third stop instruction images without distinction, they are simply called "stop instruction images."

The size of each stop instruction image is such that the first stop instruction image is the largest, the second stop instruction image is the second largest, and the third stop instruction image is the smallest. The second and third stop instruction images also have transparency, with the third stop instruction image being more transparent than the second stop instruction image. In this way, by displaying the first stop instruction image as the largest and without transparency, the visibility of the first stop instruction image is improved. This display mode for improving visibility is called "highlighted display."

In order to avoid cluttering the illustration, the reference numerals for the navigation numeral images NF and navigation background images NB that respectively constitute the second stop instruction image and the third stop instruction image have been omitted in Figure 103(a). For the same reason, the reference numerals for the navigation numeral images NF and navigation background images NB that constitute each stop instruction image in Figures 103(b) to (e) have also been omitted.

In the push order navigation effect that instructs buttons to be pressed in order, the image shown in Figure 103(a) is displayed on screen 11a, and the speaker outputs the voice "Left!" (voice indicating that the first stop operation is the left stop switch 26a). The push order navigation effect image displayed on screen 11a displays the first stop instruction image on the lower left side of screen 11a, the second stop instruction image in the lower center, and the third stop instruction image on the lower right side.

When the start lever 25 is operated, all reels start to rotate, and the rotation speed of all reels becomes constant (for example, 79.90 rpm), and when the indexes provided on each reel are all detected by the corresponding index sensors (reel sensors), the stop switch becomes active. At this time, the image of the push order navigation effect displayed on the image 11a is the navigation number image NF of the first to third stop instruction images as shown in Figure 103(b).
The transparency of the second and third stop instruction images becomes 0, and they are displayed opaque (the effect image ATP during AT play cannot be seen through) like the first stop instruction image.

When the player performs the first stop operation on the left stop switch 26a in this state, the image shown in Figure 103(c) is displayed on the screen 11a, and the speaker outputs the sound "It's in the middle!" (a sound indicating that the second stop operation is the middle stop switch 26b). In the image of the push order navigation effect displayed on the screen 11a, the first stop instruction image is erased and the second stop instruction image is highlighted. Furthermore, the display mode of the third stop instruction image is displayed with the same size and transparency as the second stop instruction image in Figure 103(a) described above.

Next, when the player performs the second stop operation on the middle stop switch 26b, the image shown in Figure 103(d) is displayed on the screen 11a, and the speaker outputs the sound "Right!" (a sound indicating that the third stop operation is the right stop switch 26c). In the image of the push order navigation effect displayed on the screen 11a, the second stop instruction image is erased and the third stop instruction image is highlighted. Finally, when the player performs the third stop operation on the right stop switch 26c, the second stop instruction image is erased as shown in Figure 103(e), and the speaker outputs the sound "Yessss!" (a sound indicating that the stop switches have been stopped in the push order instructed by the push order navigation effect).

In the above-mentioned push order navigation effect, the display mode of each stop instruction image was changed when the stop operation of the stop switch was enabled (Figure 103 (b)), but this change in display mode may be omitted. Furthermore, while the above-mentioned push order navigation effect instructed the player to press one of six possible push orders (a so-called six-option push order), the push order navigation effect may also instruct the player to press one of 12 possible push orders. In the case of a push order navigation effect instructing a 12-option push order, for example, one of six possible push orders is instructed, and which of two symbols (one of which is positioned outside the reel-in control range of the other symbol) should be pressed by eye on the reel corresponding to the stop switch to be first stopped is instructed (6 push orders x 2 types of eye-pressing symbols = 12 possibilities). In this case, if the type of stop switch operated for the first stop and the symbol pressed by the eye match the type of stop switch operated for the second stop, the symbol combination with the highest payout number of coins among the symbol combinations corresponding to the activated condition device will be lined up, and if they do not match, a symbol combination with a one-coin symbol or a losing symbol will be lined up.

Another example of a push order navigation effect that indicates one of 12 possible push orders is to indicate one of six possible push orders, as well as which of two symbols (one of which is positioned outside the reel pull control range of the other) to press by sight on the reel corresponding to the stop switch to be operated for the third stop. In this case, if the type of stop switch operated for the first and second stop operations and the symbol pressed by sight in the third stop operation match the content instructed by the push order navigation effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device that results in the small winning combination with the highest payout number of coins will be lined up; if they do not match, a symbol combination resulting in a one-coin winning combination or a losing combination will be lined up.

It may also be a push order navigation effect that indicates one of 24 possible push orders. The 24 possible push orders are push orders possible on a slot machine that has four reels and four stop switches corresponding to each reel. In other words, there are four types of stop switches that can be operated to perform the first stop, three types of stop switches that can be operated to perform the second stop, and two types of stop switches that can be operated to perform the third stop, so there are 4 x 3 x 2 = 24 possible push orders. As a result, one of the 24 possible push orders is indicated by the push order navigation effect.

<Push order navigation effect when the push order is successful or when the push order is unsuccessful>
In this embodiment, when a stop switch is operated to stop while the push order navigation effect is being executed, each stop instruction image displayed on the screen 11a shows a predetermined movement (action) depending on whether the stop switch operated to stop matches the push order instructed by the push order navigation effect. Here, the movement of the stop instruction image when the stop switch operated to stop follows the push order instructed by the push order navigation effect (the stop operation is successful) is called a "successful action," and the movement of the stop instruction image when it does not follow the order (the stop operation is unsuccessful) is called a "failed action."

(Successful action)
The successful action in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 104. The successful action shown in this figure is executed when the first stop operation is performed on the left stop switch 36a while the push order navigation display instructs pressing buttons in order (left → center → right). Note that this figure does not show the changes in the display mode of the first to third stop instruction images when the stop operation of the stop switch is enabled (see Figure 103(b)).

When a player inserts the required number of medals and operates the start lever 25, as shown in Figure 104(a), a first stop instruction image is displayed on the lower left side of the screen 11a, a second stop instruction image is displayed in the lower center, and a third stop instruction image is displayed on the lower right side. The speaker also outputs the sound "Left!". Then, after the stop switch stop operation is enabled, if the player presses the left stop switch 26a, as shown in Figure 104(b), as a successful action, the navigation number image NF of the first stop instruction image turns red, and the navigation background image NB moves as if it is exploding before disappearing. The speaker also outputs the sound "Middle!", indicating that the stop switch to be operated for the second stop is the middle stop switch 26b. The sound ("Middle!") output when the first stop operation follows the push order indicated by the executed push order navigation effect is also referred to as the "success sound."

After the success action and success sound are executed and output, the second stop instruction image is highlighted as shown in Figure 104 (c), and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change to the same as those of the second stop instruction image shown in Figures 104 (a) and (b). Thereafter, when the middle stop switch 26b is operated to the second stop position, a success action is executed for the second stop instruction image, and the success sound "Right!" is output. Furthermore, when the right stop switch 26c is operated to the third stop position, a success action is executed for the third stop instruction image. Here, when the third stop operation is performed, the third stop instruction image is erased and the sound "Yes!" shown in Figure 103 (e) is output instead of the success sound.

In the example of the successful action described above, after the successful action of the first stop instruction image was performed, the second stop instruction image was highlighted and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image was changed. However, the second stop instruction image may be highlighted and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image may be changed simultaneously with the successful action of the first stop instruction image.

(Failure Action)
The failure action in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 105. The failure action shown in this figure is executed when the left stop switch 26a is mistakenly operated to the first stop when the push order navigation effect instructs reverse pushes (right → center → left). Note that this figure also omits the illustration of the changes in the display mode of the first to third stop instruction images when the stop operation of the stop switch is enabled (see Figure 103(b)).

When a player inserts a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 25, the game starts as shown in FIG.
105(a), the third stop instruction image is displayed on the lower left side of the screen 11a, the second stop instruction image is displayed in the lower center, and the first stop instruction image is displayed on the lower right side. Furthermore, a voice message saying "Right!" is output from the speaker. If the player accidentally presses the left stop switch 26a after the stop switch operation has been enabled, a failure action occurs, and the first to third stop instruction images are each replaced with a smoky image, and a failure voice message saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker, as shown in FIG. 105(b).

Then, the smoke images displayed in the positions of the first to third stop instruction images fade out, and only the effect image ATP during AT play is displayed, as shown in Figure 105(c). However, it goes without saying that the game continues, and the center reel 3b and right reel 3c are still spinning.

In the above-mentioned failure action, when the stop switches are pressed in a different order from the executed push order navigation effect, all stop instruction images displayed at that time perform a failure action (switching to an image of smoke and fading out). However, when a stop switch is pressed in a different order from the instructed order, only the stop instruction image corresponding to that stop switch performs the failure action, and then the remaining stop instruction images are erased.

<Press order guidance when power is restored>
Next, referring to Figures 106 to 112, we will explain what state the push order navigation effect will be in when the power is cut off during the push order navigation effect and then power is turned back on and restored. In Figures 106 to 112, the diagram shown at the top of each diagram shows the events that occurred during play in chronological order, and below that shows the display on screen 11a and the audio output from the speaker for the main events that occurred.

First, referring to Figure 106, we will explain the state of the push order navigation effect when the first stop operation is successful in a game in which the push order navigation effect is executed, the power is cut off (also simply referred to as a "power outage") before the second stop operation is performed, and then the power is restored. The following explanation also uses as an example a case in which the push order navigation effect instructs players to press buttons in order.

First, when the start lever 25 is operated, a push order navigation effect is executed, instructing players to press the reels in order, as shown in Figure 106(a). Then, after the stop switch stop operation is enabled, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left stop switch 26a, a success action is performed on the first stop instruction image, as shown in Figure 106(b), and a success sound, "It's in the middle!", is output from the speaker. Then, as shown in Figure 106(c), the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change. At this time, the center reel 3b and right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to spin.

If a power outage occurs before the second stop operation is performed and power is then restored, the center reel 3b and right reel 3c, which were spinning before the power outage, will start spinning again, and the success action of the first stop instruction image will be performed on the screen 11a, as shown in Figure 106(d). In response, no success sound such as "It's in!" will be output. Then, as shown in Figure 106(e), the second stop instruction image will be highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image will change, and the game will enter a standby state for the second stop operation.

In Fig. 106(d), the speaker does not output a success sound such as "It's on!" when power is restored, but a success sound may be output instead. Also, in the above description, when power is restored, a success action for the first stop instruction image is performed, and then the second stop instruction image is highlighted and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image is changed (see Figs. 106(d) and (e)). However, as shown in Fig. 106(f), for example, the success action for the first stop instruction image, the highlighting of the second stop instruction image, and the change in size and transparency of the third stop instruction image may be performed at the same time, and then only the first stop instruction image may be erased.

Next, referring to Figure 107, we will explain the state of the push order navigation effect when the first stop operation fails during a game in which a push order navigation effect instructing players to press buttons in order is executed, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation is performed, and then power is restored. First, when the start lever 25 is operated, the push order navigation effect instructing players to press buttons in order is executed, as shown in Figure 107(a). Then, after the stop switch stop operation is enabled, when the player performs the first stop operation on the middle stop switch 26b, a failure action of the first to third stop instruction images is executed, as shown in Figure 107(b), and after a failure sound such as "What are you doing!" is output from the speaker, the push order navigation effect ends, as shown in Figure 107(c). At this time, the left reel 3a and right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to spin.

Here, if a power outage occurs before the second stop operation is performed and power is subsequently restored, the left reel 3a and right reel 3c that were spinning before the power outage will begin spinning again, but as shown in Figure 107(d), the push order navigation effect will not resume on screen 11a, and only the effect image ATP executed during AT play will be displayed.

In this way, if a power outage occurs when the first stop operation is successful during a game in which the push order navigation effect is being performed, a success action will be performed on the first stop instruction image when power is restored and the second stop instruction image will be highlighted. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the push order navigation effect, the player will be able to understand the details of the most recent stop operation performed before the power outage when power is restored. On the other hand, if the most recent stop operation performed before the power outage failed, the push order navigation effect will not resume when power is restored, which reduces the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation for playing immediately after power is restored.

In the case of a power outage restoring while the push order navigation effect shown in Figure 107(a) is being executed, if power is restored after the stop operation has failed due to the first stop operation of the middle stop switch 26b, instead of executing the push order navigation effect as shown in Figure 107(d), it is possible to execute a failure action as shown in Figure 107(e) and then terminate the push order navigation effect as shown in Figure 107(f). With this configuration, if the most recent stop operation performed before the power outage failed, a failure action will be executed when the power is restored, so it is possible to know that the push order navigation effect was executed before the power outage and to understand that the most recent stop operation before the power outage failed.

Next, Figures 106 and 107 above explain what happens when power is restored after the first stop operation is performed in a game in which the push order navigation effect is executed. Next, with reference to Figures 108 and 109, we will explain the state of the push order navigation effect when power is restored after the first stop operation is successful and the second stop operation is performed, but before the third stop operation is performed. Also, the following explanation takes as an example a case in which the push order navigation effect instructs buttons to be pressed in order.

First, as shown in Figure 108(a), when the start lever 25 is operated, a push order navigation effect is executed, instructing players to push the reels in order. Then, after the stop switch stop operation is enabled, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left stop switch 26a, a success action of the first stop instruction image is performed, and after a success sound such as "It's in the middle!" is output from the speaker, the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change (not shown). At this time, the center reel 3b and right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to spin.

Next, when the player operates the middle stop switch 26b to perform the second stop operation, the success action of the second stop instruction image is performed as shown in Figure 109(b), and the success sound "Right!" is output from the speaker, after which the third stop instruction image is highlighted as shown in Figure 109(c). Furthermore, the last remaining right reel 3c continues to spin.

If a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed and power is then restored, the right reel 3c, which was spinning before the power outage, will start spinning again, and the success action of the second stop instruction image will be performed on the screen 11a, as shown in Figure 108(d). However, the success sound "Right!" will not be output. Then, as shown in Figure 108(e), the third stop instruction image will be highlighted, and the game will enter a standby state for the third stop operation.

In this way, if a power outage occurs when the first and second stop operations are successful during a game in which the push order navigation effect is being performed, the successful action for the first stop instruction image will not be performed when power is restored, but rather the successful action for the second stop instruction image will be performed before the third stop instruction image is highlighted. Here, the successful action for the second stop instruction image is performed assuming that the first stop operation is successful. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the push order navigation effect, by providing the player with as simplified a version of the information necessary when power is restored as possible, the player will be able to understand the progress of the game at the time of the power outage and the details of the most recent stop operation performed before the power outage when power is restored.

In Figure 108(d), the speaker does not output a success sound such as "Turn right!" when power is restored, but it may be configured to output a success sound. Also, in the above explanation, when power is restored, the third stop instruction image is highlighted after the success action of the second stop instruction image is performed (see Figures 108(d) and (e)). However, as shown in Figure 108(f), for example, the success action of the second stop instruction image and the highlighting of the third stop instruction image may be performed at the same time, and then only the second stop instruction image may be erased.

In the example shown in FIG. 108, when power is restored, the success action of the second stop instruction image is performed without performing the success action of the first stop instruction image. However, as shown in FIG. 109, for example, when power is restored, the success action of the first stop instruction image may be performed first. That is, after the second stop operation is successful, a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed. When power is subsequently restored, the right reel 3c, which was spinning before the power outage, begins spinning again, and the success action of the first stop instruction image is performed on the screen 11a as shown in FIG. 109(a). However, the success sound "Right!" is not output. Next, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the first stop display is erased, the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image are changed. Then, the success action of the second stop instruction image is performed as shown in FIG. 109(c). After that, the third stop instruction image is highlighted as shown in FIG. 109(d), and the system enters a standby state for the third stop operation.

In this way, if a power outage occurs when the first and second stop operations are successful in a game in which the push order navigation effect is being performed, the successful action for the first stop instruction image is not performed when power is restored, but rather the successful action for the second stop instruction image is performed before the third stop instruction image is highlighted. Here, the successful action for the second stop instruction image being performed when power is restored means that the first stop operation was successful at least before the power outage occurred. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the push order navigation effect, by providing the player with the information necessary when power is restored in as simplified a form as possible, the player can grasp the status of the game progress at the time of the power outage and the details of the most recent stop operation performed before the power outage when power is restored.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 109, by resuming the push order navigation presentation when power is restored and re-displaying the successful action from the first stop operation, the sequence of stop operations in the game where the power outage occurred can be clearly understood, and the remaining stop operations can be smoothly resumed after the error is resolved. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 109, the images are displayed in the following order: successful action from the first stop operation → highlighted display of the second stop instruction image → successful action from the second stop operation → highlighted display of the third stop instruction image. However, when power is restored, the successful actions from the first and second stop operations and the highlighted display of the third stop instruction image can also be displayed simultaneously. In this case, the load on image processing when power is restored can be reduced, and the player can understand at a glance the flow of the game up until the power outage occurred.

In Figure 109 above, we explained the case where the first stop operation was successful, then the second stop operation was successful, and then a power outage occurred before the third stop operation was performed. Next, with reference to Figure 110, we will explain the case where the first stop operation was successful but the second stop operation failed, and then a power outage occurred before the third stop operation was performed. Note that the following explanation uses an example where the push order navigation instructs sequential scissors pressing (left → right → center).

First, when the start lever 25 is operated, a push order navigation effect is executed, instructing the player to press the reels in order. In this push order navigation effect, a first stop instruction image is displayed on the lower left side of the screen 11a, a third stop instruction image is displayed in the lower center, and a second stop instruction image is displayed on the lower right side. Additionally, a sound saying "Left!" is output from the speaker (not shown). After the stop switch stop operation is enabled, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left stop switch 26a, as shown in FIG. 109(a), a success action of the first stop instruction image is performed, and the success sound "Right!" is output from the speaker. Then, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change. At this time, the center reel 3b and right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to spin.

Next, when the player performs the second stop operation on the center stop switch 26b, as shown in Figure 109(c), a failure action is performed for the displayed second and third stop instruction images, and a failure sound, "What are you doing?", is output from the speaker, after which the push order navigation effect ends. Here, a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, and when power is subsequently restored, the right reel 3c, which was spinning before the power outage, begins spinning again. Then, as shown in Figure 110(d), a success action is performed for the first stop instruction image on the screen 11a, but the success sound, "It's in the middle!", is not output. After that, as shown in Figure 110(e), a failure sound is not output, and a failure action is performed for the second and third stop instruction images, after which the push order navigation effect ends, as shown in Figure 110(f).

In this way, if a power outage occurs during a game in which the push order navigation effect is being performed and the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation is unsuccessful, the success action of the first stop instruction image will be performed when the power is restored, followed by the success action of the second stop instruction image, after which the push order navigation effect will end. Therefore, the player can clearly grasp at a glance the progress of the game at the time of the power outage, and which stop switches were successfully and unsuccessfully stopped.

In the example shown in Figure 110, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, the push order navigation effect is resumed when the power is restored. However, as in the case shown in Figure 107(d), the push order navigation effect does not have to be resumed when the power is restored. In this way, if the most recent stop operation performed before the power outage failed, the push order navigation effect is not resumed when the power is restored, which reduces the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation for playing immediately after the power is restored.

In addition, when a power outage occurs during the execution of the push order navigation effect, the push order navigation effect that is executed when power is restored may also be executed in the following cases (1) to (10) in addition to the above.

(1) If a power outage occurs after all reels have started spinning but before the first stop operation is performed, when power is restored, the first stop instruction image, second stop instruction image, and third stop instruction image (see FIG. 103(a)) that were displayed when the start lever was operated will be displayed again. Furthermore, when the images are redisplayed, the type of stop switch that should be used for the first stop operation may be output again via audio, and the push order navigation effect may then be resumed, or the push order navigation effect may be resumed without outputting the type of stop switch that should be used for the first stop operation via audio (in this case, the audio push order instructions are resumed after the first stop operation). This configuration ensures that the push order navigation effect resumes again from the first stop operation when power is restored, thereby reducing the risk that the player will press the stop switch in the wrong order and miss out on a favorable game result during play after power is restored.

If a power outage occurs after all reels have started spinning but before the first stop operation is performed, the type of stop switch that should be used for the first stop operation will be output again via voice when power is restored. However, if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is performed (including cases (2) to (9) described below), the push order navigation effect may be resumed without audio indication of the type of stop switch that should be used next when power is restored. Here, if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation but before the second stop operation, the "type of stop switch that should be used next" will be the type of stop switch that should be used for the second stop operation. Also, if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation but before the third stop operation, it will be the type of stop switch that should be used for the third stop operation.

(2) If a power outage occurs after the first stop operation fails and before the second stop operation is performed, a failure action is executed when power is restored and the push order navigation effect ends. Also, if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is performed following the first stop operation failure and before the third stop operation is performed, a failure action is executed when power is restored and the push order navigation effect ends. With this configuration, if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation fails and before the second stop operation, or if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is performed in a game in which the first stop operation fails and before the third stop operation, a failure action is executed when power is restored. Therefore, when play resumes after power is restored, the player can clearly understand that the stop operation failed in the game in which the push order navigation effect was executed, and can recognize that there is no need to pay attention to the order in which the remaining stop switches are pressed.

(3) If a power outage occurs after the first stop operation fails but before the second stop operation is performed, the push order navigation effect will end without executing a failure action when power is restored. However, if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is performed following the first stop operation failure but before the third stop operation is performed, a failure action will be executed when power is restored and then the push order navigation effect will end. With this configuration, if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation fails but before the second stop operation, a failure action will not be executed when power is restored, thereby reducing the risk of a decrease in the player's expectations or motivation to play in play after power is restored. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is performed but before the third stop operation in a game in which the first stop operation fails, a failure action will be executed when power is restored, thereby achieving the effect of allowing the player to clearly understand that the stop operation failed in a game in which the push order navigation effect was executed when power was restored.

(4) If a power outage occurs after the first stop operation fails but before the second stop operation is performed, a failure action is executed when power is restored and the push order navigation effect ends. However, if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is performed following the first stop operation failure but before the third stop operation is performed, the push order navigation effect ends without executing a failure action when power is restored. With this configuration, if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation fails but before the second stop operation, a failure action is executed when power is restored. This allows the player to clearly understand that the stop operation failed in a game in which the push order navigation effect was performed when power is restored, and to recognize that there is no need to pay attention to the order in which the remaining stop switches are pressed. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is performed but before the third stop operation in a game in which the first stop operation fails, a failure action is not executed when power is restored, which has the effect of reducing the risk of a decrease in the player's expectations and motivation to play in games after power is restored.

(5) In both cases where a power outage occurs after the first stop operation fails but before the second stop operation is performed, and where a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is performed following the first stop operation failure but before the third stop operation is performed, the push order navigation presentation ends without executing a failure action when power is restored. With this configuration, if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation fails but before the second stop operation, or if a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is performed in a game where the first stop operation fails but before the third stop operation, no failure action is executed when power is restored, thereby achieving the effect of reducing the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play in the game after power is restored.

(6) If a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails and before the third stop operation is performed, a failure action is executed when power is restored and the push order navigation effect is terminated. Also, if a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails and then the third stop operation is performed and before it is possible to insert a coin for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), a failure action is executed when power is restored and the push order navigation effect is terminated. With this configuration, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, or if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails and then a power outage occurs after the third stop operation is performed and before it is possible to insert a coin for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), a failure action is executed when power is restored. This has the effect of allowing the player to clearly understand that they failed the stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation effect was executed when gameplay resumes after power is restored.

(7) If the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, the push order navigation presentation will end without executing a failure action when power is restored. However, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then a power outage occurs after the third stop operation is performed, and before it is possible to insert a coin for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), then a failure action will be executed when power is restored and then the push order navigation presentation will end. With this configuration, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, then a failure action will not be executed when power is restored, thereby reducing the risk of a decrease in the player's expectations or motivation to play during play after power is restored. Furthermore, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then the third stop operation is performed, and then a power outage occurs before it becomes possible to insert a coin for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), a failure action will be executed when power is restored, which has the effect of allowing the player to clearly understand that the stop operation failed in the game in which the push order navigation effect was executed when power is restored.

(8) If the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed, a failure action is executed when power is restored and then the push order navigation effect ends. However, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then a power outage occurs after the third stop operation is performed, and before it becomes possible to insert a coin for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), then the push order navigation effect ends without executing a failure action when power is restored. With this configuration, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, a failure action is executed when power is restored, so the player can clearly understand that the stop operation failed in the game in which the push order navigation effect was executed when power was restored. Furthermore, if the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails, and then the third stop operation is performed, and then a power outage occurs before it becomes possible to insert a medal for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), no failure action will be executed when power is restored, thereby reducing the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play when power is restored.

(9) In both cases where a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails and before the third stop operation is performed, or where a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails and then the third stop operation is performed, but before it is possible to insert a medal for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), the push order navigation presentation ends without executing a failure action when power is restored. With this configuration, in cases where a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails and before the third stop operation, or where a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is successful but the second stop operation fails and then the third stop operation is performed, but before it is possible to insert a medal for the next game (or before the start lever is operated if the next game is a replay), no failure action is executed when power is restored, thereby achieving the effect of reducing the risk of lowering the player's expectations and motivation to play during play after power is restored.

(10) If a power outage occurs after the first stop operation through the third stop operation are successfully performed and then restored, when power is restored, the push order navigation effect will be displayed in the following order: successful action for the first stop operation → highlighted display of the second stop instruction image → successful action for the second stop operation → highlighted display of the third stop instruction image → successful action for the third stop operation. Note that the successful actions for the first stop operation through the third stop operation may be executed simultaneously (in this case, the highlighting of each stop instruction image is omitted). With this configuration, the successful actions from the first stop operation through the third stop operation are executed again when power is restored, allowing the player to once again experience the satisfaction and sense of accomplishment of having achieved a favorable gaming result by operating the stop switches in the order instructed by the push order navigation effect, thereby increasing the player's motivation and interest in the game.

<Push order navigation effect when recovering from an error>
Next, referring to Figure 111, we will explain what state the push order navigation effect will be in when a reversible error occurs during the push order effect, the cause of the error is then eliminated, and the error is recovered by operating the reset switch. This figure explains the state of the push order navigation effect when the first stop operation is successful in a game in which the push order navigation effect is executed, and a reversible error occurs before the second stop operation is performed, and then the error is recovered. In addition, the following explanation takes as an example a case in which the push order navigation effect instructs players to press buttons in order.

First, when the start lever 25 is operated, a push order navigation effect is executed, instructing players to push the reels in order, as shown in FIG. 111(a). Then, after the stop switch stop operation is enabled, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left stop switch 26a, a success action is performed on the first stop instruction image, as shown in FIG. 111(b), and a success sound, "It's in the middle!", is output from the speaker. Then, as shown in FIG. 111(c), the second stop instruction image is highlighted, and the size and transparency of the third stop instruction image change. At this time, the center reel 3b and right reel 3c, which were not stopped, continue to spin.

Here, if a recoverable error occurs before the second stop operation is performed, as shown in Figure 111 (d), the image of the effect during AT play and the image of the push order navigation effect displayed on screen 11a will be replaced with an image of an error message (error screen) stating "An error has occurred. Please call an attendant." In addition, a voice message saying "An error has occurred" will be output from the speaker. The image of the effect during AT play and the image of the push order navigation effect displayed on screen 11a (hereinafter collectively referred to as "effect images") and the image of the error screen are each displayed on different layers.

The layer of the error screen image (error screen layer) is set higher than the layer of the effect images (effect image layer), and the error screen layer is displayed superimposed on the effect image layer. Therefore, conceptually, even while the error screen shown in Figure 111 (d) is displayed, the effect images during AT play and the images of the push order navigation effect continue to be displayed on the effect image layer, but these effect images are obscured by the error screen.

After the error screen is displayed, if the cause of the error is removed and the error is recovered, the error screen display will be erased, and the presentation screen (see Figure 111(c)) that was previously hidden by the error screen will be displayed again on screen 11a, as shown in Figure 111(e). In other words, when a recoverable error is recovered from, a push order navigation presentation in which the second stop instruction image is highlighted will be displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the first stop operation was successful and to understand the details of the most recent stop operation performed before the error occurred.

In contrast to the example shown in Figure 111(e), the push order navigation presentation may be resumed when the error is resolved, and the successful action from the first stop operation may be displayed again. In this case, it is possible to clearly understand the sequence of stop operations in a game in which an error occurred, and to smoothly resume the remaining stop operations after the error is resolved.

<Push order navigation effect when power is interrupted and restored when a rare role is won>
In the above-mentioned Figures 103 to 111, an example was given of the push order navigation effect that is executed when a condition device that pays out the most medals when the stop switch is operated in a specific push order, such as the condition device for winning - J1 to J12 in the second embodiment (see Figure 88), is activated by an internal lottery.Next, with reference to Figure 112, an explanation will be given of the push order navigation effect that is executed when a condition device for a rare role, such as winning - A to E in the second embodiment, is activated by an internal lottery.

First, when the start lever 25 is operated and the rare role condition device is activated by an internal lottery, as shown in Figure 112 (a), rare role winning images consisting of a navigation background image NB and a rare role image NR indicating that the rare role condition device has been activated are displayed on the lower left, lower center, and lower right sides of the screen 11a. Note that these three rare role winning images are the same size, and none of them have transparency. In this way, by displaying all rare role winning images in the same way, it is shown that the order in which buttons are pressed does not matter (the number of medals paid out will not differ depending on the order in which buttons are pressed).

After the stop switch stop operation is enabled, if the player performs the first stop operation, for example, on the middle stop switch 26b, the rare role winning image displayed in the lower center of the screen 11a performs a success action, as shown in FIG. 112(b). That is, the rare role winning image NR turns red, and its navigation background image NB moves as if it is exploding, and then disappears. Note that in the push order navigation performance when the rare role condition device is activated, no success sound is output from the speaker. Next, if the player performs the second stop operation, for example, on the left stop switch 26a, the rare role winning image displayed in the lower left of the screen 11a performs a success action, as shown in FIG. 112(c).

Here, if a power outage occurs before the third stop operation is performed and power is subsequently restored, the right reel 3c, which was spinning before the power outage, will begin spinning again, and a success action will be performed for the rare winning image displayed in the lower center of screen 11a (corresponding to the middle stop switch 26b, which was operated for the first stop), as shown in Figure 112(d). Next, a success action will be performed for the rare winning image displayed in the lower left side of screen 11a (corresponding to the left stop switch 26a, which was operated for the second stop), as shown in Figure 112(e), and then the third stop instruction image will be highlighted and the system will enter a standby state for the third stop operation, as shown in Figure 112(f).

In this way, with the push order navigation effect of this embodiment, even if a power outage occurs during a game in which the rare role condition device is activated, when power is restored, the progress of the game up until the power outage can be understood. Note that, in the push order navigation effect when a rare role is won, the action shown in Figures 112(b) and 112(c) may not be performed each time a stop switch is stopped, and the rare role winning images corresponding to the stopped stop switch may simply be erased sequentially. In this case, when power is restored after a power outage, the rare role winning images will be erased in the order in which they were stopped, without performing the action associated with the stop operation shown in Figures 112(d) and 112(e). Alternatively, the image shown in Figure 112(a) may continue to be displayed until a third stop operation is performed, at which point all rare role winning images may be erased simultaneously. In this case, when power is restored after a power outage, the image shown in Figure 112(a) may be redisplayed, and then all rare role winning images may be erased simultaneously, or the push order navigation effect for a rare role winning may not be executed when power is restored.

<Duplicate operation of multiple main switches>
Next, with reference to Figures 113 to 117, we will explain how the operation of the main switches is accepted when multiple main switches are operated (pressed). Here, the main switch refers to a switch that outputs an on/off signal to the main control board 60, and the main control means 100 controls the progress of the game in response to the on/off signal. Specifically, the 1-BET switch 22, the MAX-BET switch 23, the settlement switch 24, the start lever 25, and the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c shown in Figures 1 and 2 correspond to the main switches. Note that, hereinafter, when the 1-BET switch 22 and the MAX-BET switch 23 are collectively referred to, they will be simply referred to as "BET switches."

On the other hand, a switch that outputs an on/off signal to the sub-control board 70, and causes the sub-control means 200 to control the effects and other aspects in response to that on/off signal, is called a sub-switch. Specifically, the select button 54 and enter button 55 shown in Figures 1 and 2 correspond to sub-switches.

<Duplicate operation of 1-BET switch and MAX-BET switch>
(With the MAX-BET switch on, turn on the power and then operate the 1-BET switch)
113(a), we will explain the operation acceptance state when the 1-BET switch 22 is operated after the power is turned on while the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated. First, when the power switch 81 (see FIG. 2) is turned on while the MAX-BET switch 23 is in the on state, no medals are inserted until the specified number of medals is reached from the stored medals, and the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a (see FIG. 1) lights up.

Here, the conditions for the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a to light (in other words, the conditions under which medals can be inserted by operating the BET switch) include the number of medals stored being equal to or greater than the specified number (for example, three) minus the number of medals already inserted, the next play not being a replay, all reels being stopped, the specified number of medals not having been inserted, and the stored medals not being paid out. Therefore, if the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a lights up when the power is turned on, it can be said that the conditions under which medals can be inserted by operating the BET switch are met.

If the MAX-BET switch 23 remains on after the power switch 81 is turned on and the 1-BET switch 22 is turned on, one medal will be inserted from the stored medals. Each time the 1-BET switch 22 is turned on, the number of medals inserted increases by one. When three medals (the specified number) have been inserted, play can begin and the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a will turn off. Note that instead of operating the 1-BET switch 22, medals may be inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 (see Figure 1).

In this way, if the power is turned on while the MAX-BET switch 23 is on and medals can be inserted using the BET switch, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a, indicating that medals can be inserted, will light up, and medals can be inserted by operating the 1-BET switch 22 even if the MAX-BET switch 23 remains on.

For this reason, even if the power is turned on while the MAX-BET switch 23 is accidentally operated by a human hand or some other object, medals will not be unintentionally inserted. Furthermore, even in this state, medals can be inserted by operating the 1-BET switch 22, so game progress is not impeded as much as possible. Furthermore, even if the power is turned on while the MAX-BET switch 23 is on, for example, because the operated portion of the MAX-BET switch 23 becomes stuck in a depressed position due to a malfunction, or because the main control means 100 detects the MAX-BET switch 23 as being on due to a malfunction even though the MAX-BET switch 23 has not been pressed, the BET switch indicator lamp 46a will light up, accurately indicating that medals can be inserted.

(With the 1-BET switch on, turn on the power and then operate the MAX-BET switch)
113(b), we will explain the operation acceptance state when the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated after the power is turned on while the 1-BET switch 22 is operated. First, when the power switch 81 is turned on while the 1-BET switch 22 is in the on state, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a lights up without inserting a single medal from the stored medals.

If the MAX-BET switch 23 is turned on while the 1-BET switch 22 remains on after the power switch 81 is turned on, medals will be inserted from the stored medals up to the specified number. That is, for example, if no medals were inserted before the power outage, three medals will be inserted, and if one medal was inserted before the power outage, two medals will be inserted. Once the specified number of medals have been inserted, play can begin, and the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a will turn off.

In this way, when the power is turned on with the 1-BET switch 22 in the ON state in a state where medals can be inserted by the BET switch, the MAX-
Even if the BET switch indicator lamp 46a is lit and the 1-BET switch 22 continues to be in the on state, medals can be inserted by operating the MAX-BET switch 23.

For this reason, even if the power is turned on while the 1-BET switch 22 is accidentally operated by a human hand or some other object, medals will not be unintentionally inserted. Furthermore, even in this state, medals can be inserted by operating the MAX-BET switch 23, so game progress is not disrupted as much as possible. Furthermore, even if the power is turned on while the 1-BET switch 22 is on, for example, because the operated portion of the 1-BET switch 22 becomes stuck in a depressed position due to some malfunction, or because the main control means 100 detects the 1-BET switch 22 as being on due to a malfunction even though the 1-BET switch 22 has not been pressed, the BET switch indicator lamp 46a will light up, accurately indicating that medals can be inserted.

<Duplicate operation of settlement switch and bet switch>
114(a), we will explain the operation acceptance state when the BET switch is operated after the power is turned on while the settlement switch 24 is operated. First, when the power switch 81 is turned on while the settlement switch 24 is in the on state, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a (see FIG. 1) lights up, but the hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) remains off and does not operate, so the stored medals are not paid out (i.e., settled) to the game medal storage tray 42 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, even if the MAX-BET switch 23 is turned on while the settlement switch 24 remains on after the power switch 81 is turned on, no medals will be inserted from the stored medals until the specified number is reached, even though the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is lit. Furthermore, even if the 1-BET switch 22 is turned on in this state, no medal will be inserted from the stored medals.

In this way, if the power is turned on while the settlement switch 24 is on and medals can be inserted using the BET switch, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a will light up, indicating that medals can be inserted, but medals cannot be inserted by operating the 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23. Furthermore, even if medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 21, they will not be accepted and will be returned to the game medal storage tray 42.

For example, even if the power is turned on while the settlement switch 24 is operated by mistake or due to a malfunction, it is possible to prevent medals from being unintentionally withdrawn from the hopper. Furthermore, even if the settlement switch 24 continues to be operated after the power is turned on, preventing medals from being inserted using the BET switch, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a remains lit, allowing the player to know that medals have been saved, preventing the player from quitting play and leaving their seat without paying off the saved medals.

In the example shown in Figure 114(a), if the settlement switch 24 continues to be operated even after the power is turned on, it is not possible to insert medals using the BET switch, but it is also possible to insert medals using the BET switch. The operation acceptance state of the MAX-BET switch 23 in this configuration will be explained with reference to the timing chart shown in Figure 114(b). Here, in the example shown in Figure 114(b), it is assumed that the number of medals inserted before the power interruption occurred was 0.

First, when the power switch 81 is turned on while the settlement switch 24 is in the on position, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a lights up, but because the hopper 50 remains off and inoperative, the stored medals are not paid back to the game medal storage tray 42 (i.e., not settled). If the MAX-BET switch 23 is turned on while the settlement switch 24 remains on after the power switch 81 is turned on, three medals from the stored medals are inserted. Once three medals have been inserted, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a goes out. Although not shown in the figure, medals can be inserted not only by operating the MAX-BET switch 23, but also by operating the 1-BET switch 22. Inserted medals can also be accepted by inserting them through the medal insertion slot 21.

In this way, if the power is turned on while the settlement switch 24 is on and medals can be inserted using the BET switch, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a, indicating that medals can be inserted, lights up, and medals can be inserted using the BET switch. This prevents medals from being unintentionally paid out from the hopper, for example, if the power is turned on while the settlement switch 24 is operated by mistake or due to a malfunction. Furthermore, even if the settlement switch 24 continues to be operated after the power is turned on, medals can still be inserted using the BET switch, so it is possible to minimize disruption to the progress of the game.

<Overlapping operation of multiple stop switches>
Next, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 115, we will explain the stop switch operation acceptance state when multiple stop switches are operated. First, when all reels are spinning and the left stop operation acceptance lamp 46ka, the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb, and the right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc are lit (i.e., the stop operations of all stop switches are valid), if the left stop switch 26a is operated to stop, the left reel 3a is controlled to stop. Here, the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and the right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc are also extinguished for a very short time while the left stop switch 26a is being operated to stop, but they are lit again when the stop operation of the left stop switch 26a is completed. In contrast, the left stop operation acceptance lamp 46ka remains extinguished even after the stop operation of the left stop switch 26a is completed because the rotation of the corresponding left reel 3a has stopped.

When the power switch 81 is then turned off, the stop operation acceptance lamps go out and the center reel 3b and right reel 3c also stop spinning. In this state, if the power switch 81 is turned on while the center stop switch 26b is still in the stop position, the center reel 3b and right reel 3c will start spinning again, but the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc will remain off. Therefore, even if the right stop switch 26c is stopped, the right reel 3c will not be stopped. On the other hand, once the stop operation of the center stop switch 26b is completed, the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc will light up, and the stop operation of the center stop switch 26b and right stop switch 26c will become effective.

In this state, if the left stop switch 26a, which has already been operated to stop, is operated to stop, the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc will turn off, and while the left stop switch 26a is being operated to stop, stopping the center reel 3b and right reel 3c will not be controlled, even if the center stop switch 26b and right stop switch 26c are operated to stop. Then, when the stop operation of the left stop switch 26a is completed, the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc will light up again, and the stop operation of the center stop switch 26b and right stop switch 26c will become effective.

When the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc are lit, for example, if the center stop switch 26b is operated to stop, the center reel 3b is controlled to stop, and the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc are turned off while the stop operation is being performed. At this time, the right reel 3c continues to spin. Then, if the center stop switch 26b is stopped while the right stop switch 26c, which has not yet been stopped, is also stopped, and the center stop switch 26b is stopped in this state, and only the right stop switch 26c is stopped, the right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc remains turned off, and the right reel 3c continues to spin without being controlled to stop.

When the stop operation of the right stop switch 26c is completed, the right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc lights up again, and the stop operation of the right stop switch 26c is enabled. Then, when the right stop switch 26c is stopped again, the right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc goes out and the right reel 3c is controlled to stop.

As mentioned above, even if the power is turned on while operating the stop switch corresponding to a reel that was spinning before the power was cut off, the reel corresponding to that stop switch will not stop spinning. Furthermore, the stop operation acceptance lamps corresponding to other stop switches are off, so operating those other stop switches will not stop the corresponding reel. Therefore, even if the power is turned on accidentally while operating the stop switch, the reels will not stop unintentionally, causing a disadvantage to the player, such as missing out on a minor winning combination that was won in the internal lottery.

Next, in the example shown in Figure 115, when a stop switch that has already been stopped is operated again, the stop operations of other stop switches that have not yet been stopped are invalidated, but it is also possible to enable operations for other stop switches that have not yet been stopped. Below, with reference to Figure 116, we will explain the stop operation acceptance status of the stop switch in such a case.

In Figure 116, first, all reels are spinning, and the left stop operation acceptance lamp 46ka, center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb, and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc are lit (i.e., the stop operation of all stop switches is enabled). When the left stop switch 26a is operated to stop, the left reel 3a is controlled to stop. Here, while the left stop switch 26a is being operated to stop, the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc are also extinguished, but they turn on again when the stop operation of the left stop switch 26a is completed. In contrast, the left stop operation acceptance lamp 46ka remains extinguished even after the stop operation of the left stop switch 26a is completed, because the rotation of the corresponding left reel 3a has stopped.

Here, even if the left stop switch 26a, which has already been stopped, is stopped again, the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc remain lit, and the stop operations for the center stop switch 26b and right stop switch 26c remain valid. Therefore, if the center stop switch 26b, for example, is stopped while the left stop switch 26a is still stopped, stop control is performed on the center reel 3b. Furthermore, while the left stop switch 26a and center stop switch 26b are stopped, the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc remain extinguished.

In this state, even if the stop operation of the center stop switch 26b is terminated and only the stop operation of the left stop switch 26a is continued, the center stop operation acceptance lamp 46kb and the right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc remain extinguished, and the stop operation of the right stop switch 26c, which has not yet been operated to stop, is invalidated. When all stop switches have not been operated to stop, the right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc corresponding to the still-spinning right reel 3c lights up, and the stop operation of the right stop switch 26c becomes valid. Then, when the right stop switch 26c is operated to stop, the right stop operation acceptance lamp 46kc goes out, and the right reel 3c is controlled to stop.

In this way, when there are multiple stop switches with stop operations enabled, when one stop switch is operated to stop, the other stop switches are disabled while that stop operation continues, allowing the game to stop for that period. Therefore, for example, if you are playing a performance that develops in stages with each stop operation and you want to be sure to see the current performance, by continuing the stop operation, you can maintain the current performance even if another stop switch is unintentionally stopped, and there is no risk of the reels stopping unintentionally.

In addition, even if a stop switch that has already been stopped is stopped again, the stop operations of other stop switches will not be invalidated, so it is possible to minimize disruption to the progress of the game. Furthermore, if a stop switch that has already been stopped is stopped when a stop switch for which a stop operation is enabled is stopped, the stop operations of the remaining stop switches will not be valid until the stop operations of both stop switches have been completed, which allows the player to vary the stop operations of the remaining stop switches.

<Overlapping operation of other main switches while operating the settlement switch>
In this embodiment, the main switches change between enabled and disabled depending on the progress of the game. Specifically, as shown in the "Game Progress" column, the "Enabled Main Switch" column, and the "Disabled Main Switch" column in the table shown in FIG. 117, when all reels have stopped and the game has ended and the game is in a standby state, the operations of the 1-BET switch 22, the MAX-BET switch 23, and the settlement switch 24 are enabled, while the operations of the start lever 25 and the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are disabled. Furthermore, when a specified number of medals are inserted in the game standby state, the operations of the settlement switch 24 and the start lever 25 are enabled, but the operations of the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are still disabled.

Then, after the specified number of medals have been inserted, the start lever 25 is operated and the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c begin to rotate. The stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel becomes valid, while the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel that has already stopped becomes invalid. Furthermore, while even one reel is spinning, the operation of the settlement switch 24 and start lever 25 also becomes invalid. Here, as shown in Figures 115 and 116, while a stop switch for which the stop operation is valid is being operated, all stop operation acceptance lamps turn off, and the stop operation of all stop switches becomes invalid.

More specifically, while the stop switch that was operated for the first stop operation continues to be operated for the first stop operation, the stop operations of the other two stop switches are invalid. Furthermore, when the second stop operation is performed, the stop operation of the stop switch that was operated for the first stop operation has already been invalidated, and while the stop switch that was operated for the second stop operation continues to be operated for the second stop operation, the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel that was last spinning is invalid.

Furthermore, if the stop switch that has been operated to the third stop position continues to be stopped, the operations of the 1-BET switch 22, the MAX-BET switch 23, the settlement switch 24, and the start lever 25 are invalid. Here, during the period from when all the reels start to spin until all the reels stop, when the first stop operation through the third stop operation are valid, even if the setting key switch 83 (see FIG. 2) is turned on, while the stop switch is being operated to the stop position, the system cannot transition to the setting confirmation mode described in other embodiments. However, if the setting key switch 83 is turned on while the stop switch that has been operated to the third stop position continues to be stopped, the system may be configured to transition to the setting confirmation mode when the stop operation of the stop switch that has been operated to the third stop position is completed (at which time the on state of the setting key switch 83 is maintained).

In this embodiment, when the reset switch 82 (see Figure 2) is turned on, the main switches that become active as the game progresses are disabled while the reset switch 82 is turned on. As a result, all main switch operations are disabled while the reset switch 82 is turned on. On the other hand, even while the reset switch 82 is being operated, if the setting key switch 83 is turned on, it is possible to transition to the setting confirmation mode described in other embodiments. For example, in a situation where switching on the setting key switch 83 allows transition to the setting confirmation mode, switching on the setting key switch 83 even while the reset switch 82 is turned on makes it possible to transition to the setting confirmation mode.

Also, if the reset switch 82 is turned on after the stop switch is operated for the third stop but before stop control for the last reel that was spinning is initiated, and the setting key switch 83 is turned on after stop control for the last reel that was spinning has ended (while the reset switch 82 remains on), transition to setting check mode is also possible. However, conversely, if the reset switch 82 is turned on after the stop switch is operated for the third stop but before stop control for the last reel that was spinning is initiated, and the setting key switch 83 is turned on after stop control for the last reel that was spinning has ended, transition to setting check mode may be prevented.

In this way, all main switches are disabled while a stop switch with stop operation enabled is operated, or while the reset switch 82 is operated, eliminating the impact of main switch operation when executing highly important processes such as reel stop control, which affects the outcome of the game, or processing for recovering from a recoverable error. Furthermore, since it is possible to switch to setting confirmation mode even while operating the reset switch 82, it is possible to check the setting values even in situations where, for example, the reset switch 82 remains on and cannot be turned off due to a malfunction.

<Stage production and stage change production>
Next, with reference to Figures 118 and 119, we will explain the stage effects and stage change effects performed by images displayed on the screen 11a of the image display device 11 of the slot machine 1. The stage effects performed in this embodiment are effects performed when the game is not in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a bonus game or AT game. In the stage effects of this embodiment, multiple types of scenes (stages) on which effects by characters and the like are performed are prepared in advance, and the stages are switched based on predetermined conditions (for example, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in an internal lottery or an effect lottery performed by the sub-control means 200). In addition, the stage change effect is an effect performed when the stage is switched in the stage effects.

An example of a stage change effect is shown in Figure 118. The stage change effect in this figure shows, as an example, a transition from a stage named "Beach Stage" to a stage named "Town Stage". Figure 118(a) shows the effect screen for the beach stage. In this figure, the screen 11a displays an effect image STG1 for the sea stage. A stage name display area STGN is defined on the upper left side of the screen 11a, where the name of the stage is displayed, a stored number display area CRD is defined on the lower left side, where the number of stored medals is displayed, and a payout number display area PY is defined on the lower right side, where the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. Here,
The stage name display area STGN, the number of stored coins display area CRD, and the number of dispensed coins display area PY are collectively referred to as the UI display.

Here, as shown in stage change effect diagram 118(b), when a bonus effect image (such as a message saying "777 confirmed" or an image like a converging line) indicating that a bonus game has been confirmed is displayed in the beach stage effect image STG1, the UI display is displayed so that it is not obscured by the bonus effect image. When the stage change effect begins in the "beach stage," first, as shown in FIG. 118(c), the area of the viewable area VA on screen 11a where the effect image STG1 and UI display can be seen gradually narrows. The margins of this viewable area VA are filled in solid black, and as the viewable area VA narrows, the UI display is also hidden by the black margins of the viewable area VA.

Eventually, as shown in Figure 118(d), the UI display is completely hidden by the black margins, and finally, as shown in Figure 118(e), the entire screen 11a turns solid black and the beach stage screen is completely hidden. Next, as shown in Figure 118(f), the visible area VA appears again in the center of screen 11a, with the center of the town stage effect image STG2 displayed in this visible area VA. Then, as shown in Figure 118(g), the area of the visible area VA gradually expands, and finally, when the town stage effect image STG2 is displayed across the entire screen 11a, the stage change effect ends.

In this way, the UI display is temporarily hidden during the stage change presentation, allowing the player to focus their attention on the stage transition rather than the content of the UI display. Furthermore, when a stage presentation is performed in which the UI display items differ between the stage before and after the change, the UI display is hidden in the stage presentation image before the change, making it less likely that the presentation image after the stage change will feel strange.

Next, referring to Figure 119, the timing at which the stage change effect ends and the volume of the effect sounds output during the stage change effect will be explained. Figure 119 shows a situation in which a game is played for the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) described above while the beach stage effect is being played. First, the start lever 25 is operated at time _t1 , and at time _t2 , timing of the minimum game time begins and all reels begin to rotate. After all reels begin to rotate, for example, all reels enter a constant speed rotation state. When the index of each reel is detected, the stop switch stop operation becomes effective. As a result of the first to third stop operations, the rotation of all reels stops and the game result is determined.

Then, when a specified number of medals are inserted to play the next game and the start lever 25 is operated at time _t3 , an internal lottery is performed, and if it is determined as a result that the stage will change from the beach stage to the town stage, the stage change effect for this will start at time _t3 . At this time, the volume of the background music during the stage change effect will be louder than the volume of the background music during the beach stage.

When the start lever 25 is operated, if the elapsed time from time _t2 has not yet reached 4.1 seconds, a wait process is performed, and at time _t4 , when 4.1 seconds have elapsed, all reels begin to rotate. After all reels have begun to rotate, for example, if all reels enter a constant speed rotation state and the index of each reel is detected, and the stop switch operation becomes effective at time _t5 , at least the stage change effect will end before time _t5 , and the transition to the town stage will be completed. Therefore, when the stop switch operation becomes effective, the UI display will be visible on the screen 11a. Note that the volume of the background music in the town stage is lower than the volume of the background music in the stage change effect.

In this way, even when playing for the minimum playing time, the stage change effect ends between the operation of the start lever 25 and the operation of the stop switch, so if the stop switch is operated in the middle of a stage change, there is no risk of confusion as to which stage the game was played on.

In addition, the volume of the background music played during a stage change effect is louder than the volume of the background music in the stage before the stage change effect begins (the beach stage in Figure 119), so the player's attention can be drawn to the stage change effect. In addition, for example, when a player is in a favorable gaming state, this can be notified by outputting one phrase of the background music that is different from the normal phrase and replaced with a special phrase, making it difficult to miss the background music containing that special phrase.

In the stage change effect described above, the area of the visible area VA gradually decreases when the stage changes, and then increases again. However, other effects may also be used, such as displaying the process of sand piling up on the screen, covering the entire screen with an image of the accumulated sand, and then the accumulated sand falling to the bottom of the screen; a door closing and covering the entire screen with the door, and then opening again; a flash of light being displayed on the screen, turning the entire screen white, and then gradually becoming white again; or the screen being covered with a black vortex, which gradually becomes thinner.

The UI display may also include the number of inserted medals or a decorative image displayed on the screen (e.g., an image displayed as a border around the screen, like a picture frame). As shown in FIG. 119 , the stage change effect may not be completed in the game in which the start of the stage change effect is determined, but may be completed before the top switch is stopped in the next game. For example, in FIG. 119 , if the start of the stage change effect is determined by the operation of the star lever at time _t1 , the stage change effect may be initiated at the third stop operation or when all reels are stopped in that game, or when medals are inserted for the next game, and may be completed by the time the stop switch is stopped in the next game (i.e., by time _t5 ). Furthermore, the volume of the background music (BGM) in the stage effect immediately before the start of the stage change effect may be 0 (zero), i.e., silent.

[Fourth embodiment]
A slot machine according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "fourth embodiment slot machine") will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 120 to 132. First, the basic configuration of the fourth embodiment slot machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122. In this description, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 121 will be referred to as the up-down direction, the front-back direction, and the left-right direction, respectively. The slot machine according to the fourth embodiment shares or is similar in basic configuration to the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and therefore some of the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes, such as the winning combination determination process and the reel control process, described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the fourth embodiment slot machine in the same manner or with some modifications.

<External configuration of slot machine>
120 to 122, a slot machine 601 according to this embodiment includes a box-shaped housing 605 (main body member) that is open at the front (forward), and a front door 602 that is attached so as to be able to open and close at the front opening of housing 605. Front door 602 is attached so as to be able to open and close sideways at the front opening of housing 605 using hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c that are arranged at the front of a left side plate 605a of housing 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in Figures 120 and 121, an upper panel assembly 610, a middle panel assembly 620, a lower panel assembly 630, and a tray assembly 640 are attached to the front of the front door 602, in that order from top to bottom. The display screen 611a of the liquid crystal display device 611 mounted on the back side of the upper panel assembly 610 is positioned in the center facing forward, with a first performance lamp 612 and second performance lamps 613a and 613b located around the periphery. Furthermore, a pair of upper speakers 615a and 615b are located on the left and right sides of the display screen 611a, and a decorative member 616 decorated with a specific design is located in the center of the lower front of the display screen 611a.

A reel window W is provided in the center of the middle panel assembly 620, overlooking the surfaces of the three reels 603a, 603b, and 603c arranged side by side inside the housing 605. Mounted on the top surface of the operation panel 621 located below the reel window W are a medal insertion slot 622 for inserting gaming medals (gaming media), a BET switch unit 623 for betting gaming medals within the credited range, and an effect switch unit 624 for operating effects. Mounted on the front side of the operation panel 621 are a start lever (start switch) 625 operated to start the rotation of all reels 603a-603c, three stop switches 626a, 626b, and 626c for individually stopping the rotation of each reel 603a, 603b, and 603c, and a reject switch 627 for returning gaming medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 622 and remaining there.

The interior of the medal insertion port 622 branches into an acceptance passage (leading to hopper 651, described below) through which inserted medals pass if they are validly accepted, and a return passage (leading to medal payout outlet 641, described below) through which inserted medals pass if they are not accepted, with a blocker provided at the branching point. This blocker is configured to selectively open one of the acceptance passage and the return passage and close the other, so that when inserted medals are validly accepted, they are guided into the acceptance passage, and when not, they are guided into the return passage.

In addition, inside the medal insertion port 622, there are provided two medal insertion sensors for detecting game medals that have been inserted into the medal insertion port 622 and validly accepted, and a medal passage sensor for monitoring game medals inserted into the medal insertion port 622. The first medal insertion sensor is a transmission-type optical sensor that can detect game medals, and is located downstream from the position where the blocker is installed (closer to the hopper 651, described below). The second medal insertion sensor is also a transmission-type optical sensor that can detect game medals, and is located next to the downstream side of the first medal insertion sensor. The medal passage sensor is a contact-type sensor that can detect game medals, and is located downstream from the position where the blocker is installed and closest to the medal insertion port 622 (upstream from the two medal insertion sensors).

If the first and second medal insertion sensors detect the passage of game medals in this order, it means that the game medals have been inserted into the medal insertion port 622 and that the inserted game medals have been validly accepted. On the other hand, if the first and second medal insertion sensors detect the passage of game medals in the reverse order (second, first), it means that an abnormal passage has occurred, such as the game medals flowing backward. Furthermore, if the medal passage sensor (or at least one of the two medal insertion sensors) continues to detect game medals for more than a predetermined time, it means that an abnormality has occurred, such as the game medals being stuck in the receiving passage or a foreign object (such as a tool for committing fraud) being inserted into the receiving passage from the medal insertion port 622.

The reel window W is configured so that when all three reels 603a-603c have stopped, three symbols per reel are displayed, for a total of nine symbols, visible to the player. The pay line 629, which connects the symbol display areas in the middle of each of the reels 603a-603c horizontally (in a straight line), is activated when a specified number of game medals are bet, and the combination of symbols that stop and appear on the activated pay line 629 determines whether a game combination has been achieved.

The slot machine 601 is also equipped with various indicator lamps, such as LED lamps. In this embodiment, the indicator lamps include a MAX-BET switch indicator lamp (not shown), a BET number indicator lamp 646b, an insert possible indicator (INSERT) lamp 646c, a game start indicator (START) lamp 646d, a replay indicator (REPLAY) lamp 646e, a status indicator (GAME OVER) lamp 646f, a saved number indicator (CREDIT) lamp 646h, and a payout number indicator (PAYOUT) lamp 646j. These indicator lamps are configured to be controlled by the main control board 710, which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp (not shown) is lit when gaming medals can be bet. It is located inside the MAX-BET switch (not shown) provided in the BET switch unit 623, and when lit, it causes the MAX-BET switch to light up partially or entirely. Other indicator lamps are located on the sides or below the reel window W in the middle panel assembly 620.

The bet number indicator lamp 646b displays the number of gaming medals bet, and is composed of a 1-bet indicator lamp 646bC that lights up when one gaming medal is bet, a 2-bet indicator lamp 646bB that lights up when two gaming medals are bet, and a 3-bet indicator lamp 646bA that lights up when three gaming medals are bet. The insertable indicator lamp 646c lights up when gaming medals can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 646d lights up when a game can be started by operating the start lever 625. The replay indicator lamp 646e lights up when a replay role is achieved in any game and gaming medals are automatically bet by the automatic bet process.

The status indicator lamp 646f is lit when the betted and/or stored medals are settled. The stored medal count indicator lamp 646h is a seven-segment indicator that displays the number of stored (credited) medals, and the payout number indicator lamp 646j is a seven-segment indicator that displays the number of medals that will be paid out when a minor winning combination (a winning combination that is configured to pay out a predetermined number of medals when achieved) is achieved.

The payout number display lamp 646j is also configured to display letters (alphabet) or numbers indicating the type of error if any abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 601. Furthermore, the payout number display lamp 646j also has the function of displaying a navigation number (symbols or numbers) indicating the operation order (press order) of the stop switches 626a to 626c.

A transparent lower panel cover 631 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 630, and a pair of lower speakers 632a, 632b are arranged on the left and right sides of the lower panel cover 631. A translucent lower panel base with a predetermined design and a lower panel illumination lamp (neither of which are shown) are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 631, and when the lower panel illumination lamp is turned on, the design on the lower panel base is illuminated from behind.

The tray assembly 640 has a medal payout outlet 641 for paying out medals, and is provided with a medal storage tray 642 facing the medal payout outlet 641 for storing medals. An ashtray 643 is provided to the left of the medal storage tray 642.

<Internal structure of a slot machine>
As shown in FIG. 122 , a medal payout device 650 is provided in the lower portion of the housing 605 (above the bottom plate 605d) to pay out medals acquired when a predetermined winning pattern is achieved as a result of play. The medal payout device 650 includes a medal detection unit (not shown) for detecting medals and a hopper 651 for physically storing (accumulating) medals that have been inserted and validly accepted. Near the medal payout device 650, an auxiliary storage 653 is provided for storing medals that overflow from the hopper 651, and a fullness detection unit (not shown) is provided for detecting whether the auxiliary storage 653 is full (a state in which medals may overflow from the auxiliary storage 653). Furthermore, a power supply 655 is provided to the left of the medal payout device 650 to supply power to various devices installed in the slot machine 601.

A middle plate 605f is provided in the center of the housing 605, spanning the left and right side plates 605a and 605b, and a reel unit 660 is provided on this middle plate 605f. The reel unit 660 is composed of the three reels 603a, 603b, and 603c mentioned above, and three stepping motors (not shown) that rotate these reels 603a to 603c, respectively. Each of the reels 603a to 603c is made of a translucent material, and translucent reel tape bearing multiple designs is attached to its outer periphery. Furthermore, a back lamp (not shown) is provided on the inner surface of each of the reels 603a to 603c.

A main control device 700 is located at the top of the housing 605 (on the upper inner surface of the back panel 605e), and is responsible for the primary control of game progress (including drive control of reels 603a-603c and role determination processing). A sub-controller (not shown) is located on the rear of the front door 602 and controls various effects (such as image display control by the LCD display device 611 and sound generation control by upper speakers 615a, 615b) to enhance the enjoyment of the game depending on the game situation. The sub-controller is equipped with a sub-control board (not shown). The main control device 700 and sub-controller are electrically connected using a cable harness, and information can only be transmitted one way between these devices, from the main control device 700 to the sub-controller.

<Configuration of main control device>
Next, the configuration of main control device 700 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 123 to 131. As shown in Figures 125 to 127, main control device 700 is configured to have main control board 110 and main board case 810 that houses main control board 710. As shown in Figure 126, main control board 710 is configured to have control chip 721, information display lamp 756, multiple electrical connectors such as main board side connector 761, and printed circuit board 711 on which these are mounted. Details of main control board 710 will be described later.

As shown in Figures 125 to 127, the main board case 210 has a case body 811 and a case lid 821, and is configured to accommodate the main control board 710 inside the case formed by joining the case body 811 and the case lid 821. As shown in Figure 126, the case body 811 is formed from a transparent resin material in a generally rectangular box shape that opens forward, and multiple coupling grooves 812 are formed in each of the upper and lower wall portions. These coupling grooves 812 are L-shaped grooves consisting of an insertion groove portion that opens forward and a locking groove portion that extends rightward from the rear of the insertion groove. The case lid 821 is formed from a transparent resin material in a generally rectangular box shape that opens rearward, and multiple engagement protrusions (not shown) are formed on the inner surfaces of the upper and lower wall portions at positions corresponding to the coupling grooves 812. This engaging protrusion is inserted from the front into the insertion groove of the coupling groove 812 of the case body 811, and the case lid 821 is slid to the right relative to the case body 811 to insert the engaging protrusion into the locking groove of the coupling groove 812, thereby restricting the movement of the case lid 821 back and forth, up and down, and to the right relative to the case body 811, and the case body 811 and case lid 821 are configured to be coupled together.

As shown in Figures 126 and 128, the right side of the case body 811 is formed with a body-side coupling portion 813 and a first body-side sealing portion 814 to which a sealing cover 841 is attached. A lid crimping member (not shown) with a locking claw is attached within the body-side coupling portion 813. Two case mounting protrusions 819 protruding to the right are formed on the right side of the first body-side sealing portion 814. The left side of the case body 811 is formed with a body-side temporary engagement portion 815 that can engage with a used body crimping member 940 (see Figure 129) when recovering the main board case 810. A second body-side sealing portion 816 is formed at the bottom of the case body 811. A board support protrusion 817 is formed on the left front side of the case body 811 to support the main control board 710 so as not to bend.

125 and 126, the right side of the case lid 821 is formed with a lid-side coupling portion 823 that couples with the body-side coupling portion 813 of the case body 811 when the case body 811 and case lid 821 are coupled as described above, and a first lid-side sealing portion 824 that couples with the first body-side sealing portion 814 of the case body 811. When the body-side coupling portion 813 and the lid-side coupling portion 823 are coupled, the locking claw of the lid crimping member (not shown) attached within the body-side coupling portion 813 is inserted into the locking groove within the lid-side coupling portion 823, thereby restricting sliding movement of the case lid 821 to the left relative to the case body 811 (in the direction of removing the case lid 821), and fixing the case lid 821 so that it cannot be removed from the case body 811. A sealing sticker 842 is affixed across the first body sealing portion 814 and the first lid sealing portion 824, and a sealing cover 841 is configured to be slid from the right and attached to the first body sealing portion 814 and the first lid sealing portion 824 so as to cover the sealing sticker 842. After the sealing cover 841 is attached to the first body sealing portion 814 and the first lid sealing portion 824, a cutter member 843 is attached so that the cutting portion of the cutter member 843 is positioned inside the sealing cover 841. Therefore, when the sealing cover 841 is slid leftward to be removed, the sealing sticker 842 is cut by the cutting portion of the cutter member 843.

A cover portion 825 is formed on the left side of the case lid 821. When the case body 811 and case lid 821 are joined as described above, the cover portion 825 accommodates and covers the body-side temporary engagement portion 815 of the case body 811. An upper case fixing portion 825a is formed on the upper part of the cover portion 825. The upper case fixing portion 825a is engageable with the body crimping member 940 (see FIG. 129) described below and can also face the crimping type member 945 (see FIG. 129) described below. The lower part of the cover portion 825 is formed with a lower case fixing portion 825b. The lower part of the cover portion 825 is engageable with the crimping type member 945 and can also engage with the body crimping member 940. A lid-side temporary engagement portion 825c is formed in the middle of the cover portion 825. The lid-side temporary engagement portion 825c is engageable with a used body crimping member 940 while overlapping with the body-side temporary engagement portion 815 of the case body 811.

A Nylatch-type upper temporary fastener 838a is formed at the upper left end of the case lid 821, which can be inserted into an upper temporary fastening hole 948a (see FIG. 129 ) of the bracket member 930 (described later). A Nylatch-type lower temporary fastener 838b is formed at the lower left end of the case lid 821, which can be inserted into a lower temporary fastening hole 948b (see FIG. 129 ) of the bracket member 930. A second lid-side seal 826 is formed at the bottom of the case lid 821, which is connected to the second body-side seal 816 of the case body 811. When the second body-side seal 816 and the second lid-side seal 826 are connected, a laser device or the like is used to print across the second body-side seal 816 and the second lid-side seal 826, thereby sealing the main board case 810.

A left-side connector exposure section 827 is formed on the front left side of the case lid 821, penetrating from front to back to expose the main board connector 761 of the main control board 710 housed inside the case. The main board connector 761 exposed through the left-side connector exposure section 827 can be mated with a cable connector 792 provided at one end of the front door cable harness 791 (see Figure 123).

A connector cover 846 that covers the left-side connector exposure portion 827 from the front is attached to the case lid 821. A groove-shaped first cover crimping attachment portion 829 is formed on the front surface of the case lid 821, and a first cover crimping member 828 with a locking claw can be attached by sliding it from above into the first cover crimping attachment portion 829. When the connector cover 846 is attached to the case lid 821, the first cover crimping member 828 attached to the first cover crimping attachment portion 829 is positioned inside the connector cover 846, and the locking claw of the first cover crimping member 828 is inserted into the locking groove in the connector cover 846. Therefore, the connector cover 846 is fixed in place and cannot be removed from the case lid 821 unless the connector cover 846 is destroyed to release the lock with the first cover crimping member 828.

The lower front side of the case lid 821 is formed with first through fourth lower connector exposure sections 831-834, which penetrate forward and rearward to expose the reel connector 762, sub-board connector 763, setting change device connector 764, and collator connector 765 of the main control board 710 housed inside the case. The reel connector 762 exposed through the first lower connector exposure section 831 is designed to be mated with a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the reel control board (not shown). The sub-board connector 763 exposed through the second lower connector exposure section 832 is designed to be mated with a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the sub-control board (not shown). The setting change device connector 764 exposed through the third lower connector exposure section 833 is designed to be mated with a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the setting change device 950. The collator connector 765 exposed through the fourth lower connector exposure portion 834 can be fitted with a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the collator (not shown).

A sticker attachment section 835 is formed in the center of the front surface of the case lid 821, where a crimping usage record sticker 848 is attached. The sticker attachment section 835 is formed in a rectangular recess that matches the outer shape of the crimping usage record sticker 848. The crimping usage record sticker 848 is formed in the form of a transparent sheet printed with letters or figures for recording the date the main board case 810 was sealed, etc. (hereinafter referred to as the crimping usage record).

A recess 837 is formed on the inside of the case lid 821 at a portion of the case lid 821 that overlaps with the information display lamp 756 of the main control board 710. As shown in Figures 125 to 127, the recess 837 is made up of a bottom 837e that is lower than the ceiling of the case lid 821, and an upper wall 837a, a lower wall 837b, a left wall 837c, and a right wall 837d that surround the front side of the bottom 837e on the top, bottom, left, and right.
and a right wall portion 837d. The bottom portion 837e is formed in a flat plate shape overlapping and extending substantially parallel to the information display lamp 756 near the front of the information display lamp 756. The upper wall portion 837a, the lower wall portion 837b, and the left wall portion 837c are formed in a wall shape extending in the front-to-rear direction. Of the top, bottom, left, and right wall portions 837a to 837d, the right wall portion 837d located farther from the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c is formed in a wall shape that slopes to the right (farther from the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c) as it moves forward.

The main board case 810, which houses the main control board 710 in this manner, is attached to the upper part of the housing 605 (the upper inner surface of the back panel 605e) via a board case attachment mechanism 900, as shown in FIG. 123. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the board case attachment mechanism 900 is composed of a left-side base member 910 attached to the upper left part of the back panel 605e, a right-side base member 920 attached to the upper right part of the back panel 605e, and a bracket member 930 attached to the left-side base member 910 so as to be swingable in the front-to-rear direction. The main board case 810 is attached to the inside of the bracket member 930, facing forward. The left end of the bracket member 930 is connected to the left-side base member 910 so as to be swingable in the front-to-rear direction. Meanwhile, the right end of the bracket member 930 is configured to be fixed to the right-side base member 920 using a locking member 960. As a result, the main board case 810 is swingably attached to the upper part of the housing 605 via the board case attachment mechanism 900.

The left-side base member 910 is formed in a block shape extending in the vertical direction and is attached to the upper left side of the back plate 605e of the housing 605 (near the bottom of the top plate 605c) using a mounting screw (not shown). The left-side base member 910 is formed with three base-side engagement portions 911, 912, and 913 aligned in the vertical direction, each having a hinge hole that can engage with the bracket-side engagement portions 931, 932, and 933 of the bracket member 930. The right-side base member 920 is formed in a block shape extending in the vertical direction and is attached to the upper right side of the back plate 605e of the housing 605 (near the bottom of the top plate 605c) using a mounting screw (not shown). The right-side base member 920 is also configured to be engageable with a locking protrusion (not shown) provided on the right side of the rear surface of the bracket member 930.

The bracket member 930 is made of a transparent resin material and is formed into a roughly rectangular box shape that is open at the front. The main board case 810 is mounted in its internal space and is configured to support the main board case 810. Three bracket-side engaging portions 931, 932, and 933 are formed in a vertical line on the outer surface of the left wall of the bracket member 930. These bracket-side engaging portions have hinge shafts that can rotatably engage with the base-side engaging portions 911, 912, and 913 of the left base member 910. As a result, the left end of the bracket member 930 is connected to the left base member 910 so that it can swing back and forth in the front-to-rear direction, with the base-side engaging portions 911, 912, and 913 engaged with the bracket-side engaging portions 931, 932, and 933.

Upper and lower case crimping attachment sections 934, 935 are formed adjacent to the left wall within the bracket member 930, to which the main body crimping member 940 and crimping-type member 945 are attached. The main body crimping member 940 (or crimping-type member 945) with a locking claw is inserted and attached through an opening formed on the right side of the upper case crimping attachment section 934. The crimping-type member 945 (or main body crimping member 940) without a locking claw is inserted and attached through an opening formed on the right side of the lower case crimping attachment section 935.

An upper temporary fixing hole 948a is formed in the upper left end portion of the bracket member 930, into which an upper temporary fixing tool 838a of the main board case 810 (case lid 821) can be inserted. A lower temporary fixing hole 948b is formed in the lower left end portion of the bracket member 930, into which a lower temporary fixing tool 838b of the main board case 810 (case lid 821) can be inserted.
A cable clamp 936 capable of fixing and holding the front door cable harness 791 is formed on the lower left side of the door 30 .

A locking member 960 is attached to the upper right portion of the bracket member 930 to secure the bracket member 930 to the right-side base member 920. Also, case mounting holes 939, 939 that open to the left are formed in a vertical line in the upper right portion of the bracket member 930. The case mounting protrusions 819, 819 of the main board case 810 (case main body 811) can be inserted into the case mounting holes 939, 939 from the left.

To attach the main board case 810, which houses the main control board 710, to the bracket member 930, the case mounting protrusions 819, 819 of the main board case 810 are inserted into the case mounting holes 939, 939 of the bracket member 930, and then the upper and lower temporary fasteners 838a, 838b of the main board case 810 are inserted into the upper and lower upper temporary fastening holes 948a, 948b of the bracket member 930, thereby inserting the main board case 810 into the bracket member 930. When the main board case 810 is inserted into the bracket member 930, the main body crimping member 940 attached to the upper case crimping attachment portion 934 is positioned inside the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810, and the locking claw of the main body crimping member 940 is inserted into the locking groove in the upper case fixing portion 825a. At the same time, the crimping member 945 attached to the lower case crimping attachment portion 935 is positioned facing the inside of the lower case fixing portion 825b of the main board case 810. This fixes the main board case 810 so that it cannot be removed from the bracket member 930 unless the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810 is broken to release the engagement with the main body crimping member 940.

In this way, the main board case 810 is attached to the bracket member 930 by first engaging the right side of the main board case 810 with the bracket member 930, and then engaging the left side. It is also possible to attach a crimping member 945 to the upper case crimping attachment portion 934 and position it facing the interior of the upper case fixing portion 825a, and to attach a main body crimping member 940 to the lower case crimping attachment portion 935 and position it inside the lower case fixing portion 825b, with the locking claws of the main body crimping member 940 inserted into the locking grooves in the lower case fixing portion 825b. This allows the main board case 810 to be attached to the bracket member 930 twice by swapping the vertical positions of the main body crimping member 940 and the crimping member 945.

For example, when first mounting main board case 810 to bracket member 930, main body crimping member 940 is mounted to upper case crimping mounting portion 934, and crimping member 945 is mounted to lower case crimping mounting portion 935, and the locking claws of main body crimping member 940 are inserted into locking grooves in upper case fixing portion 825a of main board case 810. In this state, when main board case 810 is removed from bracket member 930, upper case fixing portion 825a of main board case 810 is broken to release the locking state with main body crimping member 940. Next, when the removed main board case 810 is attached again to the bracket member 930, a crimping member 945 is attached to the upper case crimping attachment portion 934, and a main body crimping member 940 is attached to the lower case crimping attachment portion 935, and the locking claws of the main body crimping member 940 are inserted into the locking grooves in the lower case fixing portion 825b of the main board case 810. Then, when the main board case 810 is removed from the bracket member 930, the lower case fixing portion 825b of the main board case 810 is broken to release the locking state with the main body crimping member 940. Furthermore, when a manufacturer or the like collects the main board case 810 that has been removed from the bracket member 930, the used main body crimping member 940 that has been removed from the lower case crimping attachment portion 935 (or the upper case crimping attachment portion 934) is engaged with the main body side temporary engagement portion 815 and the lid side temporary engagement portion 825c of the main board case 810. This restricts the sliding movement of the case lid 821 to the left (in the direction of removing the case lid 821) relative to the case body 811 of the main board case 810, and the case lid 821
It is possible to fix it so that it cannot be removed from the case body 811.

In addition to mounting the main board case 810, the bracket member 930 is also adapted to mount a setting change device 950. Specifically, the setting change device 950 is mounted to the lower right portion of the bracket member 930. To the left of the setting change device 950 at the lower right portion of the bracket member 930, a cable cover 955 is mounted to cover a cable harness (not shown) that extends from the setting change device 950 to the main control board 710 (setting change device connector 764) inside the main board case 810. A groove-shaped second cover crimping attachment portion 938 is formed in the lower right portion of the bracket member 930, allowing a second cover crimping member 937 with a locking claw to be slid from the right into the second cover crimping attachment portion 938 and attached. When the cable cover 955 is attached to the bracket member 930, the second cover crimping member 937 attached to the second cover crimping attachment portion 938 is positioned inside the cable cover 955, and the locking claws of the second cover crimping member 937 are inserted into the locking grooves in the cable cover 955. Therefore, the cable cover 955 is fixed in place so that it cannot be removed from the bracket member 930 unless the cable cover 955 is destroyed to release the lock with the second cover crimping member 937.

The setting change device 950 is operated to change the setting values (such as the probability of winning a game role) of the slot machine 1 that determine the player's advantage. When a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key cylinder (not shown) on the setting change device 950 and rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise, and the power switch of the power supply unit 655 located at the bottom of the cabinet 605 is turned ON, the setting change device 950 enters setting change mode (a mode in which the setting values can be changed). Each time the setting change switch (not shown) is pressed, the setting change device 950 switches between the six setting values (1 through 6) and displays the setting value on the setting indicator lamp 751 (see Figure 131) located on the main control board 710. When the start lever 625 located on the front of the front door 602 is operated, the setting value is confirmed. Returning the setting change key to its original position ends setting change mode and transitions to normal mode. Furthermore, when the setting change key inserted into the setting change key cylinder is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise while in normal mode, the main control board 710 enters setting confirmation mode, and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display lamp 751 on the main control board 710. When the setting change key is returned to its original position, the setting confirmation mode ends and the system transitions to normal mode.

<Configuration of main control board>
Next, the detailed configuration of the main control board 710 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 131. As shown in Fig. 131, the main control board 710 includes a control chip 721, multiple ICs (also referred to as "IC components" or "IC drivers"), a monitor lamp 741 also referred to as a monitor LED, a setting indicator lamp 751 also referred to as a setting indicator monitor, an information indicator lamp 756 also referred to as a role ratio monitor (corresponding to the performance indicator monitor in a pachinko gaming machine), multiple electrical connectors such as a main board connector 761, and a printed circuit board 711 on which these components are mounted. The main control board 710 is configured so that the various drive circuits operate in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM of the control chip 721, thereby controlling the progress of play in the slot machine 601. Although detailed illustrations are omitted (some components are illustrated by numbering), main control board 710 has mounted on printed circuit board 711 a plurality of capacitors including film capacitor 771, ceramic capacitor 772, electrolytic capacitor 773, and general capacitor 774, a plurality of transistors 775, a plurality of diodes 776, a plurality of resistor arrays 777, and a plurality of resistors 778. The capacitors of main control board 710 are used, for example, to stabilize the power supply of each IC. The transistors of main control board 710 are used, for example, to drive each output circuit. The diodes of main control board 710 are used, for example, as static electricity countermeasures for each IC.

All elements mounted on the printed circuit board 711, excluding electrical connectors, such as the control chip 721, multiple ICs, monitor lamp 741, setting indicator lamp 751, and information indicator lamp 756, are covered by the case lid 821 of the main board case 810 when the main control board 710 is housed in the main board case 810. As mentioned above, the main board case 810 is made of a transparent resin material, and is configured so that the control chip 721, multiple ICs, monitor lamp 741, setting indicator lamp 751, and information indicator lamp 756 can be seen from the outside of the case lid 821.

A rectangular sticker attachment area AS is set on the upper central side of the main control board 710 (printed circuit board 711). When viewed from outside the case lid 821, the sticker attachment area AS is an area that may overlap with the crimped usage record sticker 848 attached to the sticker attachment portion 835 of the case lid 821. A rectangular solvent inflow area BS extending vertically is set on the right end of the main control board 710. The solvent inflow area BS is an area where, when attempting to peel off the sealing sticker 842 from the main board case 810, the solvent used to peel off the sealing sticker 842 may flow into the main control board 710 inside the case. To the left and below the sticker attachment area AS on the main control board 710, a placement restriction area CS extending in a roughly L-shape is set. The placement restriction area CS is an area in which the placement of the setting display lamp 751 and information display lamp 756 is restricted because they are close to the left wall portion 821a and lower wall portion 821b (see Figure 126) of the case lid 821 and there is a risk of visibility being obstructed.

In addition, the upper right corner of the printed circuit board 711 has a drawing section 712 on which the name of the board manufacturer is printed using a laser device or the like to prove that the main control board 710 is not an unauthorized board. This drawing section 712 is also covered by the case lid 821 of the main board case 810 when the main control board 710 is housed in the main board case 810, and is configured so that the drawing section 712 can be seen from the outside of the case lid 821. The drawing section 712 with the name of the board manufacturer drawn on it is positioned outside the sticker attachment area AS so that the name of the board manufacturer can be easily identified. Note that the name of the board manufacturer is not limited to being composed of characters only, and may, for example, be a combination of characters and a corporate mark, or may be a composition that includes at least one of characters and a graphic.

The information indicator lamp 756 (and setting indicator lamp 751) is thicker than other electrical elements, and if the drawing section 712 is placed near the information indicator lamp 756 (and setting indicator lamp 751), it may be hidden by the shadow of the information indicator lamp 756 (and setting indicator lamp 751), reducing visibility. Therefore, the drawing section 712 is placed at a distance from the information indicator lamp 756 (and setting indicator lamp 751) that does not impede the visibility of the drawing section 712 when viewed from outside the case lid 821. The name of the board manufacturer is printed after all electrical elements have been mounted on the printed circuit board 711. The soldered portions of the information indicator lamp 756 (and setting indicator lamp 751) are relatively heat-sensitive and fragile. Therefore, when printing the board manufacturer's name using a laser device, it is preferable to position the drawing unit 712 away from the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751) to prevent the heat from the laser from affecting the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751).

The control chip 721 is configured to have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing related to the game, a ROM that is a read-only memory device that stores control programs and the like, and a RAM that is a memory device that can write and read information. The control chip 721 is located to the right of the center of the printed circuit board 711, that is, between the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606b on the printed circuit board 711.
6c. In order to make it easier to check whether or not tampering has been performed on the control chip 721, the control chip 721 is disposed in a position that is not the sticker attachment area AS. In addition, it is preferable that the control chip 721 be disposed in a position that is not the solvent inflow area BS so as to avoid adverse effects from the solvent. In addition, the control chip 721 is disposed in a position that is a distance away from the setting display lamp 751 and the information display lamp 756 that allows the first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C to be disposed.

The multiple ICs include first and second oscillator ICs 731A-731B, first to third display control ICs 732A-732C, and first to eleventh main board ICs 733A-733K. The first and second oscillator ICs 731A-731B are electrically connected to the control chip 721 and are configured to generate clocks used by the control chip 721. The first and second oscillator ICs 731A-731B are mounted to the right of the center of the printed circuit board 711. The first and second oscillator ICs 731A-731B are positioned below and near the control chip 721, but not in the sticker attachment area AS. Note that the first and second oscillator ICs 731A-731B may also be positioned in the sticker attachment area AS as long as they are near the control chip 721. Unlike the control chip 721, there is less need to easily check whether or not fraud has occurred.

The first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C are ICs used to dynamically control the lighting of the 7-segment LEDs for the stored number indicator lamp 646h, the dispensing number indicator lamp 646j, the setting indicator lamp 751, and the information indicator lamp 756. The first display control IC 732A is electrically connected to the control chip 721 and is also electrically connected to the main board connector 761, the setting indicator lamp 751, and the information indicator lamp 756. The first display control IC 732A functions as a segment driver that sets (decodes) the numbers (numbers, letters, various symbols, etc.) displayed on the stored number indicator lamp 646h, the dispensing number indicator lamp 646j, the setting indicator lamp 751, and the information indicator lamp 756 in response to control signals sent from the control chip 721.

The second display control IC 732B is electrically connected to the control chip 721 and is also electrically connected to the main board connector 761 and the setting indicator lamp 751. The second display control IC 732B functions as a digit driver that switches between displaying numbers (set by the first display control IC 732A, which is a segment driver) on each digit of the stored number indicator lamp 646h, the dispensed number indicator lamp 646j, and the setting indicator lamp 751 in response to a control signal sent from the control chip 721. The third display control IC 732C is electrically connected to the control chip 721 and is also electrically connected to the information indicator lamp 756. The third display control IC 732C functions as a digit driver that switches between displaying numbers (set by the first display control IC 732A, which is a segment driver) on each digit of the information indicator lamp 756 in response to a control signal sent from the control chip 721.

The first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C are mounted to the left of the center of the printed circuit board 711, i.e., on the side of the printed circuit board 711 closer to the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c. The first display control IC 732A is located to the left of the eleventh main board IC 733K, in a position that will be the sticker affixing area AS. The second display control IC 732B is located below the first display control IC 732A, in a position that will not be the sticker affixing area AS. The third display control IC 732C is located above the first display control IC 732A, in a position that will be the sticker affixing area AS. Note that all of the first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C may be located in positions that will be the sticker affixing area AS. This is because, like the first and second oscillator ICs 731A to 731B, there is little need to easily check for tampering.

The other ICs, the first to eleventh main board ICs 733A to 733K, are mounted on various parts of the printed circuit board 711. For example, as shown in FIG. 131, the main board ICs mounted on the right side of the printed circuit board 711 are the first main board IC 733A, the second main board IC 733B, and the third main board IC 733C. Furthermore, for example, the main board ICs mounted on the upper central part of the printed circuit board 711 are the fourth main board IC 733D, the fifth main board IC 733E, the sixth main board IC 733F, the seventh main board IC 733G, the eighth main board IC 733H, the ninth main board IC 733I, the tenth main board IC 733J, and the eleventh main board IC 733K.

The first main board IC 733A is located above and to the right of the control chip 721. The second main board IC 733B is located above the control chip 721 and to the left of the first main board IC 733A. The third main board IC 733C is located near the bottom of the control chip 721 and near the left of the first and second oscillator ICs 731A-731B. The first to third main board ICs 733A-733C are also located in positions that do not constitute the sticker attachment area AS.

The fourth main board IC 733D is located above and to the left of the second main board IC 733B. The fifth main board IC 733E is located to the left of the fourth main board IC 733D. The sixth main board IC 733F is located below the fifth main board IC 733E. The seventh main board IC 733G is located below the sixth main board IC 733F. The eighth main board IC 733H is located below the seventh main board IC 733G. The ninth main board IC 733I is located to the left of the fifth main board IC 733E. The tenth main board IC 733J is located below the ninth main board IC 733I and to the left of the sixth main board IC 733F. The eleventh main board IC 733K is located below the tenth main board IC 733J and to the left of the seventh main board IC 733G. The fourth through eleventh main board ICs 733D-733K are located in the sticker attachment area AS.

The monitor lamp 741 is composed of 20 LED elements 742 arranged in two rows of 10 LEDs on each side, one above the other, and illuminates depending on the operating status of each component of the slot machine 601. The monitor lamp 741 is used to check for malfunctions. For example, some of the 20 LED elements 742 that make up the monitor lamp 741 illuminate when each reel 603a-603c of the reel unit 660 is not positioned (or positioned) at a predetermined rotation reference position. Others of the 20 LED elements 742 illuminate when the start lever 625 is not in operation (or in operation). The monitor lamp 741 is mounted on the lower center of the printed circuit board 711 (below the fourth through eleventh main board ICs 733D-733K). To make it easy to check the illumination status (on or off) of each LED element 742, the monitor lamp 741 is positioned outside the sticker attachment area AS. To avoid any adverse effects from the solvent, the monitor lamp 741 is preferably positioned outside the solvent inlet area BS. Furthermore, since the monitor lamp 741 is electrically connected to the main board connector 761, it is preferably positioned near the main board connector 761.

The multiple electrical connectors include a main board connector 761, a reel connector 762, a sub board connector 763, a setting change device connector 764, and a collator connector 765. The main board connector 761 is mounted on the left end of the printed circuit board 711, that is, on the side of the printed circuit board 711 closer to the hinge mechanisms 606a to 606c than the first to third display control ICs 732A to 732C, the setting display lamp 751, and the information display lamp 756. As described above, the main board connector 761 is adapted to be fitted and connected to the cable connector 792 provided at one end of the front door cable harness 791 (see FIG. 123 ).

The front door cable harness 791 is also electrically connected to a central display board 796 (see Figure 124) located in the center of the rear (back) side of the front door 602. As shown in Figures 123 and 124, the front door cable harness 791 is routed from the housing 605 to the front door 602 using a cable clamp 936 of the bracket member 930 and multiple cable clamps 794 located on the inner side of the left side panel 605a of the housing 605 (located on the side where the hinge mechanisms 606a-606c are provided). At this time, the front door cable harness 791 is routed downward from the main board connector 761 to the cable clamp 936 of the bracket member 930 so as not to cover the front of the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751) located near the main board connector 761 and impede visibility. However, the front door cable harness 791 may cover the cover portion 825 of the case lid 821 located to the left of the main board connector 761, thereby potentially obstructing the visibility of the first and second case crimping members 940, 945, etc. For this reason, as described above, it is preferable to locate the upper case fixing portion 825a, which can engage with the main body crimping member 940, above the lower case fixing portion 825b and the lid temporary engagement portion 825c of the cover portion 825. In this embodiment, the front door cable harness 791 is shown by a two-dot chain line in Figures 123 and 124 to make it easier to explain its positional relationship with other components.

The central display board 796 is electrically connected to a left relay board 797 and a right relay board 798, which are provided on the left and right rear sides of the reel window W. The left relay board 797 and the right relay board 798 are mounted with or electrically connected to the various indicator lamps (BET number indicator lamp 646b, deposit possible indicator lamp 646c, game start indicator lamp 646d, replay indicator lamp 646e, status indicator lamp 646f, reserved coin number indicator lamp 646h, payout number indicator lamp 646j, etc.) that are arranged in the reel window W. Control signals for controlling the operation of the various indicator lamps are transmitted from the main control board 710 to the left relay board 797 and the right relay board 798 via the front door cable harness 791 and the central display board 796, and the operation of the various indicator lamps is controlled by the main control board 710.

As mentioned above, the control signals for controlling the operation of the reserved coin count indicator lamp 646h and the payout number indicator lamp 646j are configured to be output from the main board side connector 761 via the control chip 721, first display control IC 732A, and second display control IC 732B of the main control board 710. Control signals for controlling the operation of the bet count indicator lamp 646b, deposit possible indicator lamp 646c, game start indicator lamp 646d, replay indicator lamp 646e, etc. are also configured to be output from the main board side connector 761 via the control chip 721, first display control IC 732A, and second display control IC 732B of the main control board 710.

The reel connector 762 is mounted on the lower left side of the printed circuit board 711. As described above, the reel connector 762 is adapted to be mated with a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a reel control board (not shown). The sub-board connector 763 is mounted on the center of the lower end of the printed circuit board 711. As described above, the sub-board connector 763 is adapted to be mated with a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to a sub-control board (not shown). The setting change device connector 764 is mounted on the lower left side of the printed circuit board 711. As described above, the setting change device connector 764 is adapted to be mated with a connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the setting change device 950. The collator connector 765 is mounted on the lower left side of the printed circuit board 711, alongside the setting change device connector 764. As described above, the connector 765 for the collator is adapted to be fitted with the connector of a cable harness (not shown) electrically connected to the collator (not shown).

As mentioned above, the setting display lamp 751 is a seven-segment display of the setting value of the slot machine 601, which determines the player's advantage. The setting display lamp 751 is constructed using a seven-segment LED capable of displaying single-digit numbers. The setting display lamp 751 is mounted to the left of the center of the printed circuit board 711, that is, closer to the hinge mechanisms 606a-606c than the control chip 721 on the printed circuit board 711. To make it easier to check the setting value displayed by the setting display lamp 751, the setting display lamp 751 is positioned between the first display control IC 732A and the main board connector 761, outside the sticker attachment area AS and placement restriction area CS.

The information display lamp 756 displays information related to the reel ratio in seven segments. It is constructed using a seven-segment LED capable of displaying four-digit numbers. For example, the information related to the reel ratio can be displayed on the information display lamp 756 as a four-digit number combining a two-digit identifier symbol indicating the type of reel ratio (reel ratio, continuous reel ratio, advantageous period ratio, etc.) and a two-digit ratio corresponding to the identifier symbol. The information display lamp 756 is mounted to the left of the center of the printed circuit board 711, i.e., closer to the hinge mechanisms 606a-606c than the control chip 721 on the printed circuit board 711. To make it easier to check the information related to the reel ratio displayed on the information display lamp 756, the information display lamp 756 is positioned between the first display control IC 732A and the third display control IC 732C, outside the sticker attachment area AS and the placement restriction area CS. Note that the information display lamp 756 may be blocked by the usage record sticker 848 when viewed from diagonally forward, so it is not preferable to position it adjacent to the sticker affixing area AS. Therefore, it is preferable to position the information display lamp 756 to the left of the sticker affixing area AS by a distance that allows the information display lamp 756 to be seen from diagonally forward right without being blocked by the crimped usage record sticker 848.

Furthermore, unlike the control chip 721, the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751) are reusable components. Therefore, if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing seal 842 from the main board case 810 and the solvent used to peel off the sealing seal 842 flows into the main control board 710 inside the case, it is preferable that the solvent does not adhere to the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751). For this reason, the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751) are positioned so that they do not become part of the solvent inflow area BS.

In order to efficiently form the conductor pattern on the printed circuit board 711 (without complicating it), it is preferable to mount the information display lamp 756 on the conductor pattern path between the first and third display control ICs 732A, 732C and the main board connector 761. Therefore, the information display lamp 756 is positioned near the first and third display control ICs 732A, 732C and near the main board connector 761. The information display lamp 756 is electrically connected to the first and third display control ICs 732A, 732C and is spaced sufficiently close from the first and third display control ICs 732A, 732C that other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) on the main control board 710 are not provided. The information display lamp 756 is also spaced sufficiently close from the main board connector 761 that other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) on the main control board 710 are not provided. If other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) are provided between the information display lamp 756 and the first and third display control ICs 732A, 732C or the main board connector 761, it will be necessary to bypass them, making it difficult to efficiently form the conductor pattern.

As described above, the first display control IC 732A serves as both the segment driver for the setting indicator lamp 751 and the segment driver for the information indicator lamp 756. In order to efficiently form conductor patterns on the printed circuit board 711, it is preferable to mount the information indicator lamp 756 near the setting indicator lamp 751. Therefore, the information indicator lamp 756 is disposed above and adjacent to the setting indicator lamp 751. The information indicator lamp 756 is spaced from the setting indicator lamp 751 close enough to prevent other electrical elements (ICs, etc.) from being disposed on the main control board 710. However, to prevent the numbers, etc. displayed by the setting indicator lamp 751 and the information indicator lamp 756 from being mistaken for a series of (five-digit) numbers, it is preferable that the setting indicator lamp 751 and the information indicator lamp 756 are disposed so as not to be aligned horizontally.

The light emitted by each LED element 742 of monitor lamp 741 is relatively bright. Therefore, if information display lamp 756 is placed near monitor lamp 741, the light emitted from each LED element 742 may reach information display lamp 756, potentially reducing the visibility of the information related to the bonus feature ratio displayed by information display lamp 756. Therefore, information display lamp 756 is placed at a distance from monitor lamp 741 that prevents light from each LED element 742 from reaching information display lamp 756. If other electrical elements are placed to block the light from each LED element 742, the distance between information display lamp 756 and monitor lamp 741 may be such that light from each LED element 742 can reach information display lamp 756. Note that information display lamp 756 can also be placed near monitor lamp 741. In this case, the information related to the bonus feature ratio displayed by information display lamp 756 and the light-emitting state of each LED element 742 can be simultaneously viewed, thereby reducing the effort required for checking.

If the main board connector 761 were positioned above the information display lamp 756, the front door cable harness 791, which is electrically connected to the main board connector 761, would hang down and potentially cover the front of the information display lamp 756 and impair visibility. Therefore, the main board connector 761 is positioned near the left of the information display lamp 756, excluding the area above the information display lamp 756. For similar reasons, other electrical connectors, such as the reel connector 762, sub-board connector 763, setting change device connector 764, and collator connector 765, are also positioned in locations other than above the information display lamp 756. Furthermore, even if electrical connectors such as the main board connector 761 are positioned in a location other than above the information display lamp 756, if there is a possibility that the cable harness would cover the front of the information display lamp 756 and impair visibility, it is preferable to position them in a location that avoids this location.

The left side of the main board case 810, where the main board connector 761 is exposed, is fixed to the bracket member 930 by the first and second case crimping members 940, 945. When attempting to break the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810 to release the engagement with the main body crimping member 940 (for example, by burning it off with a hot cutter), it is preferable not to accidentally destroy the information display lamp 756 inside the case. For this reason, the information display lamp 756 is located to the right of the upper case fixing portion 825a of the main board case 810, at a distance sufficient to accommodate other electrical elements (such as the main board connector 761) on the main control board 710.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the connector cover 846 is attached to the case lid 821 of the main board case 810 by the first cover crimping member 828. When attempting to destroy the connector cover 846 to release it from its engagement with the first cover crimping member 828 (for example, by burning it off with a hot cutter), it is preferable that the information display lamp 756 inside the case is not accidentally destroyed. For this reason, the information display lamp 756 is positioned so that it does not overlap with the first cover crimping attachment portion 829 of the case lid 821 (a position away from the first cover crimping member 828) when viewed from outside the case lid 821.

If the distance between the case lid 821 of the main board case 810 and the information indicator lamp 756 is too large, the visibility of the information indicator lamp 756 may be reduced depending on the viewing angle due to factors such as light reflection on the case lid 821. Therefore, as described above, the recess 837 is formed in the portion of the case lid 821 of the main board case 810 that overlaps with the information indicator lamp 756. This recess 837 allows the distance between the case lid 821 (recess 837) of the main board case 810 and the information indicator lamp 756 to be reduced, thereby reducing the effects of light reflection on the case lid 821 and improving the visibility of the information indicator lamp 756. Furthermore, as described above, the right wall portion 837d of the recess 837 is formed as a wall that slopes to the right (away from the hinge mechanisms 606a-606c) as it moves forward. This right wall portion 837d allows the information display lamp 756 to be seen through the recess 837 (bottom portion 837e) of the case lid 821 without interfering with the ceiling of the case lid 821, even when the main board case 810 inside the housing 605 is viewed from the diagonally front right side of the front door 602 opening.

It is preferable that the distance between the bottom 837e of the recess 837 and the information indicator lamp 756 is approximately 0.5 mm. By ensuring a gap between the case lid 821 (recess 837) of the main board case 810 and the information indicator lamp 756 in this way, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the information indicator lamp 756 while preventing attempts to destroy the information indicator lamp 756 by pushing the case lid 821 from the outside or by generating static electricity. Furthermore, if the distance between the bottom 837e of the recess 837 and the information indicator lamp 756 is approximately 0.5 mm, it is preferable that the length and width of the bottom 837e be approximately 1 mm longer on each side than the information indicator lamp 756 in order to ensure the visibility of the information indicator lamp 756.

To check the components of the main control board 710 housed in the main board case 810 in the main control device 700 configured as described above, the front door 602 is opened, and the main board case 810 mounted in the housing 605 is viewed from the front or diagonally from the front right. Because the information display lamp 756 is positioned outside the sticker area AS on the main control board 710 (printed circuit board 711), the information regarding the role ratio displayed by the information display lamp 756 can be viewed through the recess 837 (bottom 837e) of the case lid 821 without being obstructed by the crimped usage record sticker 848. Similarly, because the setting display lamp 751 is positioned outside the sticker area AS on the main control board 710, the setting value displayed by the setting display lamp 751 can be viewed through the case lid 821 without being obstructed by the crimped usage record sticker 848. The monitor lamp 741 is also located outside the sticker area AS on the main control board 710, so it is not obstructed by the crimped usage record sticker 848, and the light emission state of each LED element 742 that makes up the monitor lamp 741 can be confirmed through the case lid 821. The control chip 721 is also located outside the sticker area AS on the main control board 710, so it is not obstructed by the crimped usage record sticker 848, and it can be confirmed through the case lid 821 whether or not tampering has occurred with the control chip 721.

<Modification>
In this embodiment, when a common main control board is used by multiple board manufacturers, the main control board may be provided with multiple drawing sections corresponding to the number of board manufacturers, and the main control board may be configured so that only one drawing section printed with the name of the board manufacturer that actually produced the main control board is left and the other drawing sections can be removed from the main control board. For example, as shown in Figure 132, when a common main control board 710A is used by two board manufacturers, two drawing sections 712A and 712B may be provided in the upper right corner of the printed circuit board 711, on which the names of the two board manufacturers are printed using a laser device or the like.

The first and second drawing sections 712A, 712B are arranged side by side along the outer periphery of the main control board 710A (printed circuit board 711). The first and second drawing sections 712A, 712B are connected to the printed circuit board 711 via perforated connections and are configured to be able to be individually removed from the printed circuit board 711. This allows the first and second drawing sections 712A, 712B to be removed from the main control board 710A, leaving only the drawing section printed with the name of the board manufacturer that actually produced the main control board 710A. Therefore, even when a common main control board 710 is used by multiple (two) board manufacturers, it is possible to provide the main control board 710A with a drawing section printed with the name of the board manufacturer that produced the main control board 710A.

As in the above-described embodiment, the first and second drawing sections 712A, 712B are positioned outside the sticker attachment area AS so that the board manufacturer's name can be easily identified. As in the above-described embodiment, the first and second drawing sections 712A, 712B are positioned away from the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751) by a distance that does not impede the visibility of each drawing section when viewed from outside the case lid 821. Furthermore, when removing one of the first and second drawing sections 712A, 712B from the main control board 710 while leaving the other, it is preferable that the first and second drawing sections 712A, 712B be positioned away from the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751) to prevent the force acting during the removal from affecting the information display lamp 756 (and setting display lamp 751).

Other characteristic features applicable to the above-described main control boards 710 and 710A will be described below with additional reference to Figures 133 to 145. Below, the characteristic features will be described using a main control board 1010, which is different from the main control boards 710 and 710A. This main control board 1010 can be used in the slot machine 601 in place of the main control boards 710 and 710A. The characteristic features of the main control board 1010 described below can also be applied to the main control boards 710 and 710A. The above-described features of the main control boards 710 and 710A can also be applied to the main control board 1010. The characteristic features described below are not limited to the slot machine of the fourth form, but can be combined with other embodiments. In the following description, the directions indicated by the arrows in Figures 133 to 136 will be described as the up-down and left-right directions, respectively. These directions are consistent with the up-down and left-right directions indicated by the arrows in Figure 121.

<Aspects of lead wires of electrical elements mounted on a substrate>
The main control board 1010 is mainly composed of a printed circuit board 1011 and a plurality of electrical elements (electronic components) mounted on a surface portion (also referred to as a "first surface") FS of the printed circuit board 1011. As shown in FIG. 133, a plurality of types of electrical elements are mounted in a predetermined region (the region within a rectangular frame FB10 indicated by a solid line) on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011. Specifically, the plurality of types of electrical elements include one IC driver 1020A arranged horizontally (with the longitudinal direction of the component parallel to the left-right direction), four resistors 1030A arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the vertical direction (with the longitudinal direction of the component parallel to the up-down direction), two resistors 1030B arranged side by side in the vertical direction in the horizontal direction, an IC socket 1040A to which one control chip 1050A is attached in the horizontal direction, and four ceramic capacitors 1060A arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the vertical direction.

FIG. 133 illustrates five rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15, each represented by a two-dot chain line. These rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15 are illustrated for convenience in order to illustrate the area on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011 where electrical elements are mounted; they are not actually formed on the surface portion FS by printing or the like. Rectangular frame line FB11 indicates the area where the IC driver 1020A is mounted, and rectangular frame line FB12 indicates the area where four resistors 1030A are mounted. Similarly, rectangular frame line FB13 indicates the area where two resistors 1030B are mounted, rectangular frame line FB14 indicates the area where the control chip 1050A is mounted via the IC socket 1040A, and rectangular frame line FB15 indicates the area where four ceramic capacitors 1060A are mounted.

The IC driver 1020A comprises a rectangular parallelepiped package portion (also referred to as the "main body") 1021 and multiple lead wires (also referred to as "legs" or "terminals") 1022 extending from the package portion 1021 (in this example, 18 on each side of the package portion 1021 along the longitudinal direction, for a total of 36). Each lead wire 1022 is thinner at its tip than at its base (the portion closest to the package portion 1021), and is inserted into and soldered to a plurality of predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 1011. The resistors 1030A and 1030B comprise a cylindrical package portion 1031 and two lead wires 1032 extending from both longitudinal ends of the package portion 1031. Each lead wire 1032 is inserted into and soldered to a plurality of predetermined through-holes formed in the printed circuit board 1011.

The control chip 1050A has a rectangular parallelepiped package portion 1051 and multiple lead wires 1052 extending from the package portion 1051 (in this example, 36 from each side portion along the longitudinal direction of the package portion 1051, for a total of 72). The IC socket 1040A has a receiving frame portion 1041 that receives the package portion 1051 of the control chip 1050A and multiple lead wires 1042 (72, the same number as the lead wires 1052 of the control chip 1050A) extending from the receiving frame portion 1041 (see Figure 134). Each lead wire 1042 of the IC socket 1040A is electrically connected to each lead wire 1052 of the control chip 1050A and is inserted and soldered into a predetermined number of through holes formed in the printed circuit board 1011. Ceramic capacitor 1060A comprises an elliptical plate-shaped package portion 1061 and two lead wires 1062 extending from package portion 1061, with each lead wire 1062 inserted and soldered into a predetermined number of through holes formed in printed circuit board 1011.

Figure 134 shows the main control board 1010 as viewed from the back surface RS (also referred to as the "second surface") of the printed circuit board 1011. The rectangular frame line FB20 shown in solid line in Figure 134 corresponds to the rectangular frame line FB10 shown in Figure 133 (indicating the same position and area of the same size on the front surface FS and back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011), and the five rectangular frame lines FB21 to FB25 shown in dashed dotted lines in Figure 134 correspond to the five rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15 shown in Figure 133. Like the rectangular frame lines FB11 to FB15, the rectangular frame lines FB21 to FB25 are illustrated for convenience in order to explain the areas where electrical elements are mounted, and are not actually formed by printing or the like on the back surface RS.

As shown in FIG. 134, a large number of lead wires are soldered to the printed circuit board 1011 in the area within rectangular frame line FB20 on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011. Specifically, a total of 32 lead wires 1022 are soldered to the area within rectangular frame line FB21, and a total of 8 lead wires 1032 are soldered to the area within rectangular frame line FB22. Furthermore, a total of 4 lead wires 1032 are soldered to the area within rectangular frame line FB23, a total of 72 lead wires 1042 are soldered to the area within rectangular frame line FB24, and a total of 8 lead wires 1062 are soldered to the area within rectangular frame line FB25.

The 32 lead wires 1022 in the region within rectangular frame line FB21 and the eight lead wires 1032 in the region within rectangular frame line FB22 are arranged relatively close to each other in the left-right direction on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011. The 32 lead wires 1022 in the region within rectangular frame line FB21 are divided into two upper and lower rows, with the lead wires 1022 in each row aligned horizontally, and the eight lead wires 1032 in the region within rectangular frame line FB22 are also divided into two upper and lower rows, with the lead wires 1032 in each row aligned horizontally, so that the two are similar in this respect. However, the arrangement pitch (the distance between adjacent lead wires 1022) of the lead wires 1022 aligned horizontally in the region within rectangular frame line FB21 is different from the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 1032 aligned horizontally in the region within rectangular frame line FB22 (the former arrangement pitch is shorter than the latter arrangement pitch). Furthermore, the distance between the lead wire 1022 located at the top right corner of the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the lead wire 1032 located at the top left corner of the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 (also referred to as the "shortest distance between the lead wire 1022 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the lead wire 1032 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22") is different from the left-right arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1022 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 and the left-right arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1023 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 (the former distance is longer than the latter two arrangement pitches).

Furthermore, the vertical position of each lead wire 1022 lined up in the left-right direction in the upper row in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 is different from the vertical position of each lead wire 1023 lined up in the left-right direction in the upper row in the area within rectangular frame line FB22 (the former are located higher than the latter). Similarly, the vertical position of each lead wire 1022 lined up in the left-right direction in the lower row in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 is different from the vertical position of each lead wire 1023 lined up in the left-right direction in the upper row in the area within rectangular frame line FB22 (the former are located lower than the latter). In this way, based on the difference between the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1022 in the area within rectangular frame line FB21, the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1032 in the area within rectangular frame line FB22, and the shortest distance between the lead wires 1022 in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 and the lead wires 1032 in the area within rectangular frame line FB22, and also based on the difference between the vertical position of each lead wire 1022 lined up in the left-right direction in each column in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 and the vertical position of each lead wire 1023 lined up in the left-right direction in each column in the area within rectangular frame line FB22, it can be inferred that the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1022 in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 is different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1032 in the area within rectangular frame line FB22. By focusing on similar points, it can be inferred that the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1032 in the area within rectangular frame line FB23 is different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1022 in the area within rectangular frame line FB21 and the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1042 in the area within rectangular frame line FB24, and that the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1042 in the area within rectangular frame line FB24 is different from the type of electrical element having each lead wire 1062 in the area within rectangular frame line FB25.

As described above, the 32 lead wires 1022 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 are divided into two upper and lower rows, with 16 lead wires 1022 in each row arranged in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 1022 arranged in the left-right direction is significantly shorter than the distance between the two upper and lower rows. Furthermore, the (tip of) each lead wire 1022 protrudes linearly from the solder portion (portion formed by hardened solder material) SLR by a predetermined length in an orientation perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. From the characteristics of each lead wire 1022 (number of lead wires, arrangement pitch of lead wires, arrangement of lead wires, distance between rows of lead wires, shape (posture) of lead wires, protruding length of lead wires, etc.), it is possible to infer, when viewed from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011, that each lead wire 1022 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21 is from an IC driver (IC driver 1020A in this example) placed horizontally, among multiple types of electrical elements.

As mentioned above, the eight lead wires 1032 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 are also divided into two upper and lower rows, with four lead wires 1032 in each row arranged in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 1032 arranged in the left-right direction is shorter than the distance between the two upper and lower rows, but longer than the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 1022 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB21. From this, it can be inferred that the eight lead wires 1032 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 are paired (set) with each lead wire 1032 in the upper row and each lead wire 1032 in the lower row, and that each pair of upper and lower lead wires 1032 may belong to a single electrical element. Based on this assumption, and focusing on the pair of upper and lower lead wires, the upper lead wire 1032 extends a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS while bending diagonally downward and left from the solder portion SLR, while the lower lead wire 1032 extends a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS while bending diagonally upward and left from the solder portion SLR. In other words, when the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 1011 is viewed from the front as shown in Figure 134, the upper lead wire 1032 is inclined to the left by an angle of approximately 10° with respect to an imaginary line segment (not shown) connecting the root portion of the upper lead wire 1032 (the portion extending from the solder portion SLR) and the root portion of the lower lead wire 1032, and the lower lead wire 1032 is also inclined to the left by an angle of approximately 10°.

Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1032 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, arrangement of lead wires, distance between rows of lead wires, shape (posture) of lead wires, how the lead wires are bent, etc.), it is possible to infer from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011 that the eight lead wires 1032 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB22 are paired (set) with each lead wire 1032 in the upper row and each lead wire 1032 in the lower row, and that each pair of lead wires 1032 may be a resistor (resistor 1030A in this example) arranged vertically among multiple types of electrical elements.

The four lead wires 1032 in the area within rectangular frame line FB23 are divided into two left and right rows, with two lead wires 1032 in each row arranged vertically. The pitch of the vertically arranged lead wires 1032 is shorter than the distance between the two left and right rows, but longer than the pitch of the lead wires 1022 arranged horizontally in the area within rectangular frame line FB21. From this, it can be inferred that the four lead wires 1032 soldered in the area within rectangular frame line FB23 are paired (set) with each lead wire 1032 in the left row and each lead wire 1032 in the right row, and that each pair of left and right lead wires 1032 may belong to a single electrical element. Based on this assumption, and focusing on the pair of left and right lead wires, the left lead wire 1032 extends from the solder section SLR in a manner that bends diagonally downward to the right, while the two lead wires 1032 in the right column extend from the solder section SLR in a manner that bends diagonally downward to the left. In other words, when the rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 is viewed from the front, the left lead wire 1032 is inclined downward by an angle of about 10° with respect to an imaginary line segment (not shown) that connects the base of the left lead wire 1032 and the base of the right lead wire 1032, and the right lead wire 1032 is also inclined downward by an angle of about 10°.

Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1032 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, lead wire shape (posture), lead wire bending, etc.), it can be inferred from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011 that the four lead wires 1032 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB23 are paired (set) with each lead wire 1032 in the left column and each lead wire 1032 in the right column, and that each pair of lead wires 1032 may be a resistor (resistor 1030B in this example) arranged horizontally among multiple types of electrical elements.

The 72 lead wires 1042 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB24 are divided into four upper and lower rows, with 18 lead wires 1042 in each row arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The distance between the first and second rows from the top and the distance between the third and fourth rows from the top are significantly shorter than the distance between the second and third rows from the top. The lead wires 1042 in the first row from the top and the lead wires 1042 in the second row from the top are arranged alternately in the left-right direction, and the lead wires 1042 in the third row from the top and the lead wires 1042 in the fourth row from the top are also arranged alternately in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 1042 arranged side by side in each row is significantly narrower than the distance between the second and third rows from the top. Furthermore, each lead wire 1042 (its tip) protrudes linearly from the solder portion SLR by a predetermined length perpendicular to the back surface RS. From the characteristics of each lead wire 1042 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, distance between rows of lead wires, lead wire shape (orientation), lead wire protrusion length, etc.), it is possible to infer, from the back surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011, that each lead wire 1042 soldered to the area within the rectangular frame line FB24 is an IC socket (IC socket 1040A in this example) of multiple types of electrical elements, and that a control chip (control chip 1050A in this example) is mounted in the IC socket.

The eight lead wires 1062 in the area within rectangular frame line FB25 are divided into two upper and lower rows, with four lead wires 1062 in each row arranged in the left-right direction. The pitch of the lead wires 1062 arranged in the left-right direction is narrower than the distance between the two upper and lower rows, but wider than the pitch of the lead wires 1022 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within rectangular frame line FB21. From this, it can be inferred that the eight lead wires 1062 soldered in the area within rectangular frame line FB25 are paired (set) with each lead wire 1062 in the upper row and each lead wire 1062 in the lower row, and that each pair of upper and lower lead wires 1062 may belong to a single electrical element. Based on this assumption, and focusing on the pair of upper and lower lead wires, the upper lead wire 1062 extends from the solder portion SLR in a bent direction diagonally upward to the right, while the lower lead wire 1062 extends from the solder portion SLR in a bent direction diagonally downward to the left. In other words, when the back surface portion RS of the printed circuit board 1011 is viewed from the front, the upper lead wire 1062 is inclined to the right by an angle of approximately 160° with respect to an imaginary line segment (not shown) connecting the base of the upper lead wire 1062 and the base of the lower lead wire 1062, and the lower lead wire 1062 is inclined to the left by an angle of approximately 160°.

Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1062 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire arrangement, distance between rows of lead wires, shape (posture) of the lead wires, how the lead wires are bent, etc.), it is possible to infer from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011 that the eight lead wires 1062 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB25 are paired (set) with each lead wire 1062 in the upper row and each lead wire 1062 in the lower row, and that each pair of lead wires 1062 may be a ceramic capacitor (ceramic capacitor 1060A in this example) arranged vertically among multiple types of electrical elements.

As shown in FIG. 135, multiple types of electrical elements are also mounted in another predetermined area (the area within the rectangular frame FB30 indicated by the solid line) on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011. Specifically, the multiple types of electrical elements mounted thereon include one horizontally placed information display lamp 1070A, one horizontally placed resistor array 1080A, and one independently placed LED element 1090A.

135 shows three rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33, each made of a two-dot chain line. These rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33 are illustrated for convenience in order to explain the area where electrical elements are mounted on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011, and are not actually formed on the surface portion FS by printing or the like. The rectangular frame line FB31 indicates the area where the information display lamp 1070A is mounted, the rectangular frame line FB32 indicates the area where the resistor array 1080A is mounted, and the rectangular frame line FB33 indicates the area where the LED element 1090A is mounted.

The information display lamp 1070A comprises a rectangular parallelepiped package 1071 (having a 7-segment LED on its front surface capable of displaying information such as a four-digit number related to the role ratio) and a plurality of lead wires 1072 (12 in this example, see Figure 136) extending from the package 1071. Each lead wire 1072 is inserted into and soldered to a plurality of predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in the main control board 1010. The resistor array 1080A comprises a rounded rectangular parallelepiped package 1081 and a plurality of lead wires 1082 (9 in this example, see Figure 136) extending from the package 1081, and each lead wire 1082 is inserted into and soldered to a plurality of predetermined through-holes formed in the printed circuit board 1011. The LED element 1090A comprises a round-shaped, translucent package 1091 and two lead wires 1082 (see Figure 136) extending from the package 1091, with each lead wire 1092 being inserted into and soldered to two predetermined through-holes formed in the printed circuit board 1011.

Figure 136 shows the main control board 1010 as viewed from the front side from the back surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011. The rectangular frame line FB40 shown in solid line in Figure 136 corresponds to the rectangular frame line FB30 shown in Figure 135 (indicating an area of the same position and size on the front surface FS and back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011), and the three rectangular frame lines FB41 to FB43 shown in dashed dotted lines in Figure 136 correspond to the three rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33 shown in Figure 135. Like the rectangular frame lines FB31 to FB33, the rectangular frame lines FB41 to FB43 are frame lines shown for convenience in order to explain the areas where electrical elements are mounted, and are not actually formed by printing or the like on the back surface RS.

As shown in FIG. 136, multiple lead wires are soldered to the printed circuit board 1011 in the area within rectangular frame line FB40 on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011. Specifically, a total of 12 lead wires 1072 are soldered to the area within rectangular frame line FB41, a total of 9 lead wires 1082 are soldered to the area within rectangular frame line FB42, and a total of 2 lead wires 1032 are soldered to the area within rectangular frame line FB43.

The 12 lead wires 1072 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB41 are divided into two upper and lower rows, with six lead wires 1072 in each row arranged in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 1072 arranged in the left-right direction is slightly narrower than the distance between the two upper and lower rows. Furthermore, the tip of each lead wire 1072 protrudes linearly from the solder portion SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS in an orientation perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1072 (number of lead wires, arrangement pitch of lead wires, arrangement of lead wires, distance between rows of lead wires, shape (posture) of lead wires, protruding length of lead wires, etc.), it is possible to infer, from the rear surface RS side of printed circuit board 1011, that each lead wire 1072 soldered in the area within rectangular frame line FB41 is from one of several types of electrical elements, an information display lamp (information display lamp 1070A in this example), which is placed horizontally.

The nine lead wires 1082 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB42 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The arrangement pitch of the lead wires 1082 is approximately the same as the arrangement pitch of the lead wires 1072 arranged in the left-right direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB41. Of the nine lead wires 1082, the three lead wires 1082 at the left end and the three lead wires 1082 at the right end are arranged in a line in the left-right direction.
The nine lead wires 1082 protrude linearly from the solder portion SLR by a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS in a position perpendicular to the back surface portion RS. Meanwhile, of the nine lead wires 1082, three central lead wires 1082 extend a predetermined length from the back surface portion RS in a position bent upward or downward from the solder portion SLR. More specifically, of the three central lead wires 1082, the two right-hand lead wires 1082 extend from the back surface portion RS in a position bent downward from the solder portion SLR, and the left-hand lead wire 1082 extends from the back surface portion RS in a position bent upward from the solder portion SLR. From the characteristics of each lead wire 1082 (number of lead wires, arrangement pitch of lead wires, arrangement of lead wires, shape (posture) of lead wires, bending of lead wires, etc.), it is possible to infer from the back surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011 that the nine lead wires 1082 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB42 are a resistor array (resistor array 1080A in this example) arranged horizontally among multiple types of electrical elements.

The two lead wires 1092 in the area within the rectangular frame line FB43 are arranged in a vertical row. The arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1092 is approximately the same as the arrangement pitch of each lead wire 1072 arranged in the horizontal direction in the area within the rectangular frame line FB41. The two lead wires 1092 extend a predetermined length from the solder portion SLR in a manner that bends to the right or downward. More specifically, of the two lead wires 1092, the upper lead wire 1092 extends from the back surface portion RS in a manner that bends to the right from the solder portion SLR, and the lower lead wire 1092 extends from the back surface portion RS in a manner that bends downward from the solder portion SLR. Based on the characteristics of each lead wire 1092 (number of lead wires, lead wire arrangement pitch, lead wire alignment, lead wire shape (posture), lead wire bending, etc.), it is possible to infer, from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011, that the two lead wires 1092 soldered in the area within the rectangular frame line FB43 are LED elements (LED element 1090A in this example) from among multiple types of electrical elements.

In this way, when viewed from the rear surface RS side of the printed circuit board 1011, it is possible to infer what type of electrical element is located, in what position, and in what orientation, based on the shape of each lead wire soldered to the printed circuit board 1011. Therefore, simply by viewing the main control board 1010 from the rear surface and visually checking the shape of each lead wire, it is possible to confirm the arrangement of various electrical elements mounted on the front surface side. Furthermore, when inspecting the main control board 1010 (such as when inspecting the main control board 1010 before placing it in the main board case or after removing it from the main board case), if a defect such as a crack in a solder joint is found in a specific area (position) on the rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 when viewing the main control board 1010 from the rear surface, it is possible to quickly infer what type of electrical element is causing the defect by visually checking the shape of each lead wire in that area, thereby facilitating work to correct the discovered defect (e.g., replacing the electrical element, etc.). Although examples of lead wire characteristics include the number of lead wires, the arrangement pitch of the lead wires, the arrangement of the lead wires, the distance between rows of arranged lead wires, the shape (posture) of the lead wires, the bending of the lead wires, and the protruding length of the lead wires, the characteristics of the lead wires are not limited to these. Lead wire characteristics may also include characteristics related to the strength of the lead wires, such as the thickness and cross-sectional shape of the lead wires (the shape of the lead wires when viewed from the axial direction).

In some cases, three or more electrical elements of the same type (same kind and model) may be mounted side by side on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011. In such cases, even if the electrical elements are the same type, the lead wires of the electrical elements on the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 may differ in configuration. For example, when three or more IC drivers of the same type are lined up, the lead wires of the IC drivers located at both ends of the line may be oriented perpendicular to the back surface RS and linearly protrude a predetermined length from the back surface RS, whereas the lead wires of the IC driver located in the center may be oriented obliquely relative to the back surface RS and protrude from the back surface RS. By taking this into consideration, it becomes easier to estimate the type of electrical element, its position, and its orientation based on the configuration of the lead wires soldered to the printed circuit board 1011 when viewed from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011.

<Relationship between the distance between conductive layers of the substrate and the thickness of the gaming medal>
FIG. 137 schematically illustrates the layer structure (cross-sectional structure in the thickness direction of the board) of a printed circuit board 1011. As illustrated, the printed circuit board 1011 is a double-sided board (also referred to as a "two-layer board") and is primarily composed of a board main body 1012 made of an insulating plate material, a first conductive layer 1013 formed on the front surface 1012a of the board main body 1012 using a conductive thin-film material such as copper foil, and a second conductive layer 1014 formed on the back surface 1012b of the board main body 1012 using a conductive thin-film material such as copper foil. The first conductive layer 1013 forms, on the front surface 1012a of the board main body 1012, conductive patterns for the wiring circuit section and soldering lands formed around through-holes. Similarly, the second conductive layer 1014 forms, on the back surface 1012b of the board main body 1012, conductive patterns for the wiring circuit section and soldering lands.

Note that in Figures 137 to 139, the thicknesses of the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 are shown much larger than their actual proportions to make them easier to see. Furthermore, in reality, a solder resist layer, a silk screen printing layer, etc. are also formed on the front surface 1012a and back surface 1012b of the board main body 1012, but these are not shown. In this embodiment, the front surface 1012a of the board main body 1012, the first conductive layer 1013, the solder resist layer, the silk screen printing layer, etc. are collectively referred to as the front surface (first surface) FS of the printed circuit board 1011 (or the main control board 1010). Similarly, the back surface 1012b of the board main body 1012, the second conductive layer 1014, the solder resist layer, the silk screen printing layer, etc. are collectively referred to as the back surface (second surface) RS of the printed circuit board 1011 (or the main control board 1010).

As shown in Figure 137, the printed circuit board 1011 is configured so that the interlayer distance DS1 (the shortest distance between the two layers) between the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 is greater than the thickness TH1 of one game medal ML (DS1 > TH1). Therefore, as shown in Figure 138, even if the side edge of the game medal ML abuts the edge of the printed circuit board 1011 during inspection of the main control board 1010, the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 will not be electrically connected via the game medal ML. This prevents the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 from being electrically shorted via the game medal ML, which could cause malfunctions in electrical elements, etc. It should be noted that the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 are rarely formed to a position that reaches the edge of the printed circuit board 1011. However, if the printed circuit board 1011 is damaged and a portion is missing, or if a portion of the printed circuit board 1011 is removed (for example, if an unexpected crack occurs in the board when the above-mentioned drawing portion is removed), the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 may become exposed at the edge of the printed circuit board 1011.

139 , the interlayer distance DS1 between the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 on the printed circuit board 1011 is less than half the radius of curvature CR1 of the pachinko ball PCB. Therefore, even if the surface (outer periphery) of the pachinko ball PCB abuts the edge of the printed circuit board 1011 during inspection of the main control board 1010, the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 will not be electrically connected via the pachinko ball PCB. This prevents the first conductive layer 1013 and the second conductive layer 1014 from being electrically shorted via the pachinko ball PCB, which could cause malfunctions in electrical elements. Note that a similar relationship may also hold true for medal components other than game medals (ML), such as currency, and spherical components other than the pachinko ball PCB, and similar effects can be obtained in such cases.

<Posture and protruding height of lead wires of electrical elements mounted on a board on the back side of the board>
Figure 140 illustrates several types of electrical elements mounted on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 of the main control board 1010, and also illustrates the orientation and protruding height of the lead wires of each electrical element on the back surface side of the board. The illustrated electrical elements are an IC driver 1020B, a resistor 1030C, an IC socket 1040B equipped with a control chip 1050B, and a ceramic capacitor 1060B. Figure 140 illustrates these electrical elements in a simplified manner. The double-headed arrow DL1 in Figure 140 indicates a direction perpendicular to the back surface RS (front surface FS) of the printed circuit board 1011.

The IC driver 1020B has lead wires 1022 (only two shown) extending from the package portion 1021, which pass through predetermined through holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 1011 and protrude from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 in an orientation that is approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS (perpendicular (90°) or with an angle error from perpendicular within a few degrees (e.g., 5°)). In other words, the lead wires 1022 (axis) of the portions protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 are approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS and approximately parallel to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

The resistor 1030C has two lead wires 1032 extending from both ends of the package portion 1031, which bend and pass through predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 1011, protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 at a predetermined inclination angle TA1 (for example, an angle in the range of 20° to 85°) with respect to a direction perpendicular to the back surface RS. In other words, the lead wires 1032 protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 are significantly inclined with respect to a direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

In the IC socket 1040B fitted with the control chip 1050B, the lead wires 1042 (only four shown) extending from the receiving frame 1041 pass through predetermined through holes (not shown) formed in the printed circuit board 1011 and protrude from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 in a position that is approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS. In other words, the lead wires 1042 (axis) protruding from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 are approximately perpendicular to the back surface RS and are approximately parallel to the direction perpendicular to the back surface RS.

Ceramic capacitor 1060B has two lead wires 1062 extending from package portion 1061, which bend and pass through predetermined through-holes (not shown) formed in printed circuit board 1011, protruding from rear surface RS of printed circuit board 1011 at a predetermined inclination angle TA2 (for example, an angle in the range of 20° to 85°) with respect to a direction perpendicular to rear surface RS. In other words, the lead wires 1062 protruding from rear surface RS of printed circuit board 1011 are significantly inclined with respect to a direction perpendicular to rear surface RS.

The lead wire 1022 of the IC driver 1020B is stronger than the lead wire 1032 of the resistor 1030C, the lead wire 1042 of the IC socket 1040B, and the lead wire 1062 of the ceramic capacitor 1060B because it is formed thicker and/or made of a high-strength material. Also, the protruding height OH1 of the lead wire 1022 of the IC driver 1020B from the back surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 (the shortest distance from the back surface RS to the tip of the lead wire 1022) is greater than the protruding height OH2 of the lead wire 1032 of the resistor 1030C, the protruding height OH3 of the lead wire 1042 of the IC socket 1040B, and the protruding height OH4 of the lead wire 1062 of the ceramic capacitor 1060B (in this example, OH
(OH1>OH2>OH3>OH4, but the magnitude relationship between OH2, OH3, and OH4 is not limited to this.)

Therefore, when the main control board 1010 is placed on an inspection table during inspection, the lead wires 1022 of the IC driver 1020B contact the inspection table before the lead wires of the other electrical elements, preventing the lead wires of the other electrical elements from contacting the inspection table. Furthermore, when the lead wires 1022 of the IC driver 1020B contact the inspection table, the IC driver 1020B supports the main control board 1010, allowing the main control board 1010 to stand on its own. On the other hand, if relatively weak lead wires, such as the lead wires 1032 of the resistor 1030C and the lead wires 1062 of the ceramic capacitor 1060B, are configured to contact first and have portions protruding from the rear surface RS of the printed circuit board 1011 that are significantly inclined relative to the direction perpendicular to the rear surface RS, there is a risk that the lead wires (lead wires 1032 and 1062) will deform upon contact, resulting in malfunction.

Furthermore, if the main control board 1010 is accidentally dropped during inspection of the main control board 1010, the lead wire 1022 of the IC driver 1020B is likely to come into contact with the inspection table or floor before the lead wires of the other electrical elements. Therefore, while an impact is applied to the lead wire 1022 of the IC driver 1020B, the possibility of an impact being applied to the lead wires of the other electrical elements is reduced. Because the lead wire 1022 of the IC driver 1020B is strong, an impact may cause cracks or the like in the part where the lead wire 1022 is soldered, which has the advantage of making it easier to visually identify a malfunction. On the other hand, even if an impact is applied to a lead wire with low strength, the lead wire will simply deform, and it is unlikely that a crack or the like will occur in the soldered part, etc. Therefore, there is a risk that the malfunction will be overlooked.

In this embodiment, the lead wires of the IC driver are configured to come into contact with the inspection table, floor, etc. earlier than the lead wires of other electrical elements, but the lead wires of other electrical elements may also be configured to come into contact earlier than the lead wires of other electrical elements. In that case, it is preferable that the lead wires of the other electrical elements have higher strength than the lead wires of other electrical elements.

<Component names printed on the surface of the board>
As shown in Fig. 141 , multiple types of electrical elements are mounted in a predetermined region (the region within a rectangular frame FB50 indicated by a solid line) on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011. The rectangular frame FB50 indicates the same region as the region indicated by the rectangular frame FB30 in Fig. 135 , but Fig. 141 illustrates a larger number of multiple types of electrical elements mounted within the region than Fig. 135 . That is, in addition to the information display lamp 1070A, resistor array 1080A, and LED element 1090A illustrated in the region within the rectangular frame FB30 in Fig. 135 , the region within the rectangular frame FB50 in Fig. 141 also includes an IC driver 1020C arranged in a horizontal position, a resistor 1030D arranged in a horizontal position, a resistor 1030E arranged in a vertical position, ceramic capacitors 1060D and 1060E arranged in a vertical position, and a transistor 1110A.

On the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011, component names for identifying each mounted electrical element are silk-screen printed in white near each mounted electrical element. Specifically, component names such as "R15,""SEG2,""RA3," and "IC11" are printed near the resistor 1030D, the information display lamp 1070A, the resistor array 1080A, and the IC driver 1020C, respectively. In addition, the ceramic capacitor 1060D, the ceramic capacitor 1060E, the transistor 1110A, the resistor 1030E, the LED element 10
Component names such as "C27,""C29,""Q7,""R22," and "LED1" are printed near each part of 90A. The letters in each component name indicate the type of electrical element or the type of component of the electrical element. For example, "R" indicates resistor, "SEG" indicates segment lamp, "RA" indicates resistor array, "IC" indicates integrated circuit, "C" indicates ceramic capacitor, "Q" indicates transistor, and "LED" indicates LED element. When multiple component names are printed near a certain electrical element, the component name printed closest to the electrical element and containing the corresponding letter can generally be determined to be the component name of the electrical element. The silkscreen printing of component names and component borders (described later) is only performed on the front surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011, not on the back surface RS. Furthermore, the component names are silkscreened so as not to overlap each other.

Note that Figure 141 corresponds to the front view of the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 (main control board 1010). In other words, Figure 141 corresponds to the view when a worker, such as a game parlor clerk, looks directly at the main control board 1010 installed inside the cabinet 605 with the front door 602 (see Figure 124) of the slot machine 601 open, without tilting his head left or right. Therefore, in Figure 141, the up, down, left, and right directions from the worker's perspective (the up, down, left, and right directions shown in parentheses on each arrow in Figure 141) coincide with the up, down, left, and right directions in space (the up, down, left, and right directions shown without parentheses on each arrow in Figure 141). Here, the up, down, left, and right directions from the worker's perspective refer to the direction in which the worker's eyes are lined up (left eye side is left) and the direction perpendicular to that left and right direction (top of the worker's head is up).

As shown in FIG. 141 , when the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 is viewed from the front, the component names "R15," "SEG2," "RA3," and "IC11" printed on the surface FS are arranged with the characters running from left to right. That is, when the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 is viewed from the front, the component names are arranged horizontally (left-to-right writing) with the characters running from left to right on the surface FS. In contrast, the component names "C27," "C29," "Q7," "R22," and "LED1" printed on the surface FS are arranged with the characters running from bottom to top. That is, when the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 is viewed from the front, the component names are arranged horizontally (left-to-right writing) with the characters running from bottom to top on the surface FS (character strings rotated 90 degrees left (counterclockwise)). In this way, when the surface portion FS is viewed from the front, the characters of any part name printed on the surface portion FS are arranged in either a left-to-right order or a bottom-to-top order.

For this reason, when the front door 602 of the slot machine 601 is open and the operator looks directly at the main control board 1010 without tilting their head left or right, as shown in FIG. 141, the letters that make up the component names "R15," "SEG2," "RA3," and "IC11" are arranged in a natural order that allows the operator to read them from left to right (from the operator's perspective). This makes these component names easy to read and recognize. In contrast, the letters that make up the component names "C27," "C29," "Q7," "R22," and "LED1" appear to be arranged in a order that requires the operator to read them from bottom to top (from the operator's perspective).

On the other hand, Figure 142 corresponds to a state in which, with front door 602 of slot machine 601 open, an operator places his or her body on the open end side of front door 602 or on the front side of main control board 1010 (the front side of cabinet 605), and looks at main control board 1010 while tilting his or her head (90°) to the left (toward the hinge end of front door 602) from the operator's perspective. Therefore, in Figure 142, the up, down, left, and right directions from the operator's perspective (the up, down, left, and right directions shown in parentheses on each arrow in Figure 142) do not match (are off by 90°) the up, down, left, and right directions in space (the up, down, left, and right directions shown without parentheses on each arrow in Figure 142).

When the front door 602 of the slot machine 601 is open and an operator positions themselves at the open end of the front door 602 or in front of the main control board 1010 and tilts their head to the left from the operator's perspective while looking at the main control board 1010, as shown in Figure 142, the characters that make up the part names "C27," "C29," "Q7," "R22," and "LED1" will appear to be arranged in a natural order that can be read from left to right from the operator's perspective (from the operator's perspective). This makes these part names easy to read and see for the operator.

The same applies when the main control board 1010 is installed on the back side of the front door 602, facing the housing 605. In other words, when the front door 602 is open and the worker looks straight at the main control board 1010 installed on the back side of the front door 602 without tilting his head left or right, the component names "R15," "SEG2," "RA3," and "IC11" appear to be arranged in a natural order that can be read from left to right from the worker's perspective. Furthermore, when the front door 602 is open and an operator places their body in front of the main control board 1010 (the front side of the back side of the front door 602) and tilts their head to the left (towards the open end of the front door 602) from the operator's perspective, and looks at the main control board 1010 installed on the back side of the front door 602, the letters that make up the part names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" appear to be arranged in a natural order that can be read from left to right from the operator's perspective.

When the main control board 1010 is installed on the back side of the front door 602 so that it faces the housing 605, with the front door 602 open, an operator may position themselves at the open end of the front door 602 and tilt their head to the right (towards the hinge end of the front door 602) from the operator's perspective while looking at the main control board 1010. In this case, the characters that make up the part names "C27", "C29", "Q7", "R22", and "LED1" will appear upside down and in order from right to left from the operator's perspective.

Therefore, when the main control board 1010 is installed on the back side of the front door 602 and an operator wants to check the part names, this situation can be avoided by not viewing it in the manner described above (tilting one's head toward the hinge end of the front door 602). The sub-control board in the slot machine 601 is installed on the back side of the front door 602 facing the cabinet 605, and the arrangement of the characters that make up each part name is the same as that of the main control board 1010. Therefore, a situation similar to that occurring when the main control board 1010 is installed on the back side of the front door 602 can occur. However, this situation can be used to its advantage, as it allows the operator to distinguish whether the board they are looking at by tilting their head toward the hinge end of the front door 602 is the main control board 1010 installed inside the cabinet 605 or the sub-control board installed on the back side of the front door 602 based on the arrangement of the characters that make up the part name.

As shown in FIG. 141 , the area within the rectangular frame line FB50 on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011 has characters (in this example, "NAME BANGOU33-X") indicating the manufacturer's name, board name (number), etc. written on it. Unlike the component names, these characters (also referred to as "board name characters") are not silk-printed but are formed from copper foil or the like that constitutes the conductive layer. Therefore, they are less noticeable than the component names silk-printed in white. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to scrape off the board name characters, the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011 will be scratched, making them more noticeable. This has the effect of deterring fraudulent acts such as scraping off the board name characters.

The component name is printed in a location that excludes the land portion around the through-hole formed on the printed circuit board 1011 and the solder portion formed on the through-hole and land portion by soldering, so as not to overlap these areas. For example, as shown in Figure 143(A), when the component name "LED" is printed near a through-hole (not shown), it is printed so that it does not overlap the land portion LND and the solder portion SLR. This allows the component name to be clearly visible. In contrast, as shown in Figure 143(B), if the component name "LED" is printed so that it partially overlaps the land portion LND or the solder portion SLR, some of the characters may be missing, making it impossible to identify the printed characters as "LED." That is, in the example shown in Figure 143(B), there is a risk that the "L" in the component name "LED" may be mistaken for an "I," and the "E" may be mistaken for an "F." Even if the component name is printed so that it overlaps the land portion LND or solder portion SLR, it is preferable to limit the overlap to a degree that will prevent such misidentification. Here, the component name "LED" has been used as an example, but the same applies to any other component name.

<Component frame lines printed on the surface of the board>
141 , component frame lines corresponding to the outline shapes of the mounted electrical elements are silk-screened in white within a rectangular frame line FB50 on the surface portion FS of the printed circuit board 1011. Specifically, a component frame line PB1 for the resistor 1030D, a component frame line PB2 for the resistor 1030E, a component frame line PB3 for the ceramic capacitor 1060D, a component frame line PB4 for the ceramic capacitor 1060E, a component frame line PB5 for the transistor 1110A, a component frame line PB6 for the resistor array 1080A, and a component frame line PB7 for the LED element 1090A are printed. Component frame lines for the information display lamp 1070A and the IC driver 1020C are also printed but are not shown.

Each component border is printed in a position that excludes the land areas around the through-holes formed on the printed circuit board 1011 and the solder areas formed on the through-holes and lands by soldering, so as not to overlap these areas. For example, as shown in FIG. 144, if the land area LND and solder area SLR to which the lead wires (not shown) of the transistor 1110A are soldered are located near the location where the transistor 1110A is mounted, the component border PB5 for the transistor 1110A is printed so as not to overlap the land area LND and solder area SLR. While the component border PB5 for the transistor 1110A has been used as an example here, the same applies to any other component border. It is preferable to print each component border slightly away from the land area LND so as not to come into contact with the land area LND, as with the component border PB5 shown in FIG. 144. This prevents the silk-screen paint from adhering to the land area LND or through-hole area.

<Ensuring visibility of information display lamps>
As shown in FIG. 141 , the LED element 1090A is mounted relatively close to the information display lamp 1070A. Also, as shown in FIG. 145 , when the surface FS of the printed circuit board 1011 is used as the height reference, the height HT1 of the information display lamp 1070A is higher than the height HT2 of the LED element 1090A (HT1 > HT2). Furthermore, the light emitted by the LED element 1090A is relatively bright. Therefore, there is a risk that the light emitted from the LED element 1090A will reach the information display lamp 1070A and be reflected by the side surface of the package 1071 of the information display lamp 1070A, reducing the visibility of the information displayed by the information display lamp 1070A. Therefore, the side surface of the package 1071 of the information display lamp 1070A is matte printed (e.g., white) to reduce light reflection. Specifically, the light reflectance at the side surface of package portion 1071 is configured to be lower than the light reflectance at lead wire 1072 of information display lamp 1070A. This makes it possible to ensure the visibility of the information displayed by information display lamp 1070 even when LED element 1090A emits light. When a setting display lamp is mounted on front surface FS of printed circuit board 1011, it is preferable to apply a similar treatment to the side surface of the package portion of the setting display lamp.

Fifth Embodiment
The slot machine according to the fifth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "slot machine of the fifth embodiment") will be described below with additional reference to Figures 146 to 153. Below, the characteristic features of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment will be mainly described. The characteristic features described below are not limited to the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, but can be combined with other embodiments. The slot machine of the fifth embodiment has a basic configuration that is common or similar to that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, the control processes, such as the winning combination determination process and reel control process, described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the fifth embodiment in the same manner or with some modifications to the process content. Below, the characteristic configuration of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described.

<Internal lottery winning probability>
Next, with reference to the number-setting table shown in FIG. 146, the winning probability of the internal lottery executed in this embodiment will be explained. The number-setting table shown in this figure is similar to the number-setting table shown in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23) and the number-setting table shown in the second embodiment (see FIGS. 90 and 91), and shows the number-settings assigned to the winning numbers corresponding to 40 types of roles (the total number of positions is 65,536). In this embodiment, too, a random number generator equivalent to the random number generator 66 shown in FIG. 2 is capable of generating pseudo-random numbers ranging from 0 to 65,535 (integer values), resulting in 65,536 possible pseudo-random numbers. Therefore, the value obtained by dividing each winning number shown in the number-setting table in FIG. 146 by 65,536 is the winning probability for the corresponding role.

In the number placement table shown in Figure 146, winning number 1 is a bonus role, and the bonus role in this embodiment is, like the first embodiment, a Type 1 BB (shown as "Type 1 BB only/pure loss" in Figure 146). Furthermore, a state in which the bonus role has not been won is "non-internal," and once a bonus role is won, the winning state is carried over until the bonus role is won, and the state becomes "internal." Furthermore, winning number 1 only wins in "non-internal," and winning number 1 never wins in "internal" (the number of positions placed is "0"). While a detailed explanation will be omitted, the bonus role in this embodiment is a game role that has the potential to be missed.

Winning numbers 2 to 5 are replay roles, and in this embodiment there are four types: Replay A (winning number 2, condition device: replay-A), Replay B (winning number 3, condition device: replay-B), Normal Stop Chance Replay (winning number 4, condition device: replay-C), and Slip Chance Replay (winning number 5, condition device: replay-D). Here, Replay A with winning number 1 will not win during "non-internal" play (number of places set is "0"), but can only win during "internal" play. Additionally, the Normal Stop Chance Replay with winning number 4 and the Slip Chance Replay with winning number 5 are rare roles. These replay roles are play roles that will not result in any misses.

Winning numbers 6 to 40 are minor roles, and in this embodiment, there are nine types: watermelon (winning number 6, condition device: winning -A), strong cherry (winning number 7, condition device: winning -B), weak cherry (winning number 8, condition device: winning -C), even push order bell (winning numbers 9 to 20, condition device: winning -D1 to D12), biased push order bell (winning numbers 21 to 36, condition device: winning -E1 to E16), common even push order bell (winning number 37, condition device: winning -F), common biased push order bell (winning number 38, condition device: winning -G), 1-piece role + BB (winning number 39, condition device: winning -H), and 1-piece role (winning number 40, condition device: winning -I).

Watermelon, strong cherry, and weak cherry are rare roles, as described below, and are game roles that have a chance of being missed. Here, normal stop chance replay, slip chance replay, or strong cherry, which have a low probability of winning (number of places: 164), are also called "high rare roles," while watermelon or weak cherry, which have a high probability of winning (number of places: 636), are also called "low rare roles."

There are 12 types of even push order bells, and in the "Name" column of the number table shown in Figure 146, the three-digit number following the notation "Even Push Order Bell" represents the push order (hereinafter referred to as the "correct push order") that will result in the symbol combination with the highest payout number being stopped and displayed on the winning line. That is, as explained in the second embodiment, "123", "132", "213", "231", "312", and "321" represent the push orders of "left-center-right", "left-right-center", "center-left-right", "center-right-left", "center-right-left", and "right-center-left", respectively. Note that if the stop switch is stopped in a push order other than the correct order when one of the even push order bells is won, the symbol combination for a one-coin win will either be stopped and displayed, or will be missed, depending on the timing of the stop operation.

There are 16 types of biased push order bells, and just like the even push order bells, the three-digit number following the notation "biased push order bell" in the "Name" column of the number table shown in Figure 146 indicates the correct push order. If the stop switch is stopped in the correct push order when one of the biased push order bells is won, the symbol combination with the highest payout number will be displayed frozen on the winning line, and if the stop switch is stopped in any other push order, the symbol combination with a 1-coin winning combination will either be displayed frozen or missed depending on the timing of the stop operation.

When looking at the number of times each button is pressed correctly for both the even button press bell and the biased button press bell, the total number of times the first stop operation is the left stop switch is 300 x 4 = 1200, the total number of times the first stop operation is the middle stop switch is 300 x 4 + 700 x 8 = 6800, and the total number of times the first stop operation is the right stop switch is 300 x 4 + 700 x 8 = 6800. Therefore, the probability of winning is higher for button press bells where the first stop operation in the correct button press sequence is the middle or right stop switch than for button press bells where the first stop operation is the left stop switch.

When the common equal push order bell or common biased push order bell is won, a symbol combination that will result in a predetermined number of medals being paid out will be displayed on the winning line, regardless of the order in which the stop switches are pressed. The number of medals paid out in this case will be the same as the number of medals that would be paid out if the stop switches were stopped in the correct order when the equal push order bell or biased push order bell is won.

When a 1-coin combination + BB is won, if the specified symbol combination is displayed on the winning line by pressing the specified symbol on each reel, the sub-bonus game will start from the next play. Also, if the specified symbol combination is not displayed on the winning line by pressing the specified symbol, the timing of the stop operation of each stop switch will determine whether the 1-coin combination will be displayed or missed. When a 1-coin combination is won, the timing of the stop operation of each stop switch will determine whether the 1-coin combination will be displayed or missed.

<Air battle effects>
Next, with reference to Figures 147 to 149, the contents of the aerial battle effects implemented in this embodiment will be described.
(Flow of the aerial battle performance)
First, the flow of the aerial battle presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 147 . As a premise, in this embodiment, the advantageous zone includes at least the game states of "normal,""chancezone," and "AT.""Normal" is the game state to which the player first transitions when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone. "Chance zone" is a game state in which the number of AT games may be increased. "AT" is a game state in which, when the even push-order bell (winning - D1 to D12) and the biased push-order bell (winning - E1 to E16) are won by internal lottery in the number-placement table shown in FIG. 146 , the correct push-order is announced with a probability such that the net increase in the number of coins per game during "AT" (also referred to as the "net increase rate") is approximately 2 coins (hereinafter referred to as "2.0 coins/G").

If the aforementioned sub-bonus game is started during the "AT," the correct button press sequence will be announced with a probability that the net increase per game during the sub-bonus game will be approximately 5 coins (hereinafter referred to as "5.0 coins/G"). Here, the net increase rate during the "AT" (2.0 coins/G) is referred to as a low net increase rate, and the net increase rate during the sub-bonus game (5.0 coins/G) is referred to as a high net increase rate. Furthermore, the design value for the average net increase rate throughout the "AT," taking into account the ratio between sections in the low net increase rate and sections in the high net increase rate, is 2.5 coins/G.

If you win one of the rare combinations (Normal Stop Chance Replay, Slip Chance Replay, Watermelon, Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry) as a result of the internal lottery in "Normal" mode, you will move to the "Chance Zone", and if a specified ending condition (described below) is met in the "Chance Zone", you will move to "AT". After playing a specified number of AT games in the "AT", you will move back to "Normal" mode.

The aerial battle effect is an effect in which the player's aircraft and an enemy aircraft are displayed on the display screen 11a of the slot machine 1, and the player's aircraft fires at the enemy aircraft. If the player's aircraft successfully shoots down the enemy aircraft, the number of games played during the "AT" mode is increased by a predetermined number. First, when a rare combination is won in the "normal" advantageous zone, as shown in Figure 147(a), the weapon/enemy aircraft determination phase begins. The type of enemy aircraft that will appear in the aerial battle effect and the player's aircraft's weapon are determined based on the type of rare combination won. Here, if a normal stop chance replay (winning number 4), watermelon (winning number 6), or weak cherry (winning number 8) is won, the enemy aircraft will be a bomber and its weapon will be a missile. If a slip chance replay (winning number 5) or strong cherry (winning number 7) is won, the enemy aircraft will be a fighter aircraft and its weapon will be a machine gun.

When a rare combination is won in "normal" mode, the game state transitions to the "chance zone" from the next play. While in the "chance zone," the game enters the shell/missile acquisition phase, as shown in Figure 147(b). If a rare combination is won in an internal lottery, the number of shells or type of missile corresponding to the weapon determined when the rare combination was won in "normal" mode is determined. Specifically, when a rare combination is won in the "chance zone," a weapon acquisition lottery is held. If the determined weapon is a missile, one of the following is determined: laser-tracking missile (high probability of hit), infrared-tracking missile (medium probability of hit), unguided missile (low probability of hit), or none (missed). Furthermore, if the determined weapon is a machine gun, the number of shells (including 0) is determined by the weapon acquisition lottery. Furthermore, a lottery (hit lottery) is held for each acquired missile or shell to determine whether it will hit an enemy aircraft.

In this embodiment, if a rare combination is won five times in the internal lottery while staying in the "chance zone," the game state will transition from the "chance zone" to the "AT."
If a rare combination is won for the fifth time in the "Chance Zone" and the start lever 25 shown in Figure 1 is tilted in the next game (i.e., the first game after transitioning to "AT"), the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c will freeze before starting to spin, and the battle phase shown in Figure 147(c) will begin. In the battle phase, the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 shown in Figure 1 displays a title screen informing players that the battle has begun, and then displays the player's and enemy planes (bombers or fighter planes), as well as the number of shells or types of missiles acquired during the "Chance Zone."

When the start lever 25 is tilted in this state, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, which are currently stopped, rotate forward by a predetermined angle and then reverse to their original positions. Here, "forward" refers to the direction in which each reel rotates (the direction of the arrow in Figure 78) when playing a game on the slot machine 1 (a game in which a bonus is awarded according to the symbol combination displayed on each reel), and "reverse" refers to the direction opposite to the "forward" direction. Rotation or rotation in the forward direction is also referred to as "forward rotation," and rotation or rotation in the reverse direction is also referred to as "reverse rotation." This allows the player to see each reel vibrate in response to tilting the start lever 25. Note that each reel may be rotated reversely by a predetermined angle and then rotated forward to return to its original position. Each time the start lever 25 is tilted, an animation is displayed on the display screen 11a showing the player's aircraft firing a machine gun or missile, and the number of displayed shells or missiles is reduced. Here, shells or missiles are fired in the order they were acquired during the "chance zone."

If the fired shell or missile is the winning shell or missile in the hit lottery mentioned above, reels 3a, 3b, and 3c will spin once in the opposite direction, and a video will be displayed on display screen 11a showing the enemy aircraft being shot down. After the number of games to be added to the number of AT games is displayed, a new enemy aircraft will be displayed. Then, once all the acquired shells or missiles have been fired, the aerial combat performance will end, the frozen state will be released, and the AT game will begin.

(Processing related to aerial battle effects)
Next, an example of the processing performed by the main control means 100 to execute the above-mentioned aerial battle effect will be described with reference to Figures 148 and 149. Here, the aerial battle effect processing shown in Figures 148 and 149 is executed after a specified number of medals are inserted into the slot machine 1, the start lever 25 is tilted, an internal lottery is performed, and before the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c start to rotate.

When the aerial battle presentation processing of FIG. 148 begins, the main control means 100 first determines whether the hit determination flag stored in the RWM (read/write memory) provided in the main control means 100 is on (step Sb2). Here, the hit determination flag is a flag that indicates whether or not it is time to determine whether or not each of the shells or missiles acquired in the shell/missile acquisition phase shown in FIG. 147(b) will hit an enemy aircraft; when it is on, it indicates that it is time to determine whether or not it will hit an enemy aircraft. If the hit determination flag is on, the determination result of step Sb1 is YES, and a hit lottery is performed to determine whether or not each of the acquired shells/missiles has hit an enemy aircraft (details will be described later).

On the other hand, if the hit determination flag is off, the result of the determination in step Sb1 is NO, and it is determined whether the current game state is a "chance zone" (step Sb2). If the current game state is not a "chance zone," the result of the determination is NO, and the main control means 100 ends the aerial battle presentation processing and performs other processing. If the current game state is a "chance zone," the result of the determination in step Sb2 is YES, and it is determined whether the weapon acquisition flag stored in the RWM (hereinafter simply referred to as "RWM") provided in the main control means 100 is on (step Sb3).

If the weapon acquisition flag is not on, the result of the determination in step Sb3 is NO, and the main control means 100 determines the type of enemy aircraft and the type of weapon that will appear in the aerial battle performance based on the results of the internal lottery (step Sb4). Specifically, if the normal stop chance replay (winning number 4), watermelon (winning number 6), or weak cherry (winning number 8) among the rare combinations shown in Figure 146 is won, the enemy aircraft will be a bomber and the weapon will be a missile. Furthermore, if the slip chance replay (winning number 5) or strong cherry (winning number 7) is won, the enemy aircraft will be a fighter plane and the weapon will be a machine gun. The determined types of enemy aircraft and weapon are then transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step Sb5). The sub-control means 200 then displays a screen on the display screen 11a indicating that the aerial battle performance is about to begin, followed by displaying the player's aircraft and the determined type of enemy aircraft (bomber or fighter plane). After processing step Sb5, the main control means 100 then turns on the weapon acquisition flag (step Sb6) and ends the aerial battle performance processing of FIG. 148.

Next, in step Sb3, if the weapon acquisition flag is on, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 conducts a weapon acquisition lottery based on the results of the internal lottery (step Sb7). Here, if the weapon acquisition flag is on, it means that it is the time to acquire shells or missiles. Furthermore, in the weapon acquisition lottery, if the weapon determined in step Sb4 is a machine gun, the number of shells to be acquired (including 0) is determined, and if a missile is determined, the type of missile (including cases where it cannot be acquired) is determined. Specifically, a weapon acquisition lottery is conducted when a rare combination is won in the internal lottery. In this weapon acquisition lottery, if the type of weapon determined in step Sb4 is a machine gun, the number of shells is determined, and if it is a missile, the type (laser-tracking missile (high hit rate), infrared-tracking missile (medium hit rate), unguided missile (low hit rate), or none (failed to acquire)) is determined.

In addition, when a high-rare role (normal stop chance replay, slip chance replay, strong cherry) is won, the probability of a more favorable outcome in obtaining a weapon is higher than when a low-rare role (watermelon, weak cherry) is won. For example, if the weapon determined is a missile, and a high-rare role is won in the internal lottery, there is a higher chance of obtaining a missile with a higher hit rate than when a low-rare role is won. In addition, if the weapon determined is a machine gun, there is a higher chance of obtaining more shells if a high-rare role is won than when a low-rare role is won.

After the weapon acquisition lottery is conducted in step Sb7, the main control means 100 next determines whether or not a machine gun shell or missile has been acquired as a result of the weapon acquisition lottery (step Sb8). If a shell or missile has been acquired, the determination result is YES, and the number of shells or missiles acquired (1 for missiles) is added to the weapon counter value stored in the RWM (step Sb9). Here, the weapon counter is a counter for counting the number of shells or missiles acquired. Furthermore, if the determined weapon is a missile, the type of missile acquired (laser-guided, infrared-guided, or unguided) is also stored in the RWM in association with the count value of the weapon counter. Then, the number of shells or type of missile acquired as a result of the weapon acquisition lottery in step Sb7 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step Sb10). As a result, the sub-control means 200 displays the number of shells or type of missile acquired on the display screen 11a.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the termination condition for the period during which shells or missiles can be acquired (hereinafter also referred to as the "weapon acquisition period") has been met (step Sb11). If the determination result in step Sb8 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step Sb11 without performing steps Sb9 and Sb10. In this embodiment, the termination condition for the weapon acquisition period is the same as the termination condition for the "chance zone": winning five rare combinations in the internal lottery during the "chance zone." If the termination condition for the weapon acquisition period has not been met, the determination result in step Sb11 is NO, and the aerial battle effect processing of FIG. 148 is terminated. On the other hand, if the termination condition for the weapon acquisition period has been met, the determination result in step Sb11 is YES, and the main control means 100 turns off the weapon acquisition flag (step Sb12) and determines whether the value of the weapon counter is greater than 0 (in other words, whether it is 1 or greater) (step Sb13).

In step Sb13, if the weapon counter value is 0, the result of the determination is NO, and the aerial battle presentation processing of FIG. 148 is terminated. Here, the end of the weapon acquisition period (the result of the determination in step Sb11 is YES) also means that the "chance zone" has ended, so in the next game, the results of the determinations in steps Sb1 and Sb2 will both be NO, and processing related to subsequent steps will not be performed. In contrast, if the weapon counter value is 1 or greater, the result of the determination is YES, and the value of the weapon counter is set to the value of the hit lottery counter (step Sb14). The hit lottery counter is a counter referenced when determining whether or not each acquired shell or missile hits an enemy aircraft, and its count value is stored in the RWM.

The main control means 100 then turns on the hit determination flag (step Sb15) and terminates the aerial battle presentation processing of Figure 148. The hit determination flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a hit lottery is being held to determine whether each acquired shell or missile has hit an enemy aircraft; when it is on, this indicates that a hit lottery is being held. The state of the hit determination flag (on or off) is saved in the RWM.

In step Sb2, if the hit determination flag is on, the result is YES, and the main control means 100 reads the value of the hit lottery counter stored in the RWM (step Sb16) and performs a hit lottery based on that value (which can also be thought of as a unique number assigned to each acquired shell or missile) (step Sb17). The winning probability (hit rate) in this hit lottery is uniform for shells, but as mentioned above, for missiles it varies depending on the type of missile acquired.

Then, it is determined whether the hit lottery was a win (a hit) (step Sb18). If the hit lottery was a win, the result is YES, and an additional lottery is conducted to determine the number of games to add to the initial number of AT games (number of additional AT games) (step Sb19). The value of the hit lottery counter at that time is then set as the hit number (the number of the shell or missile that hits the enemy aircraft) and saved in the RWM along with the determined number of additional AT games (step Sb20).

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the number of hit numbers stored in the RWM has reached 10 (step Sb21). If the number of saved hit numbers is less than 10, the result of the determination is NO, and then it determines whether the value of the hit lottery counter exceeds 0 (step Sb22). If the result of the determination in step Sb18 is NO, the processes of steps Sb19 to Sb21 are not performed, and the determination process of step Sb22 is carried out directly. If the value of the hit lottery counter does not exceed 0, the result of the determination is NO, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the hit lottery counter (step Sb23). Then, the process returns to step Sb17, and a hit lottery is performed for the next shell or missile.

If the determination result in step Sb21 or Sb22 is YES, the hit lottery process is terminated, and the main control means 100 transmits the weapon counter value stored in the RWM, as well as each hit number and the corresponding number of AT added games, to the sub-control means 200. At this time, if the determined weapon is a missile, information indicating the type of missile acquired is also transmitted to the sub-control means 200. As a result, the sub-control means 200 displays the number of acquired shells or the type of missile on the display screen 11a. Then, the hit determination flag is turned off (step Sb25), and the battle presentation process described below is performed (step Sb26). Once the battle presentation process is completed, the aerial battle presentation process in FIG. 148 is terminated.

Next, the details of the battle presentation process performed in step Sb25 of Figure 148 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in Figure 149. First, the main control means 100 transitions the slot machine 1 to a freeze state (step Sb30). Specifically, as mentioned above, the aerial battle presentation process is executed after the start lever 25 is tilted and an internal lottery is performed, so the rotation control of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is delayed. Then, after flashing the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a shown in Figure 1 (step Sb31), it is determined whether the MAX-BET switch 23 has been operated (step Sb32).

In other words, flashing the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a indicates to the player that the battle effect can be canceled. For example, if a replay winning combination was achieved in the previous game, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a would not normally flash in the next replay, but during the battle effect, the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a can flash even in such a case.

If the MAX-BET switch 23 has been operated, the result of the determination is YES, and a performance cancel command is sent to the sub-control means 200 (step Sb33). The performance cancel command indicates that the aerial battle performance has been canceled by the player. When the sub-control means 200 receives this command, it switches from the aerial battle performance image displayed on the display screen 11a to an image showing the total number of AT addition games sent from the main control means 100 by the processing of step Sb24 in FIG. 148. Then, it proceeds to the processing of step Sb45, extinguishing the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a, and then in step Sb46 it releases the freeze state and resumes play on the slot machine 1.

In the judgment process of step Sb32 described above, even if the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated, the main control means 100 does not execute the process of inserting a specified number of credited (reserved) gaming medals. Furthermore, instead of canceling the aerial battle effect by operating the MAX-BET switch 23, the game may skip to the shell corresponding to the next hit number (the next shell that is determined to hit the enemy aircraft by the hit lottery of step Sb17 in FIG. 148). In this case, the reels may be swung each time the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated, and a video may be displayed showing the next shell that is determined to hit the enemy aircraft being fired. Alternatively, tilting the start lever 25 after operating the MAX-BET switch 23 will result in an effect in which a shell or missile is fired, as described below. This ensures that the fired shell or missile will always hit the enemy aircraft.

If the MAX-BET switch 23 has not been operated in the determination process of step Sb32, the determination result is NO, and after transitioning to the freeze state, it is determined whether the start lever 25 has been tilted (changed from OFF to ON) (step Sb34). If the start lever 25 has changed from OFF to ON, the determination result is YES, and a shooting command is sent to the sub-control means 200 (step Sb35). The shooting command is a command indicating that the player has tilted the start lever 25. When the sub-control means 200 receives this command, it displays a video of machine gun shells or missiles being fired from the player's aircraft displayed on the display screen 11a. It also displays an image indicating that the number of shells or missiles displayed on the display screen 11a has been reduced by the number of shells or missiles fired.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether any of the hit numbers transmitted from the main control means 100 by the processing of step Sb24 in FIG. 148 is equal to the current weapon counter value (step Sb36). If a hit number matching the current weapon counter value is found, the determination result is YES, and the hit flag is turned on (step Sb37). The hit flag indicates whether a shell or missile fired during a battle performance has hit an enemy aircraft; when on, it indicates a hit. Then, 1 is subtracted from the weapon counter value (step Sb38), and reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are swung (step Sb39). This reel swung refers to the movement of the stopped reels 3a, 3b, and 3c spinning a few steps forward (the direction in which the reels rotate during gameplay), then spinning a few steps backward (the direction opposite to the direction in which the reels rotate during gameplay) to return to their stopped positions. If the determination result in step Sb36 is NO, the main control means 100 will skip step Sb37 and proceed to the determination process in step Sb38.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the hit flag mentioned above is on (step Sb40). If the hit flag is on, the determination result is YES and a hit command is sent to the sub-control means 200. The hit command indicates that a shell or missile fired in a battle presentation has hit an enemy aircraft. When the sub-control means 200 receives this command, it displays a video showing the enemy aircraft being shot down on the display screen 11a. The main control means 100 then turns the hit flag off (step Sb42) and spins the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c in the reverse direction once (step Sb43). This creates an effect in which the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are spinning in reverse in time with the enemy aircraft being shot down as displayed on the display screen 11a.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the weapon counter value exceeds 0 (step Sb44). If the determination result in step Sb40 described above is NO, the processing proceeds directly to step Sb44 without performing steps Sb41 to Sb43. If the weapon counter value exceeds 0 in step Sb44, the determination result is YES, and the processing proceeds to step Sb32 described above. On the other hand, if the weapon counter value is 0, the determination result is NO, and the MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is turned off (step Sb45) to end the battle presentation processing, and after the freeze state is released (step Sb46), the battle presentation processing of FIG. 149, and ultimately the aerial battle presentation processing of FIG. 148, are ended.

If the start lever 25 has not changed from OFF to ON in the determination process of step Sb34 described above, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 then determines whether the weapon determined in the process of step Sb4 of FIG. 148 is a machine gun (step Sb47). If the weapon is not a machine gun (i.e., a missile), the determination result is NO, and the process returns to the process of step Sb32. On the other hand, if the weapon is a machine gun, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether the start lever 25 has been pressed and held (the ON state has continued for a predetermined period of time) (step Sb48). Here, the determination of whether the start lever 25 has been pressed and held is made using a conventional method, and detailed explanation will be omitted. If the start lever 25 has not been pressed and held, the determination result is NO, and the process returns to the process of step Sb32.

If the start lever 25 has been pressed and held down in the determination process of step Sb47, the determination result is YES, and the aforementioned firing command is sent to the sub-control means 200 (step Sb49). As a result, the sub-control means 200 displays a video of machine gun shells being fired from the player's aircraft displayed on the display screen 11a, and also displays an image indicating that the number of shells displayed on the display screen 11a has been reduced by the number of shells fired.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether any of the hit numbers transmitted from the main control means 100 by the processing of step Sb24 in FIG. 148 is equal to the current weapon counter value (step Sb50). If there is a hit number that matches the current weapon counter value, the determination result is YES, and the hit flag mentioned above is turned on (step Sb51). Then, 1 is subtracted from the weapon counter value (step Sb52), and then 1 is incremented to the rapid-fire counter value (step Sb53). Here, the rapid-fire counter counts the number of shells fired rapidly from the machine gun during battle performances, and its value is stored in the RWM. Note that if the determination result of step Sb50 is NO, the main control means 100 performs the determination processing of step Sb52 without performing the processing of step Sb51.

The main control means 100 then determines whether the value of the rapid-fire counter has reached 3 (step Sb54). If the value of the rapid-fire counter is not 3, the determination is NO, and the process returns to step Sb48. On the other hand, if the value of the rapid-fire counter is 3, the determination is YES, the value of the rapid-fire counter is reset to 0, and the process proceeds to step Sb39 described above. If the start lever 25 is subsequently pressed and held, the processes of steps Sb48 to Sb54 are repeated until the value of the rapid-fire counter reaches 3, and once the value of the rapid-fire counter reaches 3, the process proceeds to step Sb39.

As a result, if the weapon is determined to be a machine gun in the processing of step Sb4 in Figure 148, when the start lever 25 is pressed and held in the battle presentation processing of Figure 149, each reel will sway (vibrate) once and the number of shells displayed on the display screen 11a will decrease by three (however, the number of remaining shells displayed on the display screen 11a will decrease by one, rather than decreasing by three at the same time). This allows the decrease in the number of shells to be displayed at a good tempo without being affected by the vibration cycle of the reels, giving the player a sense of exhilaration.

The battle presentation process shown in FIG. 149 causes each reel to swing (step Sb39) in response to tilting of the start lever 25 (step Sb34, YES). This allows the start lever 25 to function like a trigger during aerial battles, enhancing the excitement of the presentation. Furthermore, if the start lever 25 is pressed and held down, machine gun shells are fired in rapid succession. Therefore, if a large number of shells (e.g., 1,000) are acquired, there is no need to tilt the start lever 25 one by one, thereby reducing the burden on the player. Furthermore, when shells are being fired in rapid succession, the reels are controlled to swing only once for every three shells fired. By thinning out the number of times the reels swing, the stepping motor that swings the reels is less likely to lose synchronization, resulting in smoother reel swing. Also, even if the number of times the reels are shaken is reduced, the rate at which the number of shells decreases during rapid fire is fast, so visually the firing of the shells and the shaking of the reels appear to be synchronized.

In the aerial battle effect shown in FIG. 148, the hit determination (steps Sb16 to Sb28) for acquired shells or missiles is performed all at once after the acquisition period ends. However, a hit determination for each acquired shell or missile (step Sb8, YES) may also be performed. Furthermore, in the aerial battle effect described above, a shell or missile is fired by tilting the start lever 25. However, for example, in an effect in which an enemy character and a player's character fight, a hit may be struck by tilting the start lever 25. Furthermore, if the start lever 25 is not tilted for a certain period of time (e.g., 70 seconds) during a battle effect, the start lever 25 may be tilted once, and the battle effect may proceed. This allows gameplay on the slot machine 1 to proceed even when a test device is used to execute a game during a performance test of the slot machine 1. Furthermore, even if a player temporarily leaves the slot machine 1, the time it takes for the battle effect to progress makes it easier for the player to enjoy the shooting effect upon returning.

<Ending section transition control>
Next, with reference to Figures 150 and 151, the details of the transition control to the ending section performed in this embodiment will be described.
(Ending section)
In this embodiment, regardless of the number of games played during the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone ends when the payout number during the "AT" gaming state reaches 3,250 coins (the "AT" also ends upon the end of the advantageous zone). However, if the advantageous zone ends without any warning, the player may become discouraged and lose motivation to play. Therefore, in this embodiment, a presentation (hereinafter referred to as an "ending presentation") is provided to indicate to the player that the end of the advantageous zone is approaching. In this embodiment, when the payout number during the "AT" reaches 3,000 coins, the game transitions to the ending zone and the ending presentation begins. Furthermore, once the game transitions to the ending zone, the game enters a high net increase state, and the game continues to remain in the ending zone without transitioning to another gaming state until the payout number reaches 3,250 coins (i.e., until the advantageous zone ends). In this embodiment, if the net increase in the number of coins after the start of the advantageous zone during the "AT" exceeds 2,400 coins, the "AT" will end. Therefore, for example, if it is decided to transition to the "AT" when the advantageous zone begins, the transition to the ending zone will occur when the net increase in the number of coins reaches 2,000 coins.

(Outline of transition control to ending section)
Next, an overview of the transition control to the ending section during the advantageous section of this embodiment will be described with reference to the graph shown in FIG. 150. In the graph shown in FIG. 150, the horizontal axis represents the number of games played since the "AT" began, and the vertical axis represents the number of medals paid out since the "AT" began. Also, on the horizontal axis, the section indicated by "L _n " (n is an integer from 1 to 4) represents a low net gain state (2.0 medals/G) (a section during the "AT"), and the section indicated by "H _n " (n is an integer from 1 to 4) represents a high net gain state (5.0 medals/G) (a section during the sub-bonus game). These low and high net gain states are achieved by varying the probability of announcing the correct push order when an even push order bell (winning - D1 to D12) or a biased push order bell (winning - E1 to E16) is won in the internal lottery. In other words, the probability of announcing the correct push order is higher in the high net gain state than in the low net gain state.

First, when the game state transitions to "AT," the number of medals paid out increases in a low pure increase state (2.0 medals/G). Then, when a sub-bonus game is started during "AT," the number of medals paid out increases in a high pure increase state (5.0 medals/G) for that period, and the slope of the graph at that time is greater than in a low pure increase state. In this way, the number of medals paid out increases by repeatedly executing "AT" and sub-bonus games. However, when in a low pure increase state, if it is expected that the end condition of the advantageous zone (cumulative payout of 3,250 medals) will be met by playing the remaining AT games based on the total number of medals paid out up to that point (cumulative payout) and the number of remaining AT games, the game will transition to the ending zone before the transition condition to the original ending zone (cumulative payout of 3,000 medals) is met, and the game will continue in a high pure increase state until the end condition of the advantageous zone is met.

For example, as shown in FIG. 150, assume that when the cumulative payout number reaches 2,500 in the low net gain state _L4 , there are 300 remaining AT games. Here, since the design value of the average net gain speed in the low net gain state is 2.5 coins/G, it is expected that 750 coins (= 300 x 2.5) will be paid out in the remaining 300 games. As a result, the cumulative payout number when the remaining 300 games are played will be 3,250 coins (= 2,500 coins + 750 coins), which is expected to satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous zone. Therefore, in this case, when the remaining AT games reach 300 games, the game transitions to the ending zone, and the high net gain state _H4 is entered.

As a result, while the end conditions for the advantageous zone would normally be met with 300 games remaining, as shown by the dashed line in the graph in Figure 150, the end conditions for the advantageous zone can be met with 750 coins ÷ 5.0 coins / G = 150 games. In this way, if it is expected that the end conditions for the advantageous zone will be met with the remaining number of games, the transition to the ending zone will occur earlier than the normal transition to the ending zone, so the end conditions for the effective zone can be met with fewer games, reducing the physical strain of operations required to play the game.

Also, for example, even if the number of AT games is added when the current payout number during the AT is approaching the payout number that is the condition for ending the advantageous zone, the payout number that is the condition for ending the advantageous zone may be reached before all of the added AT games are played. In such cases, there is a risk that the player may feel a sense of loss, but in this embodiment, if there is a prospect that the payout number that is the condition for ending the advantageous zone will be reached in the remaining AT games, the system will enter a high net increase state and end the advantageous zone early, thereby reducing the occurrence of added games that cannot be played and reducing the risk of the player feeling an unnecessary sense of loss.

Furthermore, if the specifications are such that the game develops more favorably for the player if they transition to a favorable zone while inside the zone than if they transition to the favorable zone while not inside the zone (for example, the probability of transitioning to "AT" is higher (for example, there is a 50% chance of transitioning to "AT"), or once the favorable zone begins, the game state will always transition to "AT" after a relatively small number of games (for example, 100 games)), then by transitioning to the ending zone early in the favorable zone in which the player is currently located, the duration of the favorable zone can be shortened, and the number of games played until the player transitions to the next favorable zone and the "AT" begins can be reduced, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game and their motivation to play.

(Transition control process to ending section)
Next, an example of processing for realizing the transition control to the ending section shown in Fig. 150 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 151. The ending transition control processing shown in Fig. 151 is executed by the main control means 100 after a specified number of medals are inserted into the slot machine 1 and the start lever 25 is tilted, thereby performing an internal lottery, and before the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c start to rotate.

When the ending transition control process of Figure 151 begins, the main control means 100 first determines whether the current game state is "AT" or not (step Sb60). If the current game state is not "AT", the determination result is NO, the ending transition control process is terminated, and other processing is performed. If the current game state is "AT", the determination result in step Sb60 is YES, and it is determined whether the ending flag stored in the RWM is on or not (step Sb61). Here, the ending flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a transition to the ending section has occurred, and if it is on, it indicates a transition to the ending section.

If the ending flag is off, the result of the judgment is NO, and the main control means 100 judges whether or not the remaining number of AT games is likely to satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous zone (step Sb62). More specifically, the main control means 100 judges whether or not the following formula is established:
P×g≦O _e −O … (1)
Here, P is the average net increase speed while staying in the "AT" (2.5 medals/G in this embodiment), g is the number of remaining games in the AT, _Oe is the cumulative payout number that will result in transition to the ending section, and O is the current cumulative payout number. Using formula (1), it can be determined whether the expected payout number if the remaining number of games in the AT are played is equal to or less than the number of medals required to transition to the ending section at the current cumulative payout number.

If the above formula (1) is true, the judgment result in step Sb62 will be YES, the aforementioned ending flag will be turned on (step Sb63), and it will be determined whether either the even push order bell (winning - D1 to D12) or the biased push order bell (winning - E1 to E16) has been won in the internal lottery (step Sb64). If the judgment result in the aforementioned step Sb61 is NO, the processing of steps Sb62 and Sb63 will not be performed and the processing will proceed to step Sb64. If the judgment result in step Sb62 is NO, the processing of step Sb63 will not be performed and the processing will proceed to step Sb64. If neither the even push order bell nor the biased push order bell has been won in the judgment processing of step Sb64, the judgment result will be NO, and the ending transition control processing of FIG. 151 will be terminated.

On the other hand, if either the even push order bell or the biased push order bell is won, the result of the judgment is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not a sub-bonus game is currently being played (step Sb65). If the sub-bonus game is not being played, the result of the judgment is NO, and the main control means 100 then determines whether or not the ending flag mentioned above is on (step Sb66). If the ending flag is off, the result of the judgment is NO, and the main control means 100 performs a low net increase push order notification lottery (step Sb67). The low net increase push order notification lottery is a lottery to determine whether or not to announce the correct push order for the even push order bell or biased push order bell that was won in the internal lottery, and it is determined that the correct push order will be announced with a probability such that the net increase in coins per game is 2.0.

On the other hand, if the determination result in step Sb65 or Sb66 is YES (the sub-bonus game is in progress or the ending flag is on), the main control means 100 performs a lottery to announce the high pure increase push order (step Sb68). The high pure increase push order announcement lottery is a lottery to determine whether or not to announce the correct push order for the even push order bell or biased push order bell that was won in the internal lottery, and it is determined that the correct push order will be announced with a probability such that the net increase in the number of coins per game is 5.0.

When the main control means 100 performs either the low pure increase push order notification lottery in step Sb67 or the high pure increase push order notification lottery in step Sb68, it determines whether or not the push order notification lottery has been won (step Sb69). If the push order notification lottery has not been won, the determination result will be NO, and the ending transition control process of Figure 151 will be terminated. On the other hand, if the push order notification lottery has been won, the determination result will be YES, the correct push order for the push order bell that was won in the internal lottery will be announced (step Sb70), and the ending transition control process of Figure 151 will be terminated.

<Push order notification control during advantageous zone>
Next, referring to Figures 152 and 153, the contents of the push order notification control during the advantageous zone implemented in this embodiment will be explained.
(Outline of push order notification control)
Next, an overview of the push order notification control during the advantageous zone of this embodiment will be explained with reference to the graph shown in Figure 152. In the graph shown in Figure 152, the horizontal axis represents the number of games played since the advantageous zone began, and the vertical axis represents the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous zone. In addition, in this embodiment, the advantageous zone ends when the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous zone reaches 2,400 coins.

First, from the transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone until 8000 games have been played, when the even push order bell or bias push order bell is won in the internal lottery, the game state ("normal",
The correct button press sequence is announced with a probability corresponding to the "chance zone,""AT,""sub-bonus,"etc.." The state in which the correct button press sequence is announced in this manner is called the first state. After 8,000 games have passed since the transition to the advantageous zone, the correct button press sequence is announced with a probability such that the ratio of the number of coins paid out to the number of coins inserted (hereinafter also referred to as the "payout rate") is 105% until the net increase in coins reaches 2,000 (which leaves a margin of 400 coins in terms of net increase until the end condition of the advantageous zone (net increase of 2,400 coins) is met). The state in which the correct button press sequence is announced in this manner is called the second state. Furthermore, after the net increase in coins reaches 2,000 coins in the second state, the correct button press sequence is announced with a probability such that the net increase in coins is maintained. The state in which the correct button press sequence is announced in this manner is called the third state. This third state is maintained at least while the slot machine 1 is operating.

(Push order notification control process during advantageous zone)
Next, an example of the process for realizing the push order notification control shown in Fig. 152 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 153. The push order notification control process shown in Fig. 153 is executed by the main control means 100 after a specified number of medals have been inserted into the slot machine 1 and the start lever 25 has been tilted, thereby performing an internal lottery, and before the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c start to rotate.

When the push order notification control process of Figure 153 is started, the main control means 100 first determines whether the current play area is an advantageous area (step Sb80). If the current play area is not an advantageous area, the determination result will be NO, the push order notification control process will be terminated, and other processing will be performed. On the other hand, if the current play area is an advantageous area, the determination result of step Sb80 will be YES, and 1 will be added to the value of the advantageous area game number counter stored in the RWM (step Sb81). Here, the advantageous area game number counter counts the number of games played in the advantageous area.

Next, the main control means 100 determines whether either the even push order bell (winning - D1 to D12) or the biased push order bell (winning - E1 to E16) was selected in the internal lottery (step Sb82). If neither the even push order bell nor the biased push order bell was selected, the result of the determination is NO, and the push order notification control process of FIG. 153 is terminated. On the other hand, if either the even push order bell or the biased push order bell was selected, the result of the determination is YES, and the main control means 100 references the value of the advantageous zone game number counter to determine whether the number of games played in the advantageous zone exceeded 8,000 (step Sb83). If the number of games played in the advantageous zone did not exceed 8,000, the result of the determination is NO, and the correct push order is announced with a probability based on the game status (such as "normal," "chance zone," "AT," or "sub-bonus") (step Sb84), and the push order notification control process of FIG. 153 is terminated. Here, the period from the start of the advantageous zone until the number of plays reaches 8,000 is the first state shown in Figure 152.

In contrast, if the number of games played during the advantageous zone exceeds 8,000 in the judgment process of step Sb83, the judgment result will be YES, and the main control means 100 will determine whether the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous zone is less than 2,000 (step Sb85). If the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous zone is less than 2,000, the judgment result will be YES, and the correct push order for the push order bell that won in the internal lottery will be announced with a first probability (step Sb86). Here, the first probability is the probability that the payout rate will be 105%; for example, in this embodiment, the correct push order will be announced with a 40% probability. Then, after processing step Sb86, the main control means 100 ends the push order announcement control process of FIG. 153.

In the judgment process of step Sb85, if the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous zone is 2,000 or more, the judgment result will be NO, and the main control means 100 will announce the correct push order of the push order bell that won in the internal lottery with the second probability (step Sb87), and terminate the push order notification control process of Figure 153. Here, the second probability is the probability that the correct push order will rarely be announced, and for example, in this embodiment, the correct push order will be announced with a probability of 0.8%. Then, after processing step Sb87, the main control means 100 will terminate the push order notification control process of Figure 153.

By processing steps Sb83 to Sb87 described above, once the number of games in the advantageous zone exceeds 8,000, the correct button press sequence is announced with the first probability exclusively by the processing of step Sb87 until the net increase in coins reaches 2,000, resulting in the second state shown in Figure 152. Furthermore, once the net increase in coins reaches 2,000 or more, the system enters the third state, where the correct button press sequence is announced with the second probability until the net increase in coins falls below 2,000. Once the net increase in coins falls below 2,000, the system enters the second state again, where the correct button press sequence is announced with the first probability. This controls the announcement of the correct button press sequence so that the net increase in coins remains approximately 2,000, resulting in the third state shown in Figure 152.

In this way, if the advantageous zone remains in the first state for a long period of 8,000 games after transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone (i.e., the net increase in coins, which is the condition for ending the advantageous zone, does not reach 2,400 coins), the system will transition to the second state (with a payout rate of 105%) after 8,000 games, causing the number of medals paid out and accumulated to increase, which can serve as a rescue measure for the player. Furthermore, if the net increase in coins reaches 2,000 coins after transitioning to the second state, the system will transition to the third state, suppressing the notification of the correct button sequence so that the net increase in coins remains at 2,000 coins, and the rescue measure (second state) will not excessively increase the player's gambling spirit.

For example, if the specifications are such that a freeze lottery is performed in at least one of the second and third states, as in the first state, and a transition to "AT" occurs if the freeze lottery is won, the AT game may be played in the winning state (second or third state). Even when the second or third state is reached, a normal presentation (a presentation executed when not in "AT") may be executed, and the rate of notification of the correct button sequence may increase, even though the transition to "AT" does not appear to have occurred. Even with this configuration, the transition to "AT" may be limited to, for example, a win in the freeze lottery, and gameplay may be performed during "AT." Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the condition for transitioning from the second state to the third state was when the net increase in coins after the start of the advantageous zone reached 2,000 coins after transitioning to the second state. However, the transition from the second state to the third state may also occur, for example, when the number of plays after the start of the advantageous zone reaches 12,000.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments, slot machines (reel-type gaming machines) that use gaming medals as gaming value and pachinko gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value have been described as examples of gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and can be similarly applied to, for example, reel-type gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value, as well as reel-type gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, mahjong ball gaming machines, and arrange ball machines that use information recorded on electronic recording media as gaming value, and similar effects can be obtained. The present invention can also be similarly applied to slot machines with four or more reels, and similar effects can be obtained.

1. Slot machine (first embodiment)
2 Front door 3a, 3b, 3c Reel (first embodiment)
25 Start lever 26a, 26b, 26c Stop switches (first embodiment)
60 Main control board 70 Sub-control board 70A Sub-main control board 70B Sub-sub control board 100 Main control means 200 Sub-control means 200A Sub-main control means 200B Sub-sub control means W Display window DP Image display unit PM Pachinko game machine 601 Slot machine (fourth embodiment)

Claims (1)

a main body member formed in a box shape having an opening;
a door member attached to the main body member by a hinge mechanism so as to be openable and closable;
a predetermined substrate having a first surface portion on which a plurality of types of components are arranged and a second surface portion to which lead wires of the plurality of types of components are soldered;
the plurality of types of parts include a first part, a second part having the same performance as the first part, a third part having a different performance from the first part, and a fourth part having a different performance from the first part, the second part, and the third part;
The first component has lead wire 1a and lead wire 1b,
the second component has lead wires 2a and 2b;
the third component has lead wires 3a and 3b;
The fourth component has a plurality of leads 4;
The lead wire 1 a of the first component is inserted into the through hole 1 c of the predetermined board from the first surface side,
The lead wire 1b of the first component is inserted into the through hole 1d of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side,
A virtual line segment connecting the through-hole 1c and the through-hole 1d is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 1,
the lead wire 1 a protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n1 degrees with respect to the predetermined imaginary line segment 1 when the second surface portion is viewed in a plan view with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation;
the lead wire 1b protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n2 degrees with respect to the predetermined imaginary line segment 1 when the second surface portion is viewed in a plan view with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation;
The lead wire 2 a of the second component is inserted into the through hole 2 c of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side,
The lead wire 2b of the second component is inserted into the through hole 2d of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side,
A virtual line segment connecting the through-hole 2c and the through-hole 2d is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 2,
the lead wire 2 a protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n3 degrees with respect to the predetermined imaginary line segment 2 when the second surface portion is viewed in a plan view with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation;
the lead wire 2b protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n4 degrees with respect to the predetermined imaginary line segment 2 when the second surface portion is viewed in a plan view with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation;
The lead wire 3 a of the third component is inserted into the through hole 3 c of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side,
The lead wire 3b of the third component is inserted into the through hole 3d of the predetermined board from the first surface portion side,
A virtual line segment connecting the through-hole 3c and the through-hole 3d is defined as a predetermined virtual line segment 3,
the lead wire 3 a protruding from the second surface portion forms an angle of n5 degrees with respect to the predetermined imaginary line segment 3 when the second surface portion is viewed in a plan view with the predetermined substrate in a predetermined orientation;
The n1 degree and the n3 degree are substantially the same angle,
The n2 degrees and the n4 degrees are substantially the same angle,
The n1 degree and the n5 degree are different angles,
predetermined component information is printed on the first surface portion,
When the predetermined substrate is provided on the inner surface of the main body member or the back surface of the door member, the predetermined component information is printed on the first surface in a horizontal format with characters arranged from left to right, or in a horizontal format with characters arranged from bottom to top,
A gaming machine characterized in that the multiple lead wires 4 of the fourth component are inserted into multiple through holes of the specified board from the first surface side, and the height of the multiple lead wires 4 protruding from the second surface is higher than the height of the lead wires 3a and 3b protruding from the second surface .